Home

2000 GMC Jimmy Owners Manual

1. GMC s Roadside Assistance provides stranded owners with over the phone roadside repairs location of the nearest GMC dealer or the following special services Flat Tire Change Installation of spare tire will be covered at no charge customer is responsible for repair or replacement of tire Fuel Delivery Delivery of enough fuel for the customer to get to the nearest service station up to 4 00 will be covered Jump Start No start situations which require a battery jump start will be covered at no charge Lock Out Replacement keys or locksmith service will be covered at no charge if you are unable to gain entry into your vehicle Delivery of the replacement key will be covered at no charge within 10 miles 16 km Emergency Towing Service Towing to the nearest GMC dealer for warranty related disablements will be covered Deluxe Trip Routing Custom made computerized highlighted maps using the most direct or scenic route are provided free of charge Maps include points of interest and a list of GMC dealers along the route Also included is a list of hotels along the route that are discounted through affiliation with Quest International Trip Routing is available through Roadside Assistance by calling 1 800 GMC 8782 462 8782 Please be prepared to provide your Vehicle Identification Number VIN Allow five working days for fulfillment Trip Interruption Assistance GMC will reimburse any reasonable trip i
2. Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service Lubricate chassis components or every 3 months whichever occurs first See footnote Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote 60 000 Miles 100 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service Lubricate chassis components or every 3 months whichever occurs first See footnote Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these conditions In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90 F 32 C or higher Inhilly or mountainous terrain 7 20 DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY Short Trip City Scheduled Maintenance When doing frequent trailer towing Uses such as found in taxi police or delivery service If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions change the fluid and filter every 50 000 miles 83 000 km Inspect engine accessory drive belt An Emission Control Service Replace fuel filter An Emission
3. NEXT 3 Press NEXT or the SEEK right arrow to search for the next selection If you hold this button or press it more than once the disc will advance further The next track number will appear on the display Sound is muted in this mode REV 4 Press and hold REV to return rapidly to a favorite passage You will hear the disc selection play at high speed while you press the REV button This allows you to listen and find out when the disc is at the desired selection Release REV to resume playing FWD 6 Press and hold this button to advance rapidly within a track You will hear the disc selection play at high speed while you press the FWD button This allows you to listen and find out when the disc is at the desired selection Release FWD to resume playing 3 28 RECALL Press this button to see what track is playing Press it again within five seconds to see how long the CD has been playing that track Elapsed time is displayed in minutes and seconds The track number will also appear when a new track begins to play Press RECALL again to return to the time display AM FM While in the CD mode press this button to stop playing the CD and play the radio The CD symbol will still display but the word CD will be replaced with either AM FM1 or FM2 If the radio is turned off the disc stays in the player and will resume playing at the point where it stopped CD AUX To switch between the player and the radio when a disc is
4. NEXT 3 Press this button or the SEEK right arrow to go to the next track If you hold the button or press it more than once the player will continue movingforward through the disc The sound will mute while seeking REV 4 Press and hold this button to reverse quickly through a track selection Release it to resume playing 5 Press this button to select a disc The disc number and track number will be displayed FWD 6 Press and hold this button to advance quickly through a track selection Release it to resume playing SEEK Press the right arrow to seek to the next selection on the CD Press the left arrow to search for the previous selection on the CD The sound will mute while seeking CD AUX Press this button if you have a disc loaded in the changer and the radio is turned on to play a compact disc Press AM FM to return to the radio when a compact disc is playing Press CD AUX to switch between the compact disc and console mounted CD changer if both are loaded Compact Disc Changer Errors If ERR appears on the display it could be that You are driving on a very rough road The disc should play when the road gets smoother A disc is upside down It is dirty scratched or wet It is very humid If so wait about an hour and try again The disc player is very hot The CD changer door is open Completely close the changer door to restore normal operation An empty magazine is inserted in the
5. Use the accelerator pedal to get to the higher speed Press the button at the end of the lever then release the button and the accelerator pedal You ll now cruise at the higher speed Move the cruise switch from ON to R A Hold it there until you get up to the speed you want and then release the switch To increase your speed in very small amounts move the switch briefly to R A Each time you do this your vehicle will go about 1 mph 1 6 km h faster 2 48 Reducing Speed While Using Cruise Control Press in the SET button at the end of the lever until you reach the lower speed you want then release it To slow down in very small amounts press the SET button briefly Each time you do this yov ll go about 1 mph 1 6 km h slower Passing Another Vehicle While Using Cruise Control Use the accelerator pedal to increase your speed When you take your foot off the pedal your vehicle will slow down to the cruise control speed you set earlier Using Cruise Control on Hills How well your cruise control will work on hills depends upon your speed load and the steepness of the hills When going up steep hills you may want to step on the accelerator pedal to maintain your speed When going downhill you may have to brake or shift to a lower gear to keep your speed down Of course applying the brake takes you out of cruise control Many drivers find this to be too much trouble and don t use cruise control on steep
6. Is the hill simply too rough Steep hills often have ruts gullies troughs and exposed rocks because they are more susceptible to the effects of erosion Driving Uphill Once you decide you can safely drive up the hill you need to take some special steps Use a low gear and get a firm grip on the steering wheel Get a smooth start up the hill and try to maintain your speed Don t use more power than you need because you don t want your wheels to start spinning or sliding Try to drive straight up the hill if at all possible If the path twists and turns you might want to find another route Turning or driving across steep hills can be dangerous You could lose traction slide sideways and possibly roll over You could be seriously injured or killed When driving up hills always try to go straight up Ease up on your speed as you approach the top of the hill Attach a flag to the vehicle to make you more visible to approaching traffic on trails or hills Sound the horn as you approach the top of the hill to let opposing traffic know you re there Use your headlamps even during the day They make you more visible to oncoming traffic Driving to the top crest of a hill at full speed can cause an accident There could be a drop off embankment cliff or even another vehicle You could be seriously injured or killed As you near the top of a hill slow down and stay alert 4 21 Q What should I
7. Throttle System Inspection Inspect the throttle system for interference or binding and for damaged or missing parts Replace parts as needed Replace any components that have high effort or excessive wear Do not lubricate accelerator and cruise control cables Drive Axle Service Check rear front axle fluid level and add as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking Transfer Case Four Wheel Drive Inspection Every 12 months or at oil change intervals check front axle and transfer case and add lubricant when necessary Check vent hose at transfer case for kinks and proper installation More frequent lubrication may be required on off road use 7 48 Brake System Inspection Inspect the complete system Inspect brake lines and hoses for proper hook up binding leaks cracks chafing etc Inspect disc brake pads for wear and rotors for surface condition Inspect other brake parts including calipers parking brake etc Check parking brake adjustment You may need to have your brakes inspected more often if your driving habits or conditions result in frequent braking Part D Recommended Fluids and Lubricants NOTE Fluids and lubricants identified below by name part number or specification may be obtained from your dealer USAGE FLUID LUBRICANT Engine Oil Engine Oil with the American Petroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines starburst symbol of the proper viscosity To dete
8. 2 Insert the adapter into the cassette slot 3 Within five seconds press and hold the REV and FWD buttons at the same time for three seconds The tape symbol on the display will flash showing that the cut tape detection feature is no longer active This override routine will remain active until EJECT is pressed AM FM Stereo with Cassette Tape Player and Automatic Tone Control If Equipped Playing the Radio PWR VOL Press this knob to turn the system on and off To increase volume turn the knob clockwise Turn it counterclockwise to decrease volume The knob is capable of being rotated continuously RECALL Display the time with the ignition off by pressing this button When the radio is playing press this button to recall the station frequency 3 15 SCV Your system has a feature called Speed Compensated Volume SCV With SCV your audio system adjusts automatically to make up for road and wind noise as you drive Set the volume at the desired level Turn the control ring behind the upper knob clockwise to adjust the SCV Then as you drive SCV automatically increases the volume as necessary to overcome noise at any particular speed The volume level should always sound the same to you as you drive If you don t want to use SCV turn the control all the way down Each notch on the control ring allows for more volume compensation at faster vehicle speeds Finding a Station AM FM Press this button to switch
9. BBB Auto Line Council of Better Business Bureaus Inc 4200 Wilson Boulevard Suite 800 Arlington VA 22203 1804 Telephone 1 800 955 5100 This program is available in all 50 states and the District of Columbia Eligibility is limited by vehicle age mileage and other factors General Motors reserves the right to change eligibility limitations and or discontinue its participation in this program Customer Assistance for Text Telephone TTY Users To assist customers who are deaf hard of hearing or speech impaired and who use Text Telephones TTYs GMC has TTY equipment available at its Customer Assistance Center Any TTY user can communicate with GMC by dialing 1 800 GMC 8583 462 8583 TTY users in Canada can dial 1 800 263 3830 Customer Assistance Offices GMC encourages customers to call the toll free number for assistance If a U S customer wishes to write to GMC the letter should be addressed to GMC s Customer Assistance Center United States Pontiac GMC Customer Assistance Center PO Box 436008 Pontiac MI 48343 6008 1 800 GMC 8782 462 8782 1 800 GMC 8583 462 8583 For Text Telephone devices TTYs Roadside Assistance 1 800 GMC 8782 462 8782 Canada General Motors of Canada Limited Customer Communication Centre 163 005 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Oshawa Ontario L1H 8P7 1 800 263 3777 English 1 800 263 7854 French 1 800 263 3830 For Text Telephone devices TTYs Roadside As
10. Bumper to Bumper 3 years 36 000 miles 60 000 km Limited Warranty bea TAL i a a PETAT he Every 2000 Jimmy S Cahmitapaiii afr IoT WELSYN under warranty is backed with the 1 82800 GMC 8782 following NS AdE For vehicles purchased in Canada l call 1 800 268 6800 that provides in an emergency Courtesy Free lockout assistance ici call Free dead battery assistance p e i Free out of fuel assistance outing Free flat tire change Emergency towing 2000 GMC Jimmy Owner s Manual Litho in U S A Copyright General Motors Corporation 1999 Part Number X2011 A First Edition All Rights Reserved ii CS Co o o CS CS Table of Contents Seats and Restraint Systems Seats and Seat Controls Air Bag Systems Safety Belts Child Restraints Features and Controls Keys and Door Locks Cruise Control Remote Keyless Entry RKE System If Equipped Interior and Exterior Lamps Endgate Liftgate Mirrors Automatic Transmission If Equipped Storage Compartments Manual Transmission Operation If Equipped Luggage Carrier If Equipped Four Wheel Drive Operation If Equipped Accessory Power Outlets Parking Brake OnStar System If Equipped Windows Sunroof If Equipped Tilt Wheel HomeLink Transmitter If Equipped Turn Signal Multifunction Lever Instrument Panel Warning Lights and Gages Windshield Wipers Table of Contents cont d Comfort Controls
11. There are parts of the air bag system in several places around your vehicle You don t want the system to inflate while someone is working on your vehicle Your dealer and the service manual have information about servicing your vehicle and the air bag system To purchase a service manual see Service and Owner Publications in the Index For up to two minutes after the ignition key is turned off and the battery is disconnected an air bag can still inflate during improper service You can be injured if you are close to an air bag when it inflates Avoid wires wrapped with yellow tape or yellow connectors They are probably part of the air bag system Be sure to follow proper service procedures and make sure the person performing work for you is qualified to do so The air bag system does not need regular maintenance 1 29 Adding Equipment to Your Air Bag Equipped Vehicle Q If I add a push bumper or a bicycle rack to the front of my vehicle will it keep the air bags from working properly A As long as the push bumper or bicycle rack is attached to your vehicle so that the vehicle s basic structure isn t changed it s not likely to keep the air bags from working properly in a crash Q Is there anything I might add to the front of the vehicle that could keep the air bags from working properly A Yes If you add things that change your vehicle s frame bumper system front end sheet metal or height the
12. always be sure that it is securely reattached 2 64 Cargo Tie Downs There are four cargo tie downs in the rear of your vehicle that allow you to strap cargo in and keep it from moving Luggage Carrier Option If you try to carry something on top of your vehicle that is longer or wider than the luggage carrier like paneling plywood a mattress and so forth the wind can catch it as you drive along This can cause you to lose control What you are carrying could be violently torn off and this could cause you or other drivers to have a collision and of course damage your vehicle You may be able to carry something like this inside But never carry something longer or wider than the luggage carrier on top of your vehicle The luggage carrier has slats side rails and crossrails attached to the roof to secure cargo The adjustable tie downs at either end of the crossrails should be used to secure loads to the luggage carrier Use GM accessory racks that are compatible with your luggage carrier for transporting sports equipment These are available through your GM dealer You can adjust the crossrails to handle loads of various sizes Just loosen the slider knobs at each end of the crossrail and move them to where you want them Make sure both sides of the crossrails are even then tighten the slider knobs Be sure the cargo is properly loaded Follow these guidelines Carrying small heavy
13. ll be ready to secure the child restraint itself 1 47 Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear Outside Seat Position You ll be using the lap shoulder belt See the earlier part about the top strap if the child restraint has one Be sure to follow the instructions that came with the child restraint Secure the child in the child restraint when and 3 Buckle the belt Make sure the release button is as the instructions say positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to 1 Put the restraint on the seat 2 Pick up the latch plate and run the lap and shoulder portions of the vehicle s safety belt through or around the restraint The child restraint instructions will show you how If the shoulder belt goes in front of the child s face or neck put it behind the child restraint 1 48 4 Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of the retractor to set the lock To tighten the belt feed the shoulder belt back into the retractor while you push down on the child restraint If you re using a forward facing child restraint you may find it helpful to use your knee to push down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure 1 49 To remove the child restraint just unbuckle the vehicle s Securing a Child Restraint in the Right safety belt and let it go back all the way The
14. D C area or write to NHTSA U S Department of Transportation Washington D C 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from the hotline 8 10 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS TO THE CANADIAN GOVERNMENT If you live in Canada and you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect you should immediately notify Transport Canada in addition to notifying General Motors of Canada Limited You may write to Transport Canada 330 Sparks Street Tower C Ottawa Ontario K1A ON5 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS TO GENERAL MOTORS In addition to notifying NHTSA or Transport Canada in a situation like this we certainly hope you ll notify us Please call us at 1 800 GMC 8782 1 800 462 8782 or write Pontiac GMC Customer Assistance Center P O Box 436008 Pontiac MI 48343 6008 In Canada please call us at 1 800 263 3777 English or 1 800 263 7854 French Or write General Motors of Canada Limited Customer Communication Centre 163 005 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Oshawa Ontario L1H 8P7 Ordering Owner Publications in Canada Owner s manuals are available for purchase for all current and most past model General Motors vehicles The toll free telephone number for ordering information in Canada is 1 800 668 5539 8 11 2000 GMC SERVICE PUBLICATIONS ORDERING INFORMATION The following publications covering the operation and servicing of your vehicle can be purchased by filling out the Service Publ
15. Deep water can sweep your vehicle downstream and you and your passengers could drown If it s only shallow water it can still wash away the ground from under your tires and you could lose traction and roll the vehicle over Don t drive through rushing water See Driving Through Water in the Index for more information on driving through water After Off Road Driving Remove any brush or debris that has collected on the underbody chassis or under the hood These accumulations can be a fire hazard After operation in mud or sand have the brake linings cleaned and checked These substances can cause glazing and uneven braking Check the body structure steering suspension wheels tires and exhaust system for damage Also check the fuel lines and cooling system for any leakage Your vehicle will require more frequent service due to off road use Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for additional information 4 29 Driving at Night Here are some tips on night driving Drive defensively Don t drink and drive Adjust your inside rearview mirror to reduce the glare from headlamps behind you Since you can t see as well you may need to slow down and keep more space between you and other vehicles Slow down especially on higher speed roads Your headlamps can light up only so much road ahead Inremote areas watch for animals If you re tired pull off the road in a safe place and r
16. Now connect the black negative cable to the good battery s negative terminal Don t let the other end touch anything until the next step The other end of the negative cable doesn t go to the dead battery It goes to a heavy unpainted metal part on the engine of the vehicle with the dead battery 9 Attach the cable at least 18 inches 45 cm away from the dead battery but not near engine parts that move The electrical connection is just as good there but the chance of sparks getting back to the battery is much less 10 Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run the engine for awhile 11 Try to start the vehicle with the dead battery If it won t start after a few tries make sure all connections are good If it still won t start it probably needs service Fans or other moving engine parts can injure you badly Keep your hands away from moving parts once the engine is running 12 Remove the cables in reverse order to prevent Towing Your Vehicle electrical shorting Take care that they don t touch each other or any other metal To help avoid serious personal injury to you or others Never let passengers ride in a vehicle that is being towed Never tow faster than safe or posted speeds Never tow with damaged parts not fully secured Never get under your vehicle after it has been lifted by the tow truck Always secure the vehicle on each side with separate safety ch
17. Ontario L1H 8P7 4 51 Weight of the Trailer Tongue The tongue load A of any trailer is an important weight to measure because it affects the total or gross weight of your vehicle The Gross Vehicle Weight GVW includes the curb weight of the vehicle any cargo you may carry in it and the people who will be riding in the vehicle And if you will tow a trailer you must add the tongue load to the GVW because your vehicle will be carrying that weight too See Loading Your Vehicle in the Index for more information about your vehicle s maximum load capacity 4 52 If you re using a weight carrying hitch the trailer tongue A should weigh 10 percent of the total loaded trailer weight B If you re using a weight distributing hitch the trailer tongue A should weigh 12 percent of the total loaded trailer weight B After you ve loaded your trailer weigh the trailer and then the tongue separately to see if the weights are proper If they aren t you may be able to get them right simply by moving some items around in the trailer Total Weight on Your Vehicle s Tires Be sure your vehicle s tires are inflated to the upper limit for cold tires You ll find these numbers on the Certification label at the rear edge of the driver s door or see Tire Loading in the Index Then be sure you don t go over the GVW limit for your vehicle including the weight of the trailer tongue Hitches It s
18. Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote 45 000 Miles 75 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 12 months whichever occurs first ACTUAL An Emission Control Service Lubricate chassis components or every 12 months whichever occurs first See footnote Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these conditions In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90 F 32 C or higher In hilly or mountainous terrain 7 34 Long Trip Highway Scheduled Maintenance When doing frequent trailer towing Uses such as found in taxi police or delivery service If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions change the fluid and filter every 50 000 miles 83 000 km Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote 50 000 Miles 83 000 km If you haven t used your vehicle under severe conditions listed previously and ACTUAL therefore haven t changed your automatic transmission fluid change both the fluid and filter Manual t
19. TONE display goes blank This will return the tone adjustment to the BASS and TREB controls Ifa BASS or TREB control is rotated the AUTO TONE display will go blank Use PUSHBUTTONS to program AUTO TONE 3 17 Adjusting the Speakers BAL Press lightly on this knob to release it from its stored position Turn the control clockwise to adjust sound to the right speakers and counterclockwise to adjust sound to the left speakers The middle position balances the sound between the speakers FADE Press lightly on this knob to release it from its stored position Turn the control clockwise to adjust the sound to the front speakers and counterclockwise for the rear speakers The middle position balances the sound between the speakers Push these knobs back into their stored positions when you re not using them Playing a Cassette Tape Your tape player is built to work best with tapes that are up to 30 to 45 minutes long on each side Tapes longer than that are so thin they may not work well in this player To load a cassette tape with the ignition off press EJECT or RECALL Then insert the cassette tape If the ignition is on but the radio is off the tape will begin playing 3 18 Once the tape is playing use the VOL AUTO TONE BAL FADE BASS and TREB controls just as you do for the radio The tape symbol and a direction arrow will be on the display whenever a tape is being played Anytime a tape is inserted the top side
20. The clutch master cylinder reservoir is filled with hydraulic clutch fluid It is not necessary to regularly check clutch fluid unless you suspect there is a leak in the system Adding fluid won t correct a leak A fluid loss in this system could indicate a problem Have the system inspected and repaired 6 21 When to Check and What to Use Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how often you should check the fluid level in your clutch master cylinder reservoir and for the proper fluid See Owner Checks and Services and Recommended Fluids and Lubricants in the Index How to Check and Add Fluid The proper fluid should be added if the level does not reach the bottom of the diaphragm when it s in place in the reservoir See the instructions on the reservoir cap 6 22 Rear Axle When to Check and Change Lubricant Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how often to check the lubricant and when to change it See Scheduled Maintenance Services in the Index How to Check Lubricant If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole you ll need to add some lubricant Add enough lubricant to raise the level to the bottom of the filler plug hole What to Use Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what kind of lubricant to use See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants in the Index Four Wheel Drive Most lubricant checks in this section also apply to four wheel dr
21. Transfer Case in the Index If you re pulling a trailer see Towing a Trailer in the Index 2 21 Ensure the shift lever is fully in PARK P before starting the engine Your vehicle has an automatic transmission shift lock control system You have to fully apply your regular brakes before you can shift from PARK P when the ignition key is in RUN If you cannot shift out of PARK P ease pressure on the shift lever push the shift lever all the way into PARK P press the button in on the console shift lever as you maintain brake application Then move the shift lever into the gear you wish See Shifting Out of PARK P in the Index REVERSE R Use this gear to back up NOTICE Shifting to REVERSE R while your vehicle is moving forward could damage your transmission Shift to REVERSE R only after your vehicle is stopped To rock your vehicle back and forth to get out of snow ice or sand without damaging your transmission see Stuck In Sand Mud Ice or Snow in the Index 2 22 NEUTRAL N In this position your engine doesn t connect with the wheels To restart when you re already moving use NEUTRAL N only Shifting out of PARK P or NEUTRAL N while your engine is racing running at high speed is dangerous Unless your foot is firmly on the brake pedal your vehicle could move very rapidly You could lose control and hit people or objects Don t shift out of P
22. are on it Try not to brake while you re actually on the ice and avoid sudden steering maneuvers 4 41 If You re Caught in a Blizzard Tie ared cloth to your vehicle to alert police that you ve been stopped by the snow Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you If you have no blankets or extra clothing make body insulators from newspapers burlap bags rags floor mats anything you can wrap around yourself or tuck under your clothing to keep warm If you are stopped by heavy snow you could be in a serious situation You should probably stay with your vehicle unless you know for sure that you are near help and you can hike through the snow Here are some things to do to summon help and keep yourself and your passengers safe Turn on your hazard flashers You can run the engine to keep warm but be careful 4 42 Snow can trap exhaust gases under your vehicle This can cause deadly CO carbon monoxide gas to get inside CO could overcome you and kill you You can t see it or smell it so you might not know it is in your vehicle Clear away snow from around the base of your vehicle especially any that is blocking your exhaust pipe And check around again from time to time to be sure snow doesn t collect there Open a window just a little on the side of the vehicle that s away from the wind This will help keep CO out Run your engine only as long as you must This saves fuel When
23. cooling and ventilation in your vehicle Standard Climate Control System Fan Control The knob on the left side of the heating system control panel controls the fan speed To increase airflow move the knob clockwise To decrease airflow move it counterclockwise 3 2 Temperature Knob The middle knob on the control panel lets you select the relative temperature of the air flowing into the passenger area of your vehicle Move the knob clockwise toward the red area for warmer air Move the knob counterclockwise toward the blue area for cooler air Mode Knob The right knob on the control panel allows you to choose the direction of air delivery OFF This setting turns the system off Some outside air will still enter the vehicle whenever the vehicle is moving forward MAX A C This setting provides maximum cooling with the least amount of work MAX A C recirculates much of the air inside your vehicle so it cools quickly This setting directs most of the air through the instrument panel vents and a small amount through the floor vents A C This setting cools the air entering your vehicle and directs most of the air through the instrument panel vents and a small amount through the floor vents gt o Vad BI LEVEL A C This setting cools the air entering your vehicle and directs it through the heater floor outlets as well as the instrument panel outlets gt o A VENT This setti
24. engine coolant at the engine radiator heater core and other parts coolant recovery tank See Engine Coolant in the Use the recommended coolant and the proper Index for more information coolant mixture Adding only plain water to your cooling system can be dangerous Plain water or some other liquid like alcohol can boil before the proper coolant mixture will Your vehicle s coolant warning system is set for the proper coolant mixture With plain water or the wrong mixture your engine could get too hot but you wouldn t get the overheat warning Your engine could catch fire and you or others could be burned Use a 50 50 mixture of clean drinkable water and DEX COOL coolant 5 13 You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot engine parts Coolant contains ethylene glycol and it will burn if the engine parts are hot enough Don t spill coolant on a hot engine When the coolant in the coolant recovery tank is at the ADD mark start your vehicle If the overheat warning continues there s one more thing you can try You can add the proper coolant mixture directly to the radiator but be sure the cooling system is cool before you do it 5 14 Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling system can blow out and burn you badly They are under pressure and if you turn the radiator pressure cap even a little they can come out at high speed Never turn the cap when the cooling system including the
25. f Soa Sediont See Section 6 Oil Viscosity igs unloaded gas onii 87 Octane or higher See Section 6 Engine Oil See Section 6 Section 1 Seats and Restraint Systems Here you ll find information about the seats in your vehicle and how to use your safety belts properly You can also learn about some things you should not do with air bags and safety belts p ps ie 2 11 15 Seats and Seat Controls Safety Belts They re for Everyone Here Are Questions Many People Ask About Safety Belts and the Answers How to Wear Safety Belts Properly Driver Position Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy Right Front Passenger Position Air Bag System Center Front Passenger Position 4 Door Models Rear Seat Passengers Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for Children and Small Adults 4 Door Models Center Rear Passenger Position 4 Door Models Children Child Restraints Larger Children Safety Belt Extender Checking Your Restraint Systems Replacing Restraint System Parts After a Crash Seats and Seat Controls This section tells you about the seats how to adjust them and fold them up and down Manual Front Seat You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to adjust a manual driver s seat while the vehicle is moving The sudden movement could startle and confuse you or make you push a pedal when you don t want to Adjust the driver s seat only when the vehicle is not moving Move the lever under the
26. have a manual transmission shift to a higher gear as soon as possible If you have an automatic transmission lift your foot off the accelerator pedal The solid red danger range tells you that your engine speed is at its upper limits You should immediately shift to a higher gear or lift your foot off the accelerator pedal NOTICE Do not operate the engine with the tachometer in the red range or engine damage will occur Warning Lights Gages and Indicators This part describes the warning lights and gages that may be on your vehicle The pictures will help you locate them Warning lights and gages can signal that something is wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause an expensive repair or replacement Paying attention to your warning lights and gages could also save you or others from injury Warning lights come on when there may be or is a problem with one of your vehicle s functions As you will see in the details on the next few pages some warning lights come on briefly when you start the engine just to let you know they re working If you are familiar with this section you should not be alarmed when this happens Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problem with one of your vehicle s functions Often gages and warning lights work together to let you know when there s a problem with your vehicle When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on when you are driving or when one of the
27. the HOT area or cross hatched area for a hot check 2 Push it back in all the way wait three seconds and 4 If the fluid level is in the acceptable range push the then pull it back out again dipstick back in all the way then flip the handle down to lock the dipstick in place 6 19 How to Add Fluid Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what kind of transmission fluid to use See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants in the Index Add fluid only after checking the transmission fluid while it is hot A cold check is used only as a reference If the fluid level is low add only enough of the proper fluid to bring the level up to the HOT area for a hot check It doesn t take much fluid generally less than one pint 0 5 L Don t overfill NOTICE We recommend you use only fluid labeled DEXRON IIL because fluid with that label is made especially for your automatic transmission Damage caused by fluid other than DEXRON III is not covered by your new vehicle warranty After adding fluid recheck the fluid level as described under How to Check When the correct fluid level is obtained push the dipstick back in all the way then flip the handle down to lock the dipstick in place 6 20 Manual Transmission Fluid When to Check A good time to have it checked is when the engine oil is changed However the fluid in your manual transmission doesn t require changing How to Check B
28. velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote 84 000 Miles 140 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service See footnote Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote Lubricate chassis components or every 3 months whichever occurs first Lubricate chassis components or every 3 months whichever occurs first DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY eee Short Trip City Scheduled Maintenance 87 000 Miles 145 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service Lubricate chassis components or every 3 months whichever occurs first See footnote Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote 90 000 Miles 150 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service Lubricate chassis components or every 3 months whichever occurs first See footnote Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check
29. 19 20 21 22 23 24 Usage Turn Signal Cluster Engine Control Module Interior lights Auxiliary Power Power Locks Motor 4WD Switch Engine Controls VCM PCM Transmission Supplemental Inflatable Restraint Front Wiper Steering Wheel Radio Controls Radio Battery Amplifier HVAC Manual HVAC I Automatic HVAC Sensors Automatic Anti Lock Brakes Rear Wiper Radio Ignition 6 61 Engine Compartment Fuse Block INT ABS IGN RAP IGN STUD OU BAT B A 2 FUSE SPARE PULLER FUSES B TRLTRN LT TRN BTSI PARKLP HVAC HAZLP TRR TRN RT TRN STARTER TTACHMSY VECHMSU TRL BU ECMI LDLEV VEH B U ENG OXYSEN AR DEFOG ar PRK coms Fpume suL iane Leer RRDFoG TRLPRK LTHDLP LIFT HTOMIR HDLP PWR DRL clkss RTHDLP MIR LKS ATC AC FOG LP TBC AIG FOG LP RT TURN CRANK LT TURN FRPRK WAY PMP IGN G STOPLP HORN CHMSL JHDLPwr HORN IHTDSEAT RR WAV C PRINTED IN USA The fuse block is under the hood at the driver s side of the engine compartment Remove the cover by turning the fastener counterclockwise To reinstall the fuse panel cover push in and turn the fastene
30. 2 53 2 20 Engine Coolant Heater If Equipped 2 56 2 21 Automatic Transmission Operation 2 67 2 24 Manual Transmission Operation 2 68 2 26 Four Wheel Drive If Equipped 2 69 2 33 Parking Brake 2 73 2 34 Shifting Into PARK P 2 77 Automatic Transmission Only 2 37 Shifting Out of PARK P Automatic Transmission Only Parking Over Things That Burn Engine Exhaust Running Your Engine While You re Parked Automatic Transmission Locking Rear Axle Windows Turn Signal Multifunction Lever Exterior Lamps Interior Lamps Mirrors Storage Compartments Accessory Power Outlets If Equipped Sunroof If Equipped HomeLink Transmitter If Equipped Instrument Panel Warning Lights Gages and Indicators Keys Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition key is dangerous for many reasons A child or others could be badly injured or even killed They could operate the power windows or other controls or even make the vehicle move Don t leave the keys in a vehicle with children This vehicle has one double sided key for the ignition endgate liftgate spare tire lock two door vehicles and door locks It will fit with either side up When a new vehicle is delivered the dealer provides the owner with a pair of identical keys and a key code number The key code number tells your dealer or a qualified locksmith how to make extra keys Keep this number in a safe place If you lose your keys you Il be ab
31. 37 Highway Hypnosis 4 13 Off Road Recovery 4 38 Hill and Mountain Roads 4 13 Passing 4 40 Winter Driving 4 15 Loss of Control 4 44 Recreational Vehicle Towing 4 16 Off Road Driving with Your 4 46 Loading Your Vehicle Four Wheel Drive Vehicle 4 48 Towing a Trailer Your Driving the Road and Your Vehicle Whenever we drive we re taking on an important responsibility This is true for any motor vehicle passenger car van truck or sport utility Driver behavior the driving environment and the vehicle s design all affect how well a vehicle performs But statistics show that the most important factor by far is how we drive Knowing how these three factors work together can help you understand how your vehicle handles and what you can do to avoid many types of crashes including a rollover crash Driver Behavior The single most important thing is this everyone in the vehicle including the driver should buckle up see Safety Belts in the Index In fact most serious injuries and fatalities to unbelted occupants can be reduced or prevented by the use of safety belts In a rollover crash an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt In addition avoiding excessive speed sudden or abrupt turns and drunken or aggressive driving can help make trips safer and avoid the possibility of a crash especially a rollover crash This section provides many useful tips to help you drive
32. 4 Open both hoods and locate the batteries Find the positive and negative terminals on each battery Using a match near a battery can cause battery gas to explode People have been hurt doing this and some have been blinded Use a flashlight if you need more light Be sure the battery has enough water You don t need to add water to the ACDelco battery installed in every new GM vehicle But if a battery has filler caps be sure the right amount of fluid is there If it is low add water to take care of that first If you don t explosive gas could be present Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you Don t get it on you If you accidentally get it in your eyes or on your skin flush the place with water and get medical help immediately 5 Check that the jumper cables don t have loose or missing insulation If they do you could get a shock The vehicles could be damaged too Before you connect the cables here are some basic things you should know Positive will go to positive and negative will go to a heavy unpainted metal engine part Don t connect positive to negative or you ll get a short that would damage the battery and maybe other parts too 6 Connect the red positive cable to the positive terminal of the vehicle with the dead battery Don t let the other end touch metal Connect it to the positive terminal of the good battery
33. 7 37 Long Trip Highway Scheduled Maintenance 75 000 Miles 125 000 km Continued Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these conditions Inheavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90 F 32 C or higher Inhilly or mountainous terrain When doing frequent trailer towing Uses such as found in taxi police or delivery service If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions change the fluid and filter every 50 000 miles 83 000 km Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote 82 500 Miles 137 500 km Change engine oil and filter or every 12 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service Lubricate chassis components or every 12 months whichever occurs first See footnote Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY 7 38 __ Long Trip Highway Scheduled Maintenance 90 000 Miles 150 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 12 months whichever occurs first A
34. CD changer Try the magazine again with a disc loaded on one of the trays Press RECALL to make ERR go off the display If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be corrected please contact your dealer 3 37 Theft Deterrent Feature If Equipped THEFTLOCK is designed to discourage theft of your radio It works by using a secret code to disable all radio functions whenever battery power is removed The THEFTLOCK feature for the radio may be used or ignored If ignored the system plays normally and the radio is not protected by the feature If THEFTLOCK is activated your radio will not operate if stolen When THEFTLOCK is activated the radio will display LOC to indicate a locked condition anytime battery power has been interrupted If your battery loses power for any reason you must unlock the radio with the secret code before it will operate Activating the Theft Deterrent Feature The instructions which follow explain how to enter your secret code to activate the THEFTLOCK system It is recommended that you read through all nine steps before starting the procedure If you allow more than 15 seconds to elapse between any steps the radio automatically reverts to time and you must start the procedure over at Step 4 3 38 Write down any three or four digit number from 000 to 1999 and keep it in a safe place separate from the vehicle Turn the ignition to ACCESSORY or RUN 3 Turn the radio off
35. Control Service See footnote Replace engine air cleaner filter An Emission Control Service Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote 63 000 Miles 105 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service Lubricate chassis components or every 3 months whichever occurs first See footnote Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY 7 21 Short Trip City Scheduled Maintenance 66 000 Miles 110 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service See footnote Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote 69 000 Miles 115 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service See footnote Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and ax
36. Driving on Grades in the Index If you get the overheat warning with no sign of steam try this for a minute or so 1 If your air conditioner is on turn it off 2 Turn on your heater to full hot at the highest fan speed and open the window as necessary 3 If you re in a traffic jam shift to NEUTRAL N otherwise shift to the highest gear while driving DRIVE D or THIRD 3 for automatic transmissions 5 10 If you no longer have the overheat warning you can drive Just to be safe drive slower for about 10 minutes If the warning doesn t come back on you can drive normally If the warning continues pull over stop and park your vehicle right away If there s still no sign of steam push down the accelerator until the engine speed is about twice as fast as normal idle speed for at least three minutes while you re parked If you still have the warning turn off the engine and get everyone out of the vehicle until it cools down You may decide not to lift the hood but to get service help right away Cooling System When you decide it s safe to lift the hood here s what you ll see A Coolant Recovery Tank B Radiator Pressure Cap C Engine Fan If the coolant inside the coolant recovery tank is boiling don t do anything else until it cools down When the engine is cold the coolant level should be at least up to the ADD mark If it isn t you may have a leak in the radiator ho
37. Press the 1 and 4 buttons together Hold them down until shows on the display Next you will use the secret code number which you have written down 5 Press MN and 000 will appear on the display 6 Press MN again to make the last two digits agree with your code Press HR to make the first one or two digits agree with your code Press AM FM after you have confirmed that the code matches the secret code you have written down The display will show REP to let you know that you need to repeat Steps 5 through 7 to confirm your secret code Press AM FM and this time the display will show SEC to let you know that your radio is secure The LED indicator by the volume control will begin flashing when the ignition is turned off Unlocking the Theft Deterrent Feature After a Power Loss Enter your secret code as follows pause no more than 15 seconds between steps 1 Turn the ignition on LOC will appear on the display 2 Press MN and 000 will appear on the display 3 Press MN again to make the last two digits agree with your code 4 Press HR to make the first one or two digits agree with your code 5 Press AM FM after you have confirmed that the code matches the secret code you have written down The display will show SEC indicating the radio is now operable and secure If you enter the wrong code eight times INOP will appear on the display You will have to wait an hour with the ignition on bef
38. There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in the reservoir might go down The first is that the brake fluid goes down to an acceptable level during normal brake lining wear When new linings are put in the fluid level goes back up The other reason is that fluid is leaking out of the brake system If it is you should have your brake system fixed since a leak means that sooner or later your brakes won t work well or won t work at all So it isn t a good idea to top off your brake fluid Adding brake fluid won t correct a leak If you add fluid when your linings are worn then you ll have too much fluid when you get new brake linings You should add or remove brake fluid as necessary only when work is done on the brake hydraulic system If you have too much brake fluid it can spill on the engine The fluid will burn if the engine is hot enough You or others could be burned and your vehicle could be damaged Add brake fluid only when work is done on the brake hydraulic system Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine when to check your brake fluid See Periodic Maintenance Inspections in the Index Checking Brake Fluid You can check the brake fluid without taking off the cap Just look at the brake fluid reservoir The fluid level should be above MIN If it isn t have your brake system checked to see if there is a leak After work is done on the brake hydraulic system make
39. You can t see or smell CO It can cause unconsciousness and even death If you must drive with the rear window endgate or liftgate open or if electrical wiring or other cable connections must pass through the seal between the body and the rear window endgate or liftgate Make sure all other windows are shut Turn the fan on your heating or cooling system to its highest speed with the setting on VENT or OUTSIDE AIR That will force outside air into your vehicle See Comfort Controls in the Index If you have air outlets on or under the instrument panel open them all the way See Engine Exhaust in the Index Endgate Release To open a mechanical lock system from the outside insert the key into the lock and turn it counterclockwise to unlock the glass To open a power lock system from the outside insert the key into the lock button and turn counterclockwise All doors will unlock If your vehicle is equipped with the remote keyless entry system your vehicle does not have a lock on the endgate It is equipped with a pushbutton to release the glass You may also use the keyless entry system or the power door locks if your vehicle is so equipped 2 10 When the doors are unlocked press the button to open the glass Reach inside the endgate to lift the handle and open the endgate The endgate can be opened without a key if the driver s door is unlocked The endgate glass will not release
40. an oil container show its viscosity or thickness Do not use other viscosity oils such as SAE 20W 50 NOTICE Use only engine oil with the American Petroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines starburst symbol Failure to use the recommended oil can result in engine damage not covered by your warranty GM Goodwrench oil meets all the requirements for your vehicle If you are in an area where the temperature falls below 20 F 29 C consider using either an SAE 5W 30 synthetic oil or an SAE OW 30 oil Both will provide easier cold starting and better protection for your engine at extremely low temperatures 6 14 Engine Oil Additives Don t add anything to your oil The recommended oils with the starburst symbol are all you will need for good performance and engine protection When to Change Engine Oil If any one of these is true for you use the short trip city maintenance schedule Most trips are less than 5 to 10 miles 8 to 16 km This is particularly important when outside temperatures are below freezing Most trips include extensive idling such as frequent driving in stop and go traffic You operate your vehicle in dusty areas or off road frequently You frequently tow a trailer or use a carrier on top of your vehicle The vehicle is used for delivery service police taxi or other commercial application Driving under these conditions causes engine oil to break down soo
41. and you re not wearing a safety belt your injuries can be much worse You can hit things inside the vehicle or be ejected from it You can be seriously injured or killed In the same crash you might not be if you are buckled up Always fasten your safety belt and check that your passengers belts are fastened properly too Your vehicle has a light that comes on as a reminder to buckle up See Safety Belt Reminder Light in the Index 1 11 In most states and Canadian provinces the law says to wear safety belts Here s why They work You never know if you ll be in a crash If you do have a crash you don t know if it will be a bad one A few crashes are mild and some crashes can be so serious that even buckled up a person wouldn t survive But most crashes are in between In many of them people who buckle up can survive and sometimes walk away Without belts they could have been badly hurt or killed After more than 30 years of safety belts in vehicles the facts are clear In most crashes buckling up does matter a lot 1 12 Why Safety Belts Work When you ride in or on anything you go as fast as it goes Take the simplest vehicle Suppose it s just a seat on wheels Put someone on it Get it up to speed Then stop the vehicle The rider doesn t stop The person keeps going until stopped by something or the instrument panel In a real vehicle it could be the wi
42. and Audio Systems Heating and Air Conditioning Radio Theft Deterrent Feature Setting the Radio Clock Steering Wheel Controls If Equipped Radio Cassette Player CD Player Your Driving and the Road Braking Anti lock Brakes Recreational Vehicle Towing Steering Loading Your Vehicle Driving Tips for Various Road Conditions Towing a Trailer Off Road Driving Problems on the Road Hazard Warning Flashers Engine Overheating Jump Starting Changing a Flat Tire Towing Your Vehicle If You re Stuck IEL iv Table of Contents cont d Service and Appearance Care Fuel Appearance Care Checking Fluids and Lubricants Electrical System Fuses and Circuit Breakers Bulb Replacement Capacities and Specifications Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts Tires and Wheels Maintenance Schedule Scheduled Maintenance Recommended Fluids and Lubricants Periodic Maintenance Inspections Maintenance Records Table of Contents cont d Customer Assistance Information Section 8 Customer Satisfaction Procedures Warranty Information See Warranty Manual Customer Assistance Offices Reporting Safety Defects on page 8 10 Roadside Assistance and Courtesy Transportation Service Publications Please refer to the last page of this manual for your Service Station Guide GENERAL MOTORS GM the GM Emblem GMC the GMC Emblem and the nam
43. ary Check here if your billing address lt lt lt lt lt __ 25 _ wane Expiration el go is different from your shipping CITY STATE ZIP CODE Date mo yr address shown DAYTIME TELEPHONE NO AREA CODE CUSTOMER SIGNATURE GM GMC ORD99 Prices are subject to change without notice and without incurring Note to Canadian Customers All listed prices are quoted in U S funds Canadian residents obligation Allow ample time for delivery are to make checks payable in U S funds To cover Canadian postage add 11 50 plus the U S order processing
44. between AM FM1 and FM2 The display will show your selection TUNE Press this knob lightly so it extends Turn it to choose radio stations Push the knob back into its stored position when you re not using it SEEK Press the right arrow to tune to the next higher station and the left arrow to tune to the next lower station and stay there The sound will mute while seeking 3 16 SCAN Press and hold SEEK for two seconds until SCAN appears on the display SCAN allows you to listen to stations for a few seconds The receiver will continue to scan and momentarily stop at each station until you press the button again The sound will mute while scanning PUSHBUTTONS The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to your favorite stations You can set up to 18 stations six AM six FM1 and six FM2 Just 1 Turn the radio on 2 Press AM FM to select the band 3 Tune in the desired station 4 Press AUTO TONE to select the setting you prefer 5 Press and hold one of the six pushbuttons The sound will mute When it returns release the button Whenever you press that numbered button the station you set will return and the tone you selected will be automatically selected for that button 6 Repeat the steps for each pushbutton P SCAN The preset scan button lets you scan through your favorite stations stored on your pushbuttons Select either the AM FM1 or FM2 mode and then press P SCAN It will scan through each stati
45. close the window be sure the latch catches Horn To sound the horn press the horn symbols on the steering wheel pad 2 42 Tilt Wheel If Equipped If you have the tilt steering wheel you should adjust the steering wheel before you drive The tilt lever is located on the driver s side of the steering column under the turn signal lever You can raise it to the highest level to give your legs more room when you enter and exit the vehicle To tilt the wheel hold the steering wheel and pull the lever toward you Move the steering wheel to a comfortable level then release the lever to lock the wheel in place Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving Turn Signal Multifunction Lever Turn and Lane Change Signals The turn signal has two upward for right and two downward for left positions These positions allow you to signal a turn or a lane change To signal a turn move the lever all the way up or down When the turn is finished the lever will return automatically An arrow on the instrument panel cluster will flash in the direction of the turn or lane change The lever on the left side of the steering column To signal a lane change just raise or lower the lever includes your until the arrow starts to flash Hold it there until you complete your lane change The lever will return by Tum and Lane Change Signals itself when you release it e Headlamp High Low Beam Changer As you signal a tu
46. close to your vehicle before the transmitter works it s probably time to change the battery NOTICE When replacing the battery use care not to touch any of the circuitry Static from your body transferred to these surfaces may damage the transmitter To replace the battery in the keyless entry transmitter 1 Insert a dime in the slot between the covers of the transmitter housing near the key ring hole Remove the bottom by twisting the dime 2 Remove and replace the battery with a three volt CR2032 or equivalent battery positive side up 3 Align the covers and snap them together 4 Resynchronize the transmitter 5 Check the operation of the transmitter Resynchronization Resynchronization may be necessary due to the security method used by this system The transmitter does not send the same signal twice to the receiver The receiver will not respond to a signal it has been sent previously This prevents anyone from recording and playing back the signal from the transmitter To resynchronize your transmitter stand close to your vehicle and press and hold the LOCK and UNLOCK buttons on the transmitter at the same time for seven seconds The door locks should cycle to confirm synchronization If the locks do not cycle see your dealer for service Endgate Liftgate It can be dangerous to drive with the rear window endgate or liftgate open because carbon monoxide CO gas can come into your vehicle
47. console Your tape player is built to work best with tapes that are up to 30 to 45 minutes long on each side Tapes longer than that are so thin they may not work well in this player To load a cassette tape with the ignition off first press EJECT on the remote player Then insert the cassette tape The tape will play if the ignition is on but the radio is off Once the tape is playing use the control knobs for VOL AUTO TONE BAL FADE BASS and TREB just as you do for the radio A lighted tape symbol shows when a cassette tape is in the player A lighted arrow will also appear and show the direction of play when a tape is active The player automatically senses if the cassette tape is metal or CrO and adjusts for best playback sound Anytime a cassette tape is inserted the top side is selected for play first PREV 1 Press PREV or the SEEK left arrow in the opposite direction that the lighted tape direction arrow points to search for the previous selection A minimum three second blank gap is needed for the player to stop at the beginning of the selection The tape direction arrow will blink during the SEEK operation and the sound is muted in this mode NEXT 3 Press NEXT or the SEEK right arrow in the direction that the lighted tape direction arrow points to search for the next selection The tape direction arrow will blink during SEEK operation and the sound is muted in this mode REV 4 Press this button to ra
48. constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these conditions In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90 F 32 C or higher Inhilly or mountainous terrain 7 26 DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY Short Trip City Scheduled Maintenance When doing frequent trailer towing Uses such as found in taxi police or delivery service If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions change the fluid and filter every 50 000 miles 83 000 km Replace fuel filter An Emission Control Service See footnote Replace engine air cleaner filter An Emission Control Service Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote 93 000 Miles 155 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service Lubricate chassis components or every 3 months whichever occurs first See footnote Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY 7 27 S
49. dirt from places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle In an emergency you can use a cloth or a paper towel to do this but be sure to use a scraper or wire brush later if you need to to get all the rust or dirt off See Changing a Flat Tire in the Index When It s Time for New Tires One way to tell when it s time for new tires is to check the treadwear indicators which will appear when your tires have only 1 16 inch 1 6 mm or less of tread remaining You need a new tire if any of the following statements are true You can see the indicators at three or more places around the tire You can see cord or fabric showing through the tire s rubber The tread or sidewall is cracked cut or snagged deep enough to show cord or fabric The tire has a bump bulge or split The tire has a puncture cut or other damage that can t be repaired well because of the size or location of the damage Buying New Tires To find out what kind and size of tires you need look at the Certification Tire label The tires installed on your vehicle when it was new had a Tire Performance Criteria Specification TPC Spec number on each tire s sidewall When you get new tires get ones with that same TPC Spec number That way your vehicle will continue to have tires that are designed to give proper endurance handling speed rating traction ride and other things during normal service on your vehicle If you
50. do if my vehicle stalls or is about to stall and I can t make it up the hill If this happens there are some things you should do and there are some things you must not do First here s what you should do Push the brake pedal to stop the vehicle and keep it from rolling backwards Also apply the parking brake If your engine is still running shift the transmission to REVERSE R release the parking brake and slowly back down the hill in REVERSE R If your engine has stopped running you ll need to restart it With the brake pedal pressed and the parking brake still applied shift the transmission to PARK P or shift to NEUTRAL N if your vehicle has a manual transmission and restart the engine Then shift to REVERSE R release the parking brake and slowly back down the hill as straight as possible in REVERSE R 4 22 As you are backing down the hill put your left hand on the steering wheel at the 12 o clock position This way you ll be able to tell if your wheels are straight and maneuver as you back down It s best that you back down the hill with your wheels straight rather than in the left or right direction Turning the wheel too far to the left or right will increase the possibility of a rollover Here are some things you must not do if you stall or are about to stall when going up a hill Never attempt to prevent a stall by shifting into NEUTRAL N or depressing
51. every 3 months whichever occurs first See footnote Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY under one or more of these conditions In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90 F 32 C or higher In hilly or mountainous terrain When doing frequent trailer towing Uses such as found in taxi police or delivery service If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions change the fluid and filter every 50 000 miles 83 000 km Inspect engine air cleaner filter if you are driving in dusty conditions Replace filter if necessary An Emission Control Service See footnote 7 17 Short Trip City Scheduled Maintenance 48 000 Miles 80 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service See footnote Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote 50 000 Miles 83 000 km If you haven t used your vehicle under severe service conditions listed previous
52. fresh outside air into your vehicle Do not use MAX A C or RECIRCULATION because it only recirculates the air inside your vehicle See Comfort Controls in the Index 4 54 Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience Before setting out for the open road you ll want to get to know your rig Acquaint yourself with the feel of handling and braking with the added weight of the trailer And always keep in mind that the vehicle you are driving is now a good deal longer and not nearly as responsive as your vehicle is by itself Before you start check the trailer hitch and platform and attachments safety chains electrical connector lamps tires and mirror adjustment If the trailer has electric brakes start your vehicle and trailer moving and then apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be sure the brakes are working This lets you check your electrical connection at the same time During your trip check occasionally to be sure that the load is secure and that the lamps and any trailer brakes are still working Following Distance Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as you would when driving your vehicle without a trailer This can help you avoid situations that require heavy braking and sudden turns Passing You ll need more passing distance up ahead when you re towing a trailer And because you re a good deal longer you ll need to go much farther beyond the passed veh
53. front of the manual seat up to unlock it Slide the seat to where you want it Then release the lever and try to move the seat with your body to make sure the seat is locked into place Manual Lumbar Support a cya If you have this feature F there will be a knob on the outside of the driver and passenger bucket seats Turn the knob counterclockwise to increase lumbar support and clockwise to decrease lumbar support Power Seats If Equipped If you have this feature there will be a control pad on the outside of your seat Horizontal Control Raise the front of the seat by raising the forward edge of the button Lower the front of the seat by lowering the forward edge of the button Move the seat forward by moving the whole button toward the front of the vehicle Raise the rear of the seat by raising the rear edge of the button Lower the rear of the seat by lowering the rear edge of the button Move the seat rearward by moving the whole button toward the rear of the vehicle Moving the whole button up or down raises or lowers the whole seat Vertical Control Move the reclining front seatback rearward by moving the button toward the rear of the vehicle Move the seatback forward by moving the button toward the front of the vehicle 1 4 Power Lumbar Control If Equipped Altay If you have this control it is i located on the left side of the driver s seat Press and hold the front of the cont
54. have a lamp that comes on when you lift the hood When you lift the hood you ll see these items A Battery F Power Steering Reservoir B Coolant Recovery Tank G Brake Master Cylinder C Engine Oil Dipstick H Engine Air Cleaner Filter D Engine Oil Fill I Fuse Block E Automatic Transmission Dipstick J Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir Before closing the hood be sure all the filler caps are on properly Then lift the hood to relieve pressure on the hood prop Remove the hood prop from the slot in the hood and return the prop to its retainer Then just pull the hood down firmly to close It will latch when dropped from 10 to 12 inches 25 to 30 cm without pressing on the hood Engine Oil Checking Engine Oil It s a good idea to check your engine oil every time you get fuel In order to get an accurate reading the oil must be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground The oil dipstick is a yellow ring Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutes to drain back into the oil pan If you don t the oil dipstick might not show the actual level 6 11 Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel or cloth then push it back in all the way Remove it again keeping the tip down and check the level 6 12 When to Add Engine Oil If the oil is at or below the ADD line then you ll need to add at least one quart of oil But you must use the right kind This part explains what kind
55. hills Ending Cruise Control Your parking lamp and headlamp switch is on the There are two ways to turn off the cruise control driver s side of your imstrument panel Turn the knob clockwise to the parking lamps symbol to Step lightly on the brake pedal or push the clutch manially tuen on pedal if you have a manual transmission Move the cruise switch to OFF Parking Lamps Sidemarker Lamps Erasing Speed Memory Taill aillamps When you turn off the cruise control or the ignition your cruise control set speed memory is erased License Plate Lamps Instrument Panel Lights Exterior Lamps Turn the knob clockwise to the master lamps symbol to turn on all the lamps listed as well as the headlamps Turn the knob all the way counterclockwise to turn off your lamps and put the system in automatic headlamp mode O DOME OVERRIDE 2 49 Automatic Headlamp System When it is dark enough outside your automatic headlamp system will turn on your headlamps at the normal brightness along with other lamps such as the taillamps sidemarker parking lamps and the instrument panel lights The radio lights will also be dim Your vehicle is equipped with a light sensor on the top of the instrument panel under the radio speaker grill Be sure it is not covered or the system will be on whenever the ignition is on The system may also turn on your headlamps when driving through a parki
56. if the vehicle is in gear To lock a power lock system from the outside insert the key into the lock button and turn clockwise All doors will lock Liftgate Release To open a power lock system from the outside insert the key into the lock button and turn counterclockwise All doors will unlock If your vehicle is equipped with remote keyless entry system your vehicle does not have a lock on the liftgate It is equipped with a pushbutton to release the liftglass You may also use the keyless entry system or the power door locks if your vehicle is so equipped The liftglass can be opened using the pushbutton on the liftgate after the driver s door has been opened using either the power lock system or the remote keyless entry system To open the entire liftgate lift the handle located in the center of the door To lock a power lock system from the outside insert the key into the lock button and turn clockwise All doors will lock You may also use the keyless entry system or the power door locks to lock the liftgate and liftglass Remote Rear Glass Release This button on the passenger s side of the steering column allows you to release the rear glass from inside the vehicle If your vehicle has an automatic transmission your shift lever must be in PARK P or NEUTRAL N for the release to work If you have a manual transmission you must apply your parking brake or have the ignition off before
57. increase or decrease bass TREB Slide this lever up or down to increase or decrease treble If a station is weak or noisy you may want to decrease the treble Adjusting the Speakers BAL Turn the control behind the upper knob to move the sound to the left or right speakers The middle position balances the sound between the speakers FADE Turn the control behind the lower knob to move the sound to the front or rear speakers The middle position balances the sound between the speakers AM FM Stereo with Cassette Tape Player If Equipped garm pees mi 2S 4 ee ee I E JFE et Lat ot a a a G L Playing the Radio VOLUME This knob turns the system on and off and controls the volume To increase volume and turn the radio on turn the knob clockwise Turn it counterclockwise to decrease volume and turn the radio off RECALL Display the time with the ignition off by pressing this knob When the radio is playing press this knob to recall the station frequency Finding a Station AM FM Press the lower knob to switch between AM FM1 and FM2 TUNE Turn the lower knob to tune in radio stations SEEK Press the right arrow to tune to the next higher station and the left arrow to tune to the next lower station PUSHBUTTONS The four numbered pushbuttons let you return to your favorite stations You can set up to 21 stations seven AM seven FM1 and seven FM2 Just 1 Turn the radio on Press AM FM
58. into the vehicle into place Install the two retaining clips 5 Put the bulb socket into the lamp assembly and turn it clockwise until it is tight 6 Put the headlamp assembly back into the vehicle Install the two retaining clips 6 37 Two Piece Front Turn Signal Lamp Assembly 1 Remove the headlamp assembly as shown under Two Piece Composite Headlamp System earlier in this section 2 Locate the locking tabs on the assembly Squeeze the tabs together and push that end of the assembly out while holding the tabs The assembly will swing out 3 Unplug the electrical connector 6 38 Turn the harness bulb socket counterclockwise to remove it 5 Pull the bulb straight out to remove it from the socket 6 Push the new bulb into the socket until it snaps into place Put the new bulb into the headlamp assembly and turn it clockwise until it is tight To replace the assembly snap the outboard end of the lamp assembly back into the vehicle Then swing the assembly in and snap it into place Install the two retaining clips Taillamps 1 Open the endgate liftgate 2 Remove the two screws 3 Pull the assembly away from the vehicle 4 Turn the socket counterclockwise to remove it Push the tab in while you turn the socket counterclockwise 5 Holding the base of the bulb pull the bulb straight out of the socket 6 Push the new bulb straight into the socket until i
59. is filled with DEX COOL engine coolant This coolant is designed to remain in your vehicle for 5 years or 150 000 miles 240 000 km whichever occurs first if you add only DEX COOL extended life coolant The following explains your cooling system and how to add coolant when it is low If you have a problem with engine overheating see Engine Overheating in the Index A 50 50 mixture of clean drinkable water and What to Use nig DEEL COL ealant alk Use a mixture of one half clean drinkable water and Give freezing protection down to 34 F 37 C one half DEX COOL coolant which won t damage e Give boiling protection up to 265 F 129 C aluminum parts If you use this coolant mixture you don t need to add anything else Protect against rust and corrosion Help keep the proper engine temperature Let the warning lights and gages work as they should Adding only plain water to your cooling system can be dangerous Plain water or some other liquid like alcohol can boil before the proper coolant mixture will Your vehicle s coolant NOTICE When adding coolant it is important that you use only DEX COOL silicate free coolant warning system is set for the proper coolant mixture With plain water or the wrong mixture your engine could get too hot but you wouldn t get the overheat warning Your engine could catch fire and you or others could be burned Use a 50 50 mixture of clea
60. is in PARK P So be sure the transfer case is in a drive gear not in NEUTRAL See Four Wheel Drive Automatic Transfer Case in the Index 4 57 When You Are Ready to Leave After Parking on a Hill 1 Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal down while you Start your engine e Shift into a gear and Release the parking brake 2 Let up on the brake pedal 3 Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks 4 Stop and have someone pick up and store the chocks 4 58 Maintenance When Trailer Towing Your vehicle will need service more often when you re pulling a trailer See the Maintenance Schedule for more on this Things that are especially important in trailer operation are automatic transmission fluid don t overfill engine oil axle lubricant belt cooling system and brake system Each of these is covered in this manual and the Index will help you find them quickly If you re trailering it s a good idea to review these sections before you start your trip Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts are tight Trailer Wiring Harness The light duty trailer wiring is a six wire harness assembly The optional heavy duty trailer wiring is an eight wire harness assembly The harnesses are stored under the vehicle along the passenger side frame crossmember on two door vehicles or on the driver s side corner frame rear crossmember on four door vehicles The hea
61. is selected for play first The player automatically senses if the cassette tape is metal or CrO gt 9 and adjusts for best playback sound PREV 1 Press the PREV button or the SEEK left arrow to search for the previous selection A minimum three second blank gap is required for the player to stop at the beginning of the selection The tape direction arrow will blink during the SEEK operation PROG 2 Press this button to switch from one side of the tape to the other NEXT 3 Press the NEXT button or the SEEK right arrow to search for the next selection A minimum three second blank gap is required for the player to stop at the beginning of the selection The tape direction arrow will blink during the SEEK operation The sound will mute while searching for the next selection REV 4 Press this button to rapidly reverse the tape to the beginning of the cassette or until you press REV again The radio will play the last selected station while reversing the tape The tape direction arrow will blink during the reverse operation Dd 5 Press this button to reduce cassette tape noise The double D symbol will appear on the display while the player is in this mode Dolby Noise Reduction is manufactured under a license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation Dolby and the double D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation FWD 6 Press this button to rapidly forward the tape to the end of the cas
62. is subject to the following two conditions 1 this device may not cause interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device 2 6 Changes or modifications to this system by other than an authorized service facility could void authorization to use this equipment At times you may notice a decrease in range This is normal for any remote keyless entry system If the transmitter does not work or if you have to stand closer to your vehicle for the transmitter to work try this Check the distance You may be too far from your vehicle You may need to stand closer during rainy or snowy weather Check the location Other vehicles or objects may be blocking the signal Take a few steps to the left or right hold the transmitter higher and try again Check to determine if battery replacement or resynchronization is necessary See the instructions that follow If you re still having trouble see your dealer or a qualified technician for service Operation UNLOCK When you press UNLOCK the driver s door will unlock automatically the parking lamps will flash and the interior lights will go on If you press UNLOCK again within three seconds the remaining doors will unlock the parking lamps will flash and the interior lights will go on LOCK Press LOCK to lock all the doors Press LOCK again within three seconds and the hor
63. it as soon as possible to prevent damage to your tapes and player If you notice a reduction in sound quality try a known good cassette to see if it is the tape or the tape player at fault If this other cassette has no improvement in sound quality clean the tape player The recommended cleaning method for your cassette tape player is the use of a scrubbing action non abrasive cleaning cassette with pads which scrub the tape head as the hubs of the cleaner cassette turn The recommended cleaning cassette is available through your dealership GM Part No 12344789 3 42 When using a scrubbing action non abrasive cleaning cassette it is normal for the cassette to eject because your unit is equipped with a cut tape detection feature and a cleaning cassette may appear as a broken tape To prevent the cleaning cassette from being ejected use the following steps 1 Turn the ignition to RUN or ACCESSORY 2 Turn the radio off 3 Press and hold the TAPE AUX button for five seconds The tape symbol on the display will flash for two seconds 4 Insert the scrubbing action cleaning cassette 5 Eject the cleaning cassette after the manufacturer s recommended cleaning time If your vehicle is equipped with the AM FM Stereo with Cassette Tape Player 1 Turn the ignition to RUN or ACCESSORY 2 Turn the radio on 3 Insert the scrubbing action cleaning cassette 4 Within five seconds press and hold the REV and FWD butto
64. more safely Driving Environment You can also help avoid a rollover or other type of crash by being prepared for driving in inclement weather at night or during other times where visibility or traction may be limited such as on curves slippery roads or hilly terrain Unfamiliar surroundings can also have hidden hazards To help you learn more about driving in different conditions this section contains information about city freeway and off road driving as well as other hints for driving in various weather conditions Vehicle Design According to the U S Department of Transportation utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles Utility vehicles do have a higher ground clearance and a narrower track or shorter wheelbase than passenger cars to make them more capable for off road driving Specific design characteristics like these give the driver a better view of the road but also give utility vehicles a higher center of gravity than other types of vehicles This means that you shouldn t expect a utility vehicle to handle the same way a vehicle with a lower center of gravity like a car would in similar situations But driver behavior factors are far more often the cause of a utility vehicle rollover than are environmental or vehicle factors Safe driver behavior and understanding the environment in which you ll be driving can help avoid a rollover crash in any type of vehicle including
65. needs its own brakes and they must be adequate Be sure to read and follow the instructions for the trailer brakes so you ll be able to install adjust and maintain them properly Your trailer s brake system can tap into the vehicle s hydraulic brake system only if The trailer parts can withstand 3 000 psi 20 650 kPa of pressure The trailer s brake system will use less than 0 02 cubic inch 0 3 cc of fluid from your vehicle s master cylinder Otherwise both braking systems won t work well You could even lose your brakes If everything checks out this far then make the brake fluid tap at the port on the master cylinder that sends fluid to the rear brakes But don t use copper tubing for this If you do it will bend and finally break off Use steel brake tubing 4 53 Driving with a Trailer If you have a rear most window open and you pull a trailer with your vehicle carbon monoxide CO could come into your vehicle You can t see or smell CO It can cause unconsciousness or death See Engine Exhaust in the Index To maximize your safety when towing a trailer Have your exhaust system inspected for leaks and make necessary repairs before starting on your trip Keep the rear most windows closed If exhaust does come into your vehicle through a window in the rear or another opening drive with your front main heating or cooling system on and with the fan on any speed This will bring
66. only enough fluid to bring the level up to the proper range What to Use To determine what kind of fluid to use see Recommended Fluids and Lubricants in the Index Always use the proper fluid Failure to use the proper fluid can cause leaks and damage hoses and seals Windshield Washer Fluid What to Use When you need windshield washer fluid be sure to read the manufacturer s instructions before use If you will be operating your vehicle in an area where the temperature may fall below freezing use a fluid that has sufficient protection against freezing Adding Washer Fluid Open the cap labeled WASHER FLUID ONLY with the washer symbol on it Add washer fluid until the tank is full 6 29 NOTICE When using concentrated washer fluid follow the manufacturer s instructions for adding water Don t mix water with ready to use washer fluid Water can cause the solution to freeze and damage your washer fluid tank and other parts of the washer system Also water doesn t clean as well as washer fluid Fill your washer fluid tank only three quarters full when it s very cold This allows for expansion if freezing occurs which could damage the tank if it is completely full Don t use engine coolant antifreeze in your windshield washer It can damage your washer system and paint 6 30 Brakes Brake Fluid Your brake master cylinder reservoir is here It is filled with DOT 3 brake fluid
67. particularly on a curve acts much like a skid and may require the same correction you d use in a skid In any rear blowout remove your foot from the accelerator pedal Get the vehicle under control by steering the way you want the vehicle to go It may be very bumpy and noisy but you can still steer Gently brake to a stop well off the road if possible If a tire goes flat the next part shows how to use your jacking equipment to change a flat tire safely Changing a Flat Tire If a tire goes flat avoid further tire and wheel damage by driving slowly to a level place Turn on your hazard warning flashers Changing a tire can cause an injury The vehicle can slip off the jack and roll over you or other people You and they could be badly injured Find a level place to change your tire To help prevent the vehicle from moving 1 Set the parking brake firmly 2 Put an automatic transmission shift lever in PARK P or shift a manual transmission to FIRST 1 or REVERSE R If you have a four wheel drive vehicle be sure the transfer case is in a drive gear not in NEUTRAL CAUTION Continued 4 Turn off the engine 5 Put the wheel blocks at the front and rear of the tire farthest away from the one being changed That would be the tire on the other side of the vehicle at the opposite end aeea i The following steps will tell you how to use the jack and change a tire 5 19 Removing the Spar
68. repeatedly Remember that your headlamps light up far less of a roadway when you are in a turn or curve Keep your eyes moving that way it s easier to pick out dimly lighted objects Just as your headlamps should be checked regularly for proper aim so should your eyes be examined regularly Some drivers suffer from night blindness the inability to see in dim light and aren t even aware of it Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads Wh p i Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble On a wet road you can t stop accelerate or turn as well because your tire to road traction isn t as good as on dry roads And if your tires don t have much tread left you ll get even less traction It s always wise to go slower and be cautious if rain starts to fall while you are driving The surface may get wet suddenly when your reflexes are tuned for driving on dry pavement 4 31 The heavier the rain the harder it is to see Even if your windshield wiper blades are in good shape a heavy rain can make it harder to see road signs and traffic signals pavement markings the edge of the road and even people walking It s wise to keep your wiping equipment in good shape and keep your windshield washer tank filled with washer fluid Replace your windshield wiper inserts when they show signs of streaking or missing areas on the windshield or when strips of rubber start to separate from the inserts 4 32 Driving too fa
69. s headlamps will flash and the horn will sound for 110 seconds then will turn off to save the battery power Remember the theft deterrent system won t activate if you lock the doors with a key or use the manual door lock It activates only if you use a power door lock switch with the door open or with the remote keyless entry transmitter You should also remember that you can start your vehicle with the correct ignition key if the alarm has been set off Here s how to avoid setting off the alarm by accident If you don t want to activate the theft deterrent system the vehicle should be locked with the door key after the doors are closed Always unlock a door with a key or use the remote keyless entry transmitter Unlocking a door any other way will set off the alarm If you set off the alarm by accident unlock any door with the key You can also turn off the alarm by pressing UNLOCK on the remote keyless entry transmitter The alarm won t stop if you try to unlock a door any other way Testing the Alarm The alarm can be tested by following these steps 1 From inside the vehicle lower the driver s window and open the driver s door 2 Activate the system by locking the doors with the power door lock switch while the door is open or with the remote keyless entry transmitter 3 Get out of the vehicle close the door and wait for the SECURITY light to go out 4 Then reach in through the window unloc
70. s or the right front passenger s safety belt that says to replace the belt be sure to do so Then the new belt will be there to help protect you in a collision You would see this label on the belt near the door opening ACAUTION To help avoid personal injury belt assembly must be replaced if this vehicle is in a collision or if Replace Belt appears below See Owner s Manual for more information Replace Remplacer Belt La Ceinture Printed in If belts are cut or damaged replace them Collision damage also may mean you will need to have safety belt or seat parts repaired or replaced New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the belt wasn t being used at the time of the collision If an air bag inflates you ll need to replace air bag system parts See the part on the air bag system earlier in this section Section 2 Features and Controls Here you can learn about the many standard and optional features on your vehicle and information on starting shifting and braking Also explained are the instrument panel and the warning systems that tell you if everything is working properly and what to do if you have a problem 2 2 Keys 2 38 2 4 Door Locks 2 39 2 6 Keyless Entry System If Equipped 2 39 2 9 Endgate Liftgate 2 13 Theft 2 40 2 14 Content Theft Deterrent If Equipped 2 40 2 15 Passlock 2 43 2 16 New Vehicle Break In 2 49 2 16 Ignition Positions 2 52 2 18 Starting Your Engine
71. safety belt Front Seat Position will move freely again and be ready to work for an adult or larger child passenger Center Seat Positions 4 Door Models Your vehicle has a right front passenger air bag Never put a rear facing child restraint in this seat Here s why Don t use child restraints in these positions The restraints won t work properly 1 50 A child in a rear facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger s air bag inflates This is because the back of the rear facing child restraint would be very close to the inflating air bag Always secure a rear facing child restraint in the rear seat Although a rear seat is a safer place you can secure a forward facing child restraint in the right front seat You ll be using the lap shoulder belt See the earlier part about the top strap if the child restraint has one Be sure to follow the instructions that came with the child restraint Secure the child in the child restraint when and as the instructions say 1 Because your vehicle has a right front passenger air bag always move the seat as far back as it will go before securing a forward facing child restraint See Seats in the Index 2 Put the restraint on the seat 3 Pick up the latch plate and run the lap and shoulder portions of the vehicle s safety belt through or around the restraint The child restraint instructions will show you how
72. seatbacks to check that the latches have locked in the upright position If they haven t have them fixed immediately 1 9 To return the head restraints to the upright position reach behind the seats and pull the head restraint up until it locks into position 1 10 On two door models with an inside mounted spare tire the driver s side rear seat head restraint must be lifted and held upright as the seatback is raised Otherwise the head restraint will hit the spare tire and prevent the seatback from properly latching Push and pull on the head restraints to check that they have locked in the upright position If they haven t have them fixed immediately For information on adjusting the rear seat head restraints see Head Restraints in the Index Safety Belts They re for Everyone This part of the manual tells you how to use safety belts properly It also tells you some things you should not do with safety belts It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be And it explains the air bag system seriously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and safety belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a safety belt properly Don t let anyone ride where he or she can t wear a safety belt properly If you are in a crash
73. service or parking area and take a nap get some exercise or both For safety treat drowsiness on the highway as an emergency 4 37 Hill and Mountain Roads Driving on steep hills or mountains is different from driving in flat or rolling terrain 4 38 If you drive regularly in steep country or if you re planning to visit there here are some tips that can make your trips safer and more enjoyable See Off Road Driving in the Index for information about driving off road Keep your vehicle in good shape Check all fluid levels and also the brakes tires cooling system and transmission These parts can work hard on mountain roads Know how to go down hills The most important thing to know is this let your engine do some of the slowing down Shift to a lower gear when you go down a steep or long hill If you don t shift down your brakes could get so hot that they wouldn t work well You would then have poor braking or even none going down a hill You could crash Shift down to let your engine assist your brakes on a steep downhill slope Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL N or with the ignition off is dangerous Your brakes will have to do all the work of slowing down They could get so hot that they wouldn t work well You would then have poor braking or even none going down a hill You could crash Always have your engine running and your vehicle in gear when you go downhill Know how to g
74. shift the transmission to PARK P or put your manual transmission in FIRST 1 But do not shift the transfer case to the NEUTRAL position Leave the transfer case in a drive gear 4 23 Driving Downhill When off roading takes you downhill you ll want to consider a number of things How steep is the downhill Will I be able to maintain Heavy braking when going down a hill can cause vehicle control your brakes to overheat and fade This could cause loss of control and a serious accident Apply the brakes lightly when descending a hill and use a low gear to keep vehicle speed under control What s the surface like Smooth Rough Slippery Hard packed dirt Gravel Are there hidden surface obstacles Ruts Logs Boulders What s at the bottom of the hill Is there a hidden creek bank or even a river bottom with large rocks If you decide you can go down a hill safely then try to keep your vehicle headed straight down and use a low gear This way engine drag can help your brakes and they won t have to do all the work Descend slowly keeping your vehicle under control at all times 4 24 Q Are there some things I should not do when Q Am I likely to stall when going downhill ss 9 cone a It s much more likely to happen going uphill Yes These are important because if you ignore them But if it happens going downhill here s what to do you could lose control and have a seriou
75. that might keep a safety belt system from doing its job have it repaired Have any torn or frayed safety belts replaced Also look for any opened or broken air bag coverings and have them repaired or replaced The air bag system does not need regular maintenance Wiper Blade Check Inspect wiper blades for wear or cracking Replace blade inserts that appear worn or damaged or that streak or miss areas of the windshield Also see Wiper Blades Cleaning in the Index Spare Tire Check At least twice a year after the monthly inflation check of the spare tire determines that the spare is inflated to the correct tire inflation pressure make sure that the spare tire is stored securely Push pull and then try to rotate or turn the tire If it moves use the wheel wrench to tighten the cable See Storing the Spare Tire and Tools in the Index Weatherstrip Lubrication Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last longer seal better and not stick or squeak Apply silicone grease with a clean cloth During very cold damp weather more frequent application may be required See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants in the Index Manual Transmission Check Check the transmission fluid level add if needed See Manual Transmission Fluid in the Index Check for leaks A fluid leak is the only reason for fluid loss Have the system inspected and repaired if needed Automatic Transmission Check Check the
76. the air outlets As the air is cooled the airflow will move through the air conditioning outlets Be careful not to put anything over the solar sensor located around the center of the instrument panel This sensor is used by the automatic system to regulate temperature Mode Knob Manual Operation The right knob on the control panel allows you to choose the direction of air delivery You can choose to set the climate control system operations yourself or let the system work for you by placing the system in AUTO mode See Mode Knob Automatic Operation earlier in this section gt o m PANEL This setting directs most of the air through the instrument panel outlets and a small amount through the floor outlets gt o Vad BI LEVEL Air is delivered through the heater floor outlets as well as the instrument panel outlets e td HEATER This setting directs most of the warmed air through the heater floor outlets and some air through the windshield defroster outlets We Vad BLEND Airflow is divided equally between the heater floor outlet and the windshield defroster outlets The air conditioning compressor may run to dehumidify the air to prevent window fogging wy DEFROST This setting directs most air through the windshield defroster outlets and some through the heater outlets The air conditioning compressor may run to dehumidify the air to prevent window fogging Z OUTSIDE AIR Press this button to force th
77. the clutch if you have a manual transmission to rev up the engine and regain forward momentum This won t work Your vehicle will roll backwards very quickly and you could go out of control Instead apply the regular brake to stop the vehicle Then apply the parking brake Shift to REVERSE R release the parking brake and slowly back straight down Never attempt to turn around if you are about to stall when going up a hill If the hill is steep enough to stall your vehicle it s steep enough to cause you to roll over if you turn around If you can t make it up the hill you must back straight down the hill Q Suppose after stalling I try to back down the hill and decide I just can t do it What should I do Set the parking brake put your transmission Shifting the transfer case to NEUTRAL can in PARK P or the manual transmission in cause your vehicle to roll even if the transmission FIRST 1 and turn off the engine Leave the is in PARK P or if you have the manual vehicle and go get some help Exit on the uphill transmission even if you re in gear This is side and stay clear of the path the vehicle would because the NEUTRAL position on the transfer take if it rolled downhill Do not shift the transfer case overrides the transmission You or someone case to NEUTRAL when you leave the vehicle else could be injured If you are going to leave Leave it in some gear your vehicle set the parking brake and
78. the day position This delay prevents rapid changing of the mirror as you drive under lights and through traffic Cleaning the Photocells Use a cotton swab and glass cleaner to clean the photocells when necessary Outside Manual Adjust Mirror Adjust your outside mirrors so you can just see the side of your vehicle You can fold them before entering a car wash Pull the mirrors in toward the vehicle Push the mirrors back out when finished Power Remote Control Mirror The control is located on the driver s door armrest Move the upper control to the left or right to choose the mirror then press the arrows on the control pad to adjust the mirror Convex Outside Mirror A convex mirror s surface is curved so you can see more from the driver s seat A convex mirror can make things like other vehicles look farther away than they really are If you cut too sharply into the right or left lane you could hit a vehicle Check your inside mirror or glance over your shoulder before changing lanes 2 55 Electrochromic Outside Rearview Mirror If Equipped Only the driver s side outside mirror will adjust for the glare of headlamps behind you See Electrochromic Day Night Inside Rearview Mirror earlier in this section Heated Outside Rearview Mirror If Equipped When you operate the rear window defogger a defogger also warms the heated outside rearview mirrors to help clear them of ice snow a
79. the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds Release both buttons Accessories Accessories for the HomeLink Transmitter are available from the manufacturer of the unit If you would like additional information please call 1 800 355 3515 Instrument Panel TMOOAW D gt TUUN CETT Air Vents G Rear Window Defogger Instrument Cluster H Comfort Controls Transfer Case If Equipped I Ashtray Glove Box J Rear Liftgate Release Audio System K Rear Window Washer Wiper Auxiliary Power Outlets L Audio Steering Controls If Equipped M Brake Release N Fog Lamps O Lamp Controls 2 73 Instrument Panel Cluster Your instrument panel cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running Yov ll know how fast you re going about how much fuel you ve used and many other things you II need to know to drive safely and economically APPLY BRAKE TO SHIFT FROM PARK PRIN DIB 888888 TRIP Standard Cluster Canada Similar 2 74 RPM X 1000 6 APPLY BRAKE TO SHIFT FROM PARK PIRIN DISH S a o ODO TRIP HOLD TO RESET 888888 TRIP Optional Cluster Canada Similar VOLTS 2 75 Speedometer and Odometer Your speedometer lets you see your speed in both miles per hour mph and kilometers per hour km h Your odometer shows how far your vehicle has been driven in either miles used in t
80. the temperature knob turned to the left This setting should be used to keep odors and or dust from entering the vehicle For normal cooling on hot days use A C with the temperature knob turned to the left On vehicles equipped with the Electronic Climate Control system this same performance can be achieved as long as the A C is enabled and the outside air button is not active On cool but sunny days use BI LEVEL A C to deliver warm air to the floor and cooler air to the instrument panel outlets When the air conditioner is on you may sometimes notice slight changes in your vehicle s engine speed and power This is normal because the system is designed to cycle the compressor on and off to keep the desired temperature Heating The heater works best if you keep your windows closed while using it On cold days use HEATER with the temperature knob turned clockwise BLEND is useful in cool weather when you have fog or ice on the windshield or side windows If you use the optional engine coolant heater before starting your engine your heating system will produce warmer air faster to heat the passenger compartment in cold weather See Engine Coolant Heater in the Index Defogging and Defrosting On cool humid days use BLEND to keep the windshield and side windows clear Use DEFROST to remove fog or ice from the windshield quickly in extreme humid or cold conditions Turn the temperature knob to the right and move the
81. this Manual Many people read their owner s manual from beginning to end when they first receive their new vehicle If you do this it will help you learn about the features and controls for your vehicle In this manual you Il find that pictures and words work together to explain things quickly Safety Warnings and Symbols You will find a number of safety cautions in this book We use a box and the word CAUTION to tell you about things that could hurt you if you were to ignore the warning These mean there is something that could hurt you or other people In the caution area we tell you what the hazard is Then we tell you what to do to help avoid or reduce the hazard Please read these cautions If you don t you or others could be hurt vii You will also find a circle with a slash through it in this book This safety symbol means Don t Don t do this or Don t let this happen Vehicle Damage Warnings Also in this book you will find these notices NOTICE These mean there is something that could damage your vehicle Viii In the notice area we tell you about something that can damage your vehicle Many times this damage would not be covered by your warranty and it could be costly But the notice will tell you what to do to help avoid the damage When you read other manuals you might see CAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different colors or in different words You ll al
82. tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote 100 000 Miles 166 000 km Inspect spark plug wires An Emission Control Service Replace spark plugs An Emission Control Service If you haven t used your vehicle under severe service conditions listed previously and therefore haven t changed your automatic transmission fluid change both the fluid and filter Manual transmission fluid doesn t require change Inspect Positive Crankcase Ventilation PCV valve An Emission Control Service 7 40 Lubricate chassis components or every 12 months whichever occurs first DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY Long Trip Highway Scheduled Maintenance 150 000 Miles 240 000 km Drain flush and refill cooling system or every 60 months since last service whichever occurs first See Engine Coolant in the Index for what to use MILEAGE Inspect hoses Clean radiator condenser pressure cap and neck Pressure test PF the cooling system and pressure cap An Emission Control Service SERVICED BY 7 41 Part B Owner Checks and Services Listed in this part are owner checks and services which should be performed at the intervals specified to help ensure the safety dependability and emission control performance of your veh
83. transmission fluid level add if needed See Automatic Transmission Fluid in the Index A fluid loss may indicate a problem Check the system and repair if needed Hydraulic Clutch System Check Check the fluid level in the clutch reservoir See Hydraulic Clutch Fluid in the Index A fluid loss in this system could indicate a problem Have the system inspected and repaired at once 7 43 At Least Once a Year Key Lock Cylinders Service Lubricate the key lock cylinders with the lubricant specified in Part D Body Lubrication Service Lubricate all hood hinges hood latch assembly secondary latch pivots spring anchor release pawl door hinges fuel door hinge endgate hinges outer tailgate handle pivot points tailgate hinges tailgate mounted spare tire if equipped glove box console doors moving seat hardware and folding seat hardware Part D tells you what to use More frequent lubrication may be required when exposed to a corrosive environment Starter Switch Check When you are doing this check the vehicle could move suddenly If it does you or others could be injured Follow the steps below 7 44 Before you start be sure you have enough room around the vehicle Firmly apply both the parking brake see Parking Brake in the Index if necessary and the regular brake NOTE Do not use the accelerator pedal and be ready to turn off the engine immediately if it starts O
84. utility vehicles 4 3 Defensive Driving The best advice anyone can give about driving is Drive defensively Please start with a very important safety device in your vehicle Buckle up See Safety Belts in the Index Defensive driving really means be ready for anything On city streets rural roads or freeways it means always expect the unexpected Assume that pedestrians or other drivers are going to be careless and make mistakes Anticipate what they might do Be ready for their mistakes Rear end collisions are about the most preventable of accidents Yet they are common Allow enough following distance It s the best defensive driving maneuver in both city and rural driving You never know when the vehicle in front of you is going to brake or turn suddenly Defensive driving requires that a driver concentrate on the driving task Anything that distracts from the driving task such as concentrating on a cellular telephone call reading or reaching for something on the floor makes proper defensive driving more difficult and can even cause a collision with resulting injury Ask a passenger to help do things like this or pull off the road in a safe place to do them yourself These simple defensive driving techniques could save your life 4 4 Drunken Driving Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is a national tragedy It s the number one contributor to the highway death tol
85. will clear the window and then either stop or return to your preset speed In freezing weather don t use your washer until the windshield is warmed Otherwise the washer fluid can form ice on the windshield blocking your vision 2 45 Rear Window Washer Wiper This switch is located on the instrument panel To turn the rear wiper on slide the switch to either LO or HI For delayed wiping slide the switch to LO For steady wiping slide the switch to HI To turn the wiper off slide the switch to OFF To wash the window press the wash button located on the switch The switch must be in either LO or HI The rear window washer uses the same fluid bottle as the windshield washer However the rear window washer will run out of fluid before the windshield washer If you can wash your windshield but not your rear window check your fluid level 2 46 Cruise Control If Equipped With cruise control you can maintain a speed of about 25 mph 40 km h or more DAALWVSEe OFF OF Fi aaa ail eee T without keeping your foot on the accelerator This can j really help on long trips Cruise control does not work at speeds below about 25 mph 40 km h If you have an automatic transmission and you apply your brakes the cruise control will shut off If you have a manual transmission and you apply your brakes or push the clutch pedal the cruise control will shut off Setting Cruise Control Cruise co
86. your malfunction indicator lamp to light and your fuel tank and emissions system may be damaged See Malfunction Indicator Lamp in the Index Filling a Portable Fuel Container Never fill a portable fuel container while it is in your vehicle Static electricity discharge from the container can ignite the gasoline vapor You can be badly burned and your vehicle damaged if this occurs To help avoid injury to you and others Dispense gasoline only into approved containers Do not fill a container while it is inside a vehicle in a vehicle s trunk pickup bed or on any surface other than the ground Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the inside of the fill opening before operating the nozzle Contact should be maintained until the filling is complete Don t smoke while pumping gasoline Checking Things Under the Hood Things that burn can get on hot engine parts and start a fire These include liquids like fuel oil coolant brake fluid windshield washer and other fluids and plastic or rubber You or others could be burned Be careful not to drop or spill things that will burn onto a hot engine To open the hood first pull the handle inside the vehicle on the lower driver s side of the instrument panel Then go to the front of the vehicle and release the secondary hood release Lift the hood release the hood prop from its retainer and put the hood prop into the slot in the hood You may
87. 2 months whichever occurs first See footnote Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these conditions In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90 F 32 C or higher In hilly or mountainous terrain When doing frequent trailer towing Uses such as found in taxi police or delivery service If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions change the fluid and filter every 50 000 miles 83 000 km Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote Replace fuel filter An Emission Control Service See footnote Replace engine air cleaner filter An Emission Control Service ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY 7 33 Long Trip Highway Scheduled Maintenance 37 500 Miles 62 500 km a ooo Change engine oil and filter or every 12 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service Lubricate chassis components or every 12 months whichever occurs first See footnote Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote
88. 25 000 km Continued Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these conditions Inheavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90 F 32 C or higher Inhilly or mountainous terrain When doing frequent trailer towing Uses such as found in taxi police or delivery service If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions change the fluid and filter every 50 000 miles 83 000 km Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote 22 500 Miles 37 500 km Change engine oil and filter or every 12 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service Lubricate chassis components or every 12 months whichever occurs first See footnote Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY 7 32 Long Trip Highway Scheduled Maintenance 30 000 Miles 50 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 12 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service Lubricate chassis components or every 1
89. 6 for cooler air Full Hot If you turn the temperature knob past 82 F 28 C the system will go into the full hot mode The system will remain at that maximum heating setting and the fan will blow at the speed the fan knob is set to If the fan is in AUTO it will run at full speed Full Cold If you turn the temperature knob past 66 F 19 C the system will go into the full cold mode The system will remain at that maximum cooling setting and the fan will blow at the speed the fan knob is set to If the fan is in AUTO it will run at full speed Choosing either maximum setting will not cause the system to heat or cool any faster Mode Knob Automatic Operation The right knob on the control panel allows you to choose the direction of air delivery When the system is set for automatic operation sensors will control the air delivery mode Air will come primarily from the floor or instrument panel outlets with some air directed to the windshield to prevent fogging When the system is in AUTO mode the air conditioning light will turn on and the recirculation and outside air lights turn off With the system in full auto control both the fan and mode knobs in AUTO you still have the ability to override any function However continually overriding the outside air or the A C compressor will limit the ability of the system to cool the vehicle quickly If you push a button for a function which is not available the l
90. ARK P or NEUTRAL N while your engine is racing NOTICE Damage to your transmission caused by shifting out of PARK P or NEUTRAL N with the engine racing isn t covered by your warranty DRIVE D This position is for normal driving If you need more power for passing and you re Going less than about 35 mph 55 km h push your accelerator pedal about halfway down Going about 35 mph 55 km h or more push the accelerator all the way down You ll shift down to the next gear and have more power DRIVE D should not be used when towing a trailer carrying a heavy load driving on steep hills or for off road driving Select THIRD 3 when operating the vehicle under any of these conditions THIRD 3 This position is also used for normal driving however it offers more power and lower fuel economy than DRIVE D You should use THIRD 3 when towing a trailer carrying a heavy load driving on steep hills or winding roads or for off road driving SECOND 2 This position gives you more power but lower fuel economy than THIRD 3 You can use SECOND 2 on hills It can help control your speed as you go down steep mountain roads but then you would also want to use your brakes off and on You can also use SECOND 2 for starting your vehicle from a stop on slippery road surfaces FIRST 1 This position gives you even more power but lower fuel economy than SECOND 2 You can use it on very steep hi
91. Area If your vehicle has this console compartment squeeze the front lever while lifting the top to open it You can store cassettes and compact discs in the slots in front of the compartment There is also a lift out storage tray in the console If your vehicle has the center armrest compartment lift the cover to expose the storage area which includes slots for cassettes or compact discs and a coinholder You may have a convenience net in the rear of your vehicle to help keep small items like gloves and light clothing in place during sharp turns or quick stops and starts The net is not designed to retain these items during off road use The net is not for larger heavier items Attach the upper loops to the retainers on either side of the endgate liftgate opening the label should be in the upper passenger side corner visible from the rear of vehicle Attach the lower hooks to the rear cargo tie downs on the floor Cargo Cover If Equipped If you have the optional cargo cover you can use it to cover items in the cargo area of your vehicle Grasp the handle and unroll the cover Latch the posts into the sockets on the inside trim panel on the passenger s side of the vehicle to secure it An improperly stored cargo cover could be thrown about the vehicle during a collision or sudden maneuver You or others could be injured If you remove the cover always store it outside of the vehicle When you put it back
92. Areas It makes sense to plan your trip especially when going to a remote area Know the terrain and plan your route You are much less likely to get bad surprises Get accurate maps of trails and terrain Try to learn of any blocked or closed roads It s also a good idea to travel with at least one other vehicle If something happens to one of them the other can help quickly Does your vehicle have a winch If so be sure to read the winch instructions In a remote area a winch can be handy if you get stuck But you ll want to know how to use it properly Getting Familiar with Off Road Driving It s a good idea to practice in an area that s safe and close to home before you go into the wilderness Off road driving does require some new and different driving skills Here s what we mean Tune your senses to different kinds of signals Your eyes for example need to constantly sweep the terrain for unexpected obstacles Your ears need to listen for unusual tire or engine sounds With your arms hands feet and body you ll need to respond to vibrations and vehicle bounce 4 18 Controlling your vehicle is the key to successful off road driving One of the best ways to control your vehicle is to control your speed Here are some things to keep in mind At higher speeds you approach things faster and you have less time to scan the terrain for obstacles you have less time to react you have more vehicle bounc
93. BAC of 0 10 percent Research shows that the driving skills of many people are impaired at a BAC approaching 0 05 percent and that the effects are worse at night All drivers are impaired at BAC levels above 0 05 percent Statistics show that the chance of being in a collision increases sharply for drivers who have a BAC of 0 05 percent or above A driver with a BAC level of 0 06 percent has doubled his or her chance of having a collision Ata BAC level of 0 10 percent the chance of this driver having a collision is 12 times greater at a level of 0 15 percent the chance is 25 times greater The body takes about an hour to rid itself of the alcohol in one drink No amount of coffee or number of cold showers will speed that up T ll be careful isn t the right answer What if there s an emergency a need to take sudden action as when a child darts into the street A person with even a moderate BAC might not be able to react quickly enough to avoid the collision There s something else about drinking and driving that many people don t know Medical research shows that alcohol in a person s system can make crash injuries worse especially injuries to the brain spinal cord or heart This means that when anyone who has been drinking driver or passenger is in a crash that person s chance of being killed or permanently disabled is higher than if the person had not been drinking Drinking and then driving is very danger
94. Control Let s review what driving experts say about what happens when the three control systems brakes steering and acceleration don t have enough friction where the tires meet the road to do what the driver has asked In any emergency don t give up Keep trying to steer and constantly seek an escape route or area of less danger Skidding In a skid a driver can lose control of the vehicle Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable care suited to existing conditions and by not overdriving those conditions But skids are always possible The three types of skids correspond to your vehicle s three control systems In the braking skid your wheels aren t rolling In the steering or cornering skid too much speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip and lose cornering force And in the acceleration skid too much throttle causes the driving wheels to spin A cornering skid and an acceleration skid are best handled by easing your foot off the accelerator pedal If your vehicle starts to slide ease your foot off the accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want the vehicle to go If you start steering quickly enough your vehicle may straighten out Always be ready for a second skid if it occurs Of course traction is reduced when water snow ice gravel or other material is on the road For safety you ll want to slow down and adjust your driving to these conditions It is important
95. Door Models 18 0 gallons 68 0 L A C Refrigerant See refrigerant charge label under the hood After refill the level must be checked 6 66 Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts Replacement part numbers listed in this section are based on the latest information available at the time of printing and are subject to change If a part listed in this manual is not the same as the part used in your vehicle when it was built or if you have any questions please contact your GM dealer Thermostat 0 0 0 0 cece eee eee 12559051 Oil Filter coe ea keer Pa OEE pS PF52 Air Cleaner Filter 00 A1163C PCV Valle 20 ee saw ib Sle eee CV769C Automatic Transmission Filter Kit 24200796 Spark Plugs chasse p E OE ees 41 932 Fuel Filter o i 40666088 i488 pha reneis GF481 Front Windshield Wiper Blade Trico 20 inches 50 8 cm Backglass Wiper Blade Trico 14 inches 35 6 cm Vehicle Dimensions Wheelbase Length Height 2WD 2 Door 4WD 2 Door 2WD 4 Door 4WD 4 Door 100 5 inches 255 3 cm 107 0 inches 271 8 cm 175 0 inches 444 5 cm 175 4 inches 445 5 cm 181 1 inches 460 0 cm 66 0 inches 167 6 cm 66 9 inches 170 0 cm 65 9 inches 167 4 cm 67 0 inches 170 2 cm 67 8 inches 172 2 cm Front Tread 2WD 5 gat bie cre he oe ke 55 0 inches 139 6 cm AWD pesue eed Garp ard acecend 57 3 inches 145 4 cm Rear
96. If the wheel leaks air replace it except some aluminum wheels which can sometimes be repaired See your dealer if any of these conditions exist Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you need Each new wheel should have the same load carrying capacity diameter width offset and be mounted the same way as the one it replaces If you need to replace any of your wheels wheel bolts or wheel nuts replace them only with new GM original equipment parts This way you will be sure to have the right wheel wheel bolts and wheel nuts for your vehicle 6 48 Using the wrong replacement wheels wheel bolts or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be dangerous It could affect the braking and handling of your vehicle make your tires lose air and make you lose control You could have a collision in which you or others could be injured Always use the correct wheel wheel bolts and wheel nuts for replacement NOTICE The wrong wheel can also cause problems with bearing life brake cooling speedometer or odometer calibration headlamp aim bumper height vehicle ground clearance and tire or tire chain clearance to the body and chassis See Changing a Flat Tire in the Index for more information Used Replacement Wheels Putting a used wheel on your vehicle is dangerous You can t know how it s been used or how far it s been driven It could fail suddenly and cause an accident If you have to replace a wheel us
97. If the shoulder belt goes in front of the child s face or neck put it behind the child restraint 4 Buckle the belt Make sure the release button is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to 1 51 5 Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of the retractor to set the lock 6 To tighten the belt feed the shoulder belt back into the retractor while you push down on the child restraint You may find it helpful to use your knee to push down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt 7 Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure To remove the child restraint just unbuckle the vehicle s safety belt and let it go back all the way The safety belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an adult or larger child passenger Larger Children Children who have outgrown child restraints should wear the vehicle s safety belts If you have the choice a child should sit next to a window so the child can wear a lap shoulder belt and get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can provide Accident statistics show that children are safer if they are restrained in the rear seat But they need to use the safety belts properly Children who aren t buckled up can be thrown out in acrash Children who aren t buckled up can strike other people who are 1 53 Never do this Here two children are weari
98. On vehicles with four wheel drive your anti lock brakes work at all times whether you are in two wheel drive or four wheel drive Braking in Emergencies With anti lock you can steer and brake at the same time In many emergencies steering can help you more than even the very best braking Steering Power Steering If you lose power steering assist because the engine stops or the system is not functioning you can steer but it will take much more effort Steering Tips Driving on Curves It s important to take curves at a reasonable speed A lot of the driver lost control accidents mentioned on the news happen on curves Here s why Experienced driver or beginner each of us is subject to the same laws of physics when driving on curves The traction of the tires against the road surface makes it possible for the vehicle to change its path when you turn the front wheels If there s no traction inertia will keep the vehicle going in the same direction If you ve ever tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice you ll understand this The traction you can get in a curve depends on the condition of your tires and the road surface the angle at which the curve is banked and your speed While you re in a curve speed is the one factor you can control Suppose you re steering through a sharp curve Then you suddenly accelerate Both control systems steering and acceleration have to do their work where the tir
99. Scheduled Maintenance are true Do not use this schedule if the vehicle is used for trailer towing driven in a dusty area or used off paved roads Use the Short Trip City schedule for these conditions Driving a vehicle with a fully warmed engine under highway conditions causes engine oil to break down slower Scheduled Maintenance Long Trip Highway Intervals Long Trip Highway Intervals Every 7 500 Miles 12 500 km Engine Oil and Filter Every 60 000 Miles 100 000 km Engine Accessory Change or every 12 months whichever occurs first Drive Belt Inspection Cas is Lubrano or every 12 months whichever Every 100 000 Miles 166 000 km Spark Plug Wire occurs first Drive Axle Service Tire Rotation oa Inspection Spark Plug Replacement Positive Every 15 000 Miles 25 000 km Automatic Crankcase Ventilation PCV Valve Inspection Transmission Service severe conditions only Every 150 000 Miles 240 000 km Cooling System Every 30 000 Miles 50 000 km Fuel Filter Service or every 60 months whichever occurs first Replacement Engine Air Cleaner Filter Replacement i These intervals only summarize maintenance services Every 50 000 Miles 83 000 km Automatic Be sure to follow the complete scheduled maintenance Transmission Service normal conditions on the following pages 7 7 Short Trip City Scheduled Maintenance The services shown in this schedule up to 100 000 miles 166 000 km should be per
100. Then use your turn signal Just before you leave the lane glance quickly over your shoulder to make sure there isn t another vehicle in your blind spot Once you are moving on the freeway make certain you allow a reasonable following distance Expect to move slightly slower at night 4 36 When you want to leave the freeway move to the proper lane well in advance If you miss your exit do not under any circumstances stop and back up Drive on to the next exit The exit ramp can be curved sometimes quite sharply The exit speed is usually posted Reduce your speed according to your speedometer not to your sense of motion After driving for any distance at higher speeds you may tend to think you are going slower than you actually are Before Leaving on a Long Trip Make sure you re ready Try to be well rested If you must start when you re not fresh such as after a day s work don t plan to make too many miles that first part of the journey Wear comfortable clothing and shoes you can easily drive in Is your vehicle ready for a long trip If you keep it serviced and maintained it s ready to go If it needs service have it done before starting out Of course you ll find experienced and able service experts in GM dealerships all across North America They ll be ready and willing to help if you need it Here are some things you can check before a trip Windshield Washer Fluid Is the
101. Tread 2WD goncdoasdeend atch eg Qare ned 54 7 inches 138 8 cm AWD nih ok hg ae pag gs ee 55 1 inches 139 9 cm Figures reflect base equipment only 6 67 Section 7 Maintenance Schedule This section covers the maintenance required for your vehicle Your vehicle needs these services to retain its safety dependability and emission control performance 7 2 Introduction 7 42 7 4 Part A Scheduled Maintenance Services 7 47 7 8 Short Trip City Scheduled Maintenance 7 49 7 30 Long Trip Highway Scheduled Maintenance 7 52 Part B Owner Checks and Services Part C Periodic Maintenance Inspections Part D Recommended Fluids and Lubricants Part E Maintenance Record IMPORTANT KEEP ENGINE OIL AT THE PROPER LEVEL AND CHANGE AS RECOMMENDED Protection Plan Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan The Plan supplements your new vehicle warranties See your Warranty and Owner Assistance booklet or your dealer for details Introduction Your Vehicle and the Environment Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep your vehicle in good working condition but also helps the environment All recommended maintenance procedures are important Improper vehicle maintenance can even affect the quality of the air we breathe Improper fluid levels or the wrong tire inflation can increase the level of emissions from your vehicle To help protect our environment and to keep your vehicle in good condition please maintain your vehi
102. Vehicle Center High Mounted Stop Lamp Heated Mirror Transfer Case Four Wheel Drive Stop Lamps Rear Window Wiper Replacement Bulbs Lamps Quantity Number Halogen Headlamps Composite Low Beam 2 9006 HB4 Halogen Headlamps Composite High Beam 2 9005 HB3 Tail and Stop Lamps 4 3057 Front Sidemarker Lamps 2 194 NA Front Turn Signal Lamps 2 3157 Turn Signal Lamps 2 3157 NA Capacities and Specifications Wheels and Tires Engine Description VORTEC 4300 Wheel Nut Torque 100 Ib ft 140 N m Type perep t eu Mo5 a6 dans EEEE ee nee nea V6 Tire Pressure See the Certification Tire label VIN Code ee ee ee ae REEE rr em W See Loading Your Vehicle in the Index Firing Order psepescciiiecirsd etis 1 6 5 4 3 2 Horsepower 190 at 4 400 rpm Thermostat Specification 195 F 91 C Spark Plug Gap 0 060 inches 1 52 mm 6 65 Capacities Approximate Please refer to Recommended Fluids and Lubricants in the Index for more information Cooling System Automatic Trans 11 7 quarts 11 1 L Manual Trans 11 9 quarts 11 3 L Crankcase 000 4 5 quarts 4 3 L Automatic Transmission Drain and Refill 5 0 quarts 4 7 L Differential Fluid REAP ht danke bee aie Da hee be ak 4 0 pints 1 9 L Front 2 0 0 0 0 0 2 2 6 pints 1 2 L Fuel Tank 2 Door Models 19 0 gallons 72 0 L Fuel Tank 4
103. adlamps come on at reduced brightness when the ignition is on the headlamp switch is in automatic headlamp mode the sensor detects daytime light an automatic transmission is not in PARK P and the parking brake is released When the DRL are on only your headlamps will be on The taillamps sidemarker and other lamps won t be on The instrument panel won t be lit up either When it begins to get dark the headlamps will automatically switch from DRL to the regular headlamps The DRL system on some vehicles may turn off temporarily while the turn signals are activated To idle an automatic transmission vehicle with the DRL off put the transmission in PARK P To idle a manual transmission vehicle with the DRL off set the parking brake The DRL will stay off until you shift out of PARK P or release the parking brake As with any vehicle you should turn on the regular headlamp system when you need it Fog Lamps If Equipped Use your fog lamps for better vision in foggy or misty conditions Your parking lamps must be on for your fog lamps to work The fog lamp switch is on the instrument panel under the lamps switch Press the switch to turn the fog lamps on Press the switch again to turn them off A light will glow in the switch when the fog lamps are on Fog lamps will go off whenever your high beam headlamps come on When the high beams go off the fog lamps will come on again 2 51 Interior Lam
104. ain When doing frequent trailer towing Uses such as found in taxi police or delivery service If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions change the fluid and filter every 50 000 miles 83 000 km See Scheduled Maintenance Services in the Index How to Check Because this operation can be a little difficult you may choose to have this done at the dealership service department If you do it yourself be sure to follow all the instructions here or you could get a false reading on the dipstick NOTICE Too much or too little fluid can damage your transmission Too much can mean that some of the fluid could come out and fall on hot engine parts or exhaust system parts starting a fire Be sure to get an accurate reading if you check your transmission fluid 6 17 Wait at least 30 minutes before checking the transmission fluid level if you have been driving When outside temperatures are above 90 F 32 C Athigh speed for quite a while In heavy traffic especially in hot weather While pulling a trailer To get the right reading the fluid should be at normal operating temperature which is 180 F to 200 F 82 C to 93 C Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about 15 miles 24 km when outside temperatures are above 50 F 10 C If it s colder than 50 F 10 C drive the vehicle in THIRD 3 until the engine temperature gage moves and then remains steady fo
105. ains when towing it Removal Procedure Use only the correct hooks A Heavy Unpainted Metal Engine Part B Good Battery C Dead Battery NOTICE Use the proper towing equipment to avoid damage to the bumper fascia or fog lamp areas of the vehicle With current trends in automotive styles and design it is essential that the correct towing equipment is used to tow a vehicle Your vehicle can be towed with wheel lift or car carrier equipment If your vehicle has a manual transmission you must use a towing dolly under the rear wheels when towing from the front with wheel lift equipment Two wheel drive vehicles must abide by the following tow limits when being towed by wheel lift equipment Towing from the front 35 mph 55 km h 50 miles 80 km Towing from the rear 35 mph 55 km h 50 miles 80 km When using wheel lift equipment to tow vehicles equipped with the electronic shift transfer case a towing dolly must be placed under the rear wheels when towing from the front and under the front wheels when towing from the rear When using wheel lift equipment to tow vehicles equipped with the active transfer case the transfer case must be in NEUTRAL and the following tow limits must be used Towing from the front 55 mph 88 km h or legal speed limit and distance is unlimited Towing from the rear 35 mph 55 km h 50 miles 80 km NOTICE If your vehicle is equipped with four wheel drive an
106. al or near frontal collisions even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel or the instrument panel Air bags supplement the protection provided by safety belts Air bags distribute the force of the impact more evenly over the occupant s upper body stopping the occupant more gradually But air bags would not help you in many types of collisions including rollovers rear impacts and side impacts primarily because an occupant s motion is not toward those air bags Air bags should never be regarded as anything more than a supplement to safety belts and then only in moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions What will you see after an air bag inflates After an air bag inflates it quickly deflates so quickly that some people may not even realize the air bag inflated Some components of the air bag module the steering wheel hub for the driver s air bag or the instrument panel for the right front passenger s bag will be hot for a short time The parts of the bag that come into contact with you may be warm but not too hot to touch There will be some smoke and dust coming from vents in the deflated air bags Air bag inflation doesn t prevent the driver from seeing or from being able to steer the vehicle nor does it stop people from leaving the vehicle 1 28 When an air bag inflates there is dust in the air This dust could cause breathing problems for people with a history of asthma or other breath
107. al transmission vehicles turn the key to OFF Then turn the key to LOCK while pressing the key release button down at the same time Pull the key straight out On automatic transmission vehicles turn the key to LOCK and pull it straight out Retained Accessory Power Your vehicle is equipped with a Retained Accessory Power RAP feature which will allow certain features of your vehicle to continue to work up to 20 minutes after the ignition key is turned to OFF 2 18 Your radio power windows sunroof and overhead console will work when the ignition key is in RUN or ACCESSORY Once the key is turned from RUN to OFF these features will continue to work for up to 20 minutes or until a door is opened Starting Your Engine Automatic Transmission Move your shift lever to PARK P or NEUTRAL N Your engine won t start in any other position that s a safety feature To restart when you re already moving use NEUTRAL N only NOTICE Don t try to shift to PARK P if your vehicle is moving If you do you could damage the transmission Shift to PARK P only when your vehicle is stopped Manual Transmission The gear selector should be in NEUTRAL and the parking brake engaged Hold the clutch pedal to the floor and start the engine Your vehicle won t start if the clutch pedal is not all the way down that s a safety feature 1 Without pushing the accelerator pedal turn your ignition key to START W
108. ans that soon your brakes won t work well That could lead to an accident When you hear the brake wear warning sound have your vehicle serviced NOTICE Continuing to drive with worn out brake pads could result in costly brake repair Some driving conditions or climates may cause a brake squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly applied This does not mean something is wrong with your brakes Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help prevent brake pulsation When tires are rotated inspect brake pads for wear and evenly torque wheel nuts in the proper sequence to GM specifications Brake linings should always be replaced as complete axle sets See Brake System Inspection in Section 7 of this manual under Part C Periodic Maintenance Inspections Brake Pedal Travel See your dealer if the brake pedal does not return to normal height or if there is a rapid increase in pedal travel This could be a sign of brake trouble Brake Adjustment Every time you make a brake stop your disc brakes adjust for wear 6 33 Replacing Brake System Parts The braking system on a vehicle is complex Its many parts have to be of top quality and work well together if the vehicle is to have really good braking Your vehicle was designed and tested with top quality GM brake parts When you replace parts of your braking system for example when your brake linings wear down and you have to have new ones
109. ap belt If you slid under it the belt would apply force at your abdomen This could cause serious or even fatal injuries The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest These parts of the body are best able to take belt restraining forces The safety belt locks if there s a sudden stop or a crash The safety belt also locks if you pull the belt very quickly out of the retractor You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt is too loose In a crash you would move forward too much which could increase injury The shoulder belt should fit against your body To unlatch the belt just push the button on the buckle Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for Children and Small Adults 4 Door Models Four door models have rear shoulder belt comfort guides This feature will provide added safety belt comfort for children who have outgrown child restraints and for small adults When installed on a shoulder belt the comfort guide pulls the belt away from the neck and head There is one guide for each outside passenger position in the rear seat To provide added safety belt comfort for children who have outgrown child restraints and for smaller adults the comfort guides may be installed on the shoulder belts Here s how to install a comfort guide and use the safety belt 1 35 1 Pull the elastic cord out from between the edge of the seatback and the interior body to remove the guide from its storag
110. art isn t working the other part can still work and stop you For good braking though you need both parts working well If the warning light comes on there could be a brake problem Have your brake system inspected right away DEC OC United States Canada This light should come on briefly when you turn the ignition key to RUN If it doesn t come on then have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there s a problem If the light comes on while you are driving pull off the road and stop carefully You may notice that the pedal is harder to push Or the pedal may go closer to the floor It may take longer to stop If the light is still on have the vehicle towed for service See Towing Your Vehicle in the Index Your brake system may not be working properly if the brake system warning light is on Driving with the brake system warning light on can lead to an accident If the light is still on after you ve pulled off the road and stopped carefully have the vehicle towed for service Anti Lock Brake System Warning Light With the anti lock brake system this light will come on when you start your engine and may stay on for several seconds That s normal If the light stays on or comes on when you re driving your vehicle needs service If the regular brake system warning light isn t on you still have brakes but you don t have anti lock brakes If the regular brake system warning ligh
111. asonable fuel expenses up to 10 per day five day maximum may be available Claim amounts should reflect actual costs and be supported by original receipts Courtesy Rental Vehicle When your vehicle is unavailable due to overnight warranty repairs your dealer may arrange to provide you with a courtesy rental vehicle or reimburse you for a rental vehicle you obtained at actual cost up to a maximum of 30 00 per day supported by receipts This requires that you sign and complete a rental agreement and meet state local and rental vehicle provider requirements Requirements vary and may include minimum age requirements insurance coverage credit card etc You are responsible for fuel usage charges and may also be responsible for taxes levies usage fees excessive mileage or rental usage beyond the completion of the repair Generally it is not possible to provide a like vehicle as a courtesy rental Additional Program Information Courtesy Transportation is available during the Bumper to Bumper warranty coverage period but it is not part of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty A separate booklet entitled Warranty and Owner Assistance Information furnished with each new vehicle provides detailed warranty coverage information Courtesy Transportation is available only at participating dealers and all program options such as shuttle service may not be available at every dealer Please contact your dealer for specific informa
112. belts clean and dry Do not bleach or dye safety belts If you do it may severely weaken them In a crash they might not be able to provide adequate protection Clean safety belts only with mild soap and lukewarm water Cleaning Glass Surfaces Glass should be cleaned often GM Glass Cleaner or a liquid household glass cleaner will remove normal tobacco smoke and dust films on interior glass See Appearance Care and Materials in the Index Don t use abrasive cleaners on glass because they may cause scratches Avoid placing decals on the inside rear window since they may have to be scraped off later If abrasive cleaners are used on the inside of the rear window an electric defogger element may be damaged Any temporary license should not be attached across the defogger grid Cleaning the Outside of the Windshield Backglass and Wiper Blades If the windshield is not clear after using the windshield washer or if the wiper blade chatters when running wax sap or other material may be on the blade or windshield Clean the outside of the windshield with GM Windshield Cleaner Bon Ami Powder non scratching glass cleaning powder GM Part No 1050011 The windshield is clean if beads do not form when you rinse it with water Grime from the windshield will stick to the wiper blades and affect their performance Clean the blade by wiping vigorously with a cloth soaked in full strength windshield washer solv
113. bol On four door models the switch on each rear door works only that door s lock With this feature you can lock the rear doors so they can t be opened from the inside by passengers Move the lever up to lock the doors and down to release the door locks This feature stops the power door locks from locking when the keys are in the ignition and a door is open to protect you from locking your key in the vehicle If the power lock switch is pressed when a door is open and the key is in the ignition all the doors will lock and the driver s door will unlock Leaving Your Vehicle If you are leaving the vehicle take your key open your door and set the locks from inside Then get out and close the door Keyless Entry System If Equipped If your vehicle has this feature you can lock and unlock your doors and rear endgate from about 3 feet 1 m up to 30 feet 9 m away using the remote keyless entry transmitter supplied with your vehicle Your keyless entry system operates on a radio frequency subject to Federal Communications Commission FCC Rules and with Industry Canada This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 this device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation This device complies with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation
114. cation D Spring i E Wheel Wrench Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools F Lower G Raise H Hoist Arm Storing a jack a tire or other equipment in the passenger compartment of the vehicle could cause injury In a sudden stop or collision loose equipment could strike someone Store all these in the proper place 5 28 Put the tire on the ground at the rear of the vehicle with the valve stem pointed down and to the rear Pull the retainer through the wheel Put the chisel end of the wheel wrench on an angle through the hole in the rear bumper and into the hoist shaft Raise the tire fully against the underside of the vehicle Continue turning the wheel wrench until the tire is secure and the cable is tight The spare tire hoist cannot be overtightened PUSH amp PULL E gt AJ ROTATE TIRE y 5 Make sure the tire is stored securely Push pull and then try to rotate or turn the tire If the tire moves use the wheel wrench to tighten the cable 5 29 Follow this diagram for the inside mounted spare Follow this diagram for the rear mounted spare A Spare or Flat Tire A Wheel Carrier B Retainer B Spare or Flat Tire C Nut C Wheel Nut and Locking Nut Cylinder D Wheel Carrier Reinstall the locking wheel nut using the wheel wrench E Hook Then push the lock case onto the lug nut until it stops The key does not have to be inserted
115. ch could cause serious or fatal injuries So be sure that any child small enough for one is always properly restrained in a child or infant restraint 1 40 Infants need complete support including support for the head and neck This is necessary because an infant s neck is weak and its head weighs so much compared with the rest of its body In a frontal crash an infant in a rear facing restraint settles into the restraint so the crash forces can be distributed across the strongest part of the infant s body the back and shoulders A baby should be secured in an appropriate infant restraint This is so important that many hospitals today won t release a newborn infant to its parents unless there is an infant restraint available for the baby s first trip in a motor vehicle CAUTION Continued at only 25 mph 40 km h a 12 Ib 5 5 kg baby will suddenly become a 240 Ib 110 kg force on your arms The baby would be almost impossible to hold Secure the baby in an infant restraint Never hold a baby in your arms while riding in a vehicle A baby doesn t weigh much until a crash During a crash a baby will become so heavy you can t hold it For example in a crash CAUTION Continued 1 41 Child Restraints Every time infants and young children ride in vehicles they should have protection provided by appropriate restraints Q What are the different types of add on child restraints A Add on
116. child restraints are available in four basic types When selecting a child restraint take into consideration not only the child s weight and size but also whether or not the restraint will be compatible with the motor vehicle in which it will be used 1 42 An infant car bed A is a special bed made for use in a motor vehicle It s an infant restraint system designed to restrain or position a child on a continuous flat surface With an infant car bed make sure that the infant s head rests toward the center of the vehicle A rear facing infant restraint B positions an infant to face the rear of the vehicle Rear facing infant restraints are designed for infants of up to about 20 Ibs 9 kg and about one year of age This type of restraint faces the rear so that the infant s head neck and body can have the support they need in a frontal crash Some infant seats come in two parts the base stays secured in the vehicle and the seat part is removable 1 43 1 44 A forward facing child restraint C E positions a child upright to face forward in the vehicle These forward facing restraints are designed to help protect children who are from 20 to 40 Ibs 9 to 18 kg and about 26 to 40 inches 66 to 102 cm in height or up to around four years of age One type a convertible restraint is designed to be used either as a rear facing infant seat or a forward facing child seat A booster seat F is designe
117. ck selection Release it to resume playing SEEK Press the right arrow to seek to the next selection on the CD Press the left arrow to search for the previous selection on the CD The sound will mute while seeking P SCAN Press this button to hear the tracks in random rather than sequential order RANDOM will appear on the display Press P SCAN again to turn off random play TAPE AUX Press this button if you have a disc loaded in the changer and the radio is turned on to play a compact disc Press AM FM to return to the radio when a compact disc is playing Press TAPE AUX to switch between the tape and console mounted CD changer if both are loaded If your vehicle is equipped with the AM FM Stereo with Compact Disc Player Bose all of the CD changer functions are controlled by the radio buttons except for ejecting the CD magazine PREV 1 Press this button or the SEEK left arrow to go to the previous track if the current selection has been playing for less than eight seconds If the PREV button is pressed and the current selection has been playing for more than eight seconds it will go to the beginning of the current selection If you hold or press this button more than once the player will continue moving back through the disc The sound will mute while seeking RDM 2 Press this button to hear the tracks in random rather than sequential order RANDOM will appear on the display Press RDM again to turn off random play
118. cle properly Maintenance Requirements Maintenance intervals checks inspections and recommended fluids and lubricants as prescribed in this manual are necessary to keep your vehicle in good working condition Any damage caused by failure to follow recommended maintenance may not be covered by warranty How This Section is Organized This maintenance schedule is divided into five parts Part A Scheduled Maintenance Services shows what to have done and how often Some of these services can be complex so unless you are technically qualified and have the necessary equipment you should let your dealer s service department or another qualified service center do these jobs Performing maintenance work on a vehicle can be dangerous In trying to do some jobs you can be seriously injured Do your own maintenance work only if you have the required know how and the proper tools and equipment for the job If you have any doubt have a qualified technician do the work If you want to get the service information see Service and Owner Publications in the Index Part B Owner Checks and Services tells you what should be checked and when It also explains what you can easily do to help keep your vehicle in good condition Part C Periodic Maintenance Inspections explains important inspections that your dealer s service department or another qualified service center should perform Part D Recommended Fl
119. conds the compass will acknowledge the variation mode by displaying the current zone number When it does release both buttons 4 Press US MET until your zone number appears on the display 5 Press MODE to enter your zone number Your variance is now set and the display will return to the COMP TEMP mode TRIP Once in the TRIP mode pressing the MODE button will step you through the following TRIP functions e AVG ECON The average fuel economy since the last reset is displayed INST ECON Instantaneous fuel economy for the last second of driving is displayed RANGE The display indicates the estimated distance that can be travelled with the remaining fuel in the tank based on the fuel economy for the last few hours of driving FUEL USED The fuel used since the last reset is displayed AVG SPEED The average speed since the last reset is displayed 2 61 To reset the trip computer press the MODE and US MET buttons simultaneously for at least two seconds All functions will be displayed for half a second once the system is reset Reset can only be performed in the AVG ECON FUEL USED and AVG SPEED modes All three modes are reset simultaneously Sunglasses Storage Compartment The console has a sunglasses storage compartment 2 62 Door Storage You will find a storage compartment on each of the front doors Four door models have storage pockets and cupholders on rear doors Front Storage
120. d don t get too close Time your move so you will be increasing speed as the time comes to move into the other lane If the way is clear to pass you will have a running start that more than makes up for the distance you would lose by dropping back And if something happens to cause you to cancel your pass you need only slow down and drop back again and wait for another opportunity If other cars are lined up to pass a slow vehicle wait your turn But take care that someone isn t trying to pass you as you pull out to pass the slow vehicle Remember to glance over your shoulder and check the blind spot 4 14 Check your mirrors glance over your shoulder and start your left lane change signal before moving out of the right lane to pass When you are far enough ahead of the passed vehicle to see its front in your inside mirror activate your right lane change signal and move back into the right lane Remember that your right outside mirror is convex The vehicle you just passed may seem to be farther away from you than it really is Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a time on two lane roads Reconsider before passing the next vehicle Don t overtake a slowly moving vehicle too rapidly Even though the brake lamps are not flashing it may be slowing down or starting to turn If you re being passed make it easy for the following driver to get ahead of you Perhaps you can ease a little to the right Loss of
121. d Be sure to set the parking brake before shifting the transfer case to NEUTRAL See Parking Brake in the Index 2 30 NEUTRAL Shift the vehicle s transfer case to NEUTRAL only when towing your vehicle See Recreational Vehicle Towing or Towing Your Vehicle in the Index for more information Indicator lights in the switches show which setting you are in The indicator lights will come on briefly when you turn on the ignition and one will stay on If the lights do not come on you should take your vehicle to your dealer for service An indicator light will flash while shifting the transfer case It will remain illuminated when the shift is complete If for some reason the transfer case cannot make a requested shift it will return to the last chosen setting If the SERVICE 4WD light stays on you should take your vehicle to your dealer for service See Service 4WD in the Index for further information Shifting to 4HI or AUTO 4WD Press and release the 4HI or AUTO 4WD switch This can be done at any speed and the indicator light will flash while shifting It will remain illuminated when the shift is complete Shifting to 2HI Press and release the 2HI switch This can be done at any speed Shifting to 4LO To shift to 4LO the vehicle s engine must be running and the vehicle must be stopped or moving less than 3 mph 4 8 km h with the transmission in NEUTRAL N or with the clutch pedal pre
122. d for children who are about 40 to 60 Ibs or even up to 80 Ibs 18 to 27 kg or even up to 36 kg and about four to eight years of age A booster seat is designed to improve the fit of the vehicle s safety belt system Booster seats with shields use lap only belts however booster seats without shields use lap shoulder belts Booster seats can also help a child to see out the window When choosing a child restraint be sure the child restraint is designed to be used in a vehicle If it is it will have a label saying that it meets federal motor vehicle safety standards Then follow the instructions for the restraint You may find these instructions on the restraint itself or in a booklet or both These restraints use the belt system in your vehicle but the child also has to be secured within the restraint to help reduce the chance of personal injury The instructions that come with the infant or child restraint will show you how to do that Both the owner s manual and the child restraint instructions are important so if either one of these is not available obtain a replacement copy from the manufacturer 1 45 Where to Put the Restraint Accident statistics show that children are safer if they are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat We at General Motors therefore recommend that you put your child restraint in a rear seat outside position Never put a rear facing child restraint in the front passenger seat Her
123. d if your belt is buckled in the wrong place like this In a crash the belt would go up over your abdomen The belt forces would be there not at the pelvic bones This could cause serious internal injuries Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you Q What s wrong with this You can be seriously injured if you wear the shoulder belt under your arm In a crash your body would move too far forward which would increase the chance of head and neck injury Also the belt would apply too much force to the ribs which aren t as strong as shoulder bones You could also severely injure internal organs like your liver or spleen The shoulder belt is worn under the arm It should be worn over the shoulder at all times 1 21 Q What s wrong with this CY 3 Z Oe X in Dand De py al The belt is twisted across the body 1 22 You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt In a crash you wouldn t have the full width of the belt to spread impact forces If a belt is twisted make it straight so it can work properly or ask your dealer to fix it Safety belts work for everyone including pregnant women Like all occupants they are more likely to be seriously injured if they don t wear safety belts To unlatch the belt just push the button on the buckle The belt should go back out of the way Before you close the door be sure the belt is out
124. d many driving tips and suggestions These will help make your off road driving safer and more enjoyable 4 16 Before You Go Off Roading There are some things to do before you go out For example be sure to have all necessary maintenance and service work done Check to make sure all underbody shields if so equipped are properly attached Be sure you read all the information about your four wheel drive vehicle in this manual Is there enough fuel Is the spare tire fully inflated Are the fluid levels up where they should be What are the local laws that apply to off roading where you ll be driving If you don t know you should check with law enforcement people in the area Will you be on someone s private land If so be sure to get the necessary permission Loading Your Vehicle for Off Road Driving There are some important things to remember about how to load your vehicle The heaviest things should be on the load floor and forward of your rear axle Put heavier items as far forward as you can Be sure the load is secured properly so driving on the off road terrain doesn t toss things around Cargo on the load floor piled higher than the seatbacks can be thrown forward during a sudden stop You or your passengers could be injured Keep cargo below the top of the seatbacks Unsecured cargo on the load floor can be tossed about when driving over rough terrain You or your passengers can be struck by flying ob
125. d the towing limits must be exceeded a towing dolly must be used under the front wheels or vehicle powertrain damage will occur Consult your dealer or a professional towing service if you need to have your vehicle towed See Roadside Assistance in the Index Engine Overheating You will find a coolant temperature gage on your vehicle s instrument panel See Gages in the Index If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine Steam from an overheated engine can burn you badly even if you just open the hood Stay away from the engine if you see or hear steam coming from it Just turn it off and get everyone away from the vehicle until it cools down Wait until there is no sign of steam or coolant before you open the hood If you keep driving when your engine is overheated the liquids in it can catch fire You or others could be badly burned Stop your engine if it overheats and get out of the vehicle until the engine is cool NOTICE If your engine catches fire because you keep driving with no coolant your vehicle can be badly damaged The costly repairs would not be covered by your warranty If No Steam Is Coming From Your Engine If you get an engine overheat warning but see or hear no steam the problem may not be too serious Sometimes the engine can get a little too hot when you Climb a long hill on a hot day Stop after high speed driving Idle for long periods in traffic Tow atrailer See
126. dal as you press the accelerator pedal You can shift into FIRST 1 when you re going less than 20 mph 30 km h If you ve come to a complete stop and it s hard to shift into FIRST 1 put the shift lever in NEUTRAL and let up on the clutch Press the clutch pedal back down Then shift into FIRST 1 SECOND 2 Press the clutch pedal as you let up on the accelerator pedal and shift into SECOND 2 Then slowly let up on the clutch pedal as you press the accelerator pedal THIRD FOURTH AND FIFTH 3 4 and 5 Shift into THIRD 3 FOURTH 4 and FIFTH 5 the same way you do for SECOND 2 Slowly let up on the clutch pedal as you press the accelerator pedal To stop let up on the accelerator pedal and press the brake pedal Just before the vehicle stops press the clutch pedal and the brake pedal and shift to NEUTRAL NEUTRAL Use this position when you start or idle your engine REVERSE R To back up press the clutch pedal wait about six seconds then shift into REVERSE R Then let up on the clutch pedal slowly while pressing the accelerator pedal NOTICE Shift to REVERSE R only after your vehicle is stopped Shifting to REVERSE R while your vehicle is moving could damage your transmission Use REVERSE R along with the parking brake for parking your vehicle Shift Light If you have a manual transmission you have a SHIFT light on your instrument panel cluster SHIFT This lig
127. de the vehicle secure it whenever you can Don t leave a seat folded down unless you need to There s also important loading information for off road driving in this manual See Loading Your Vehicle for Off Road Driving in the Index 4 47 Payload The payload capacity is shown on the Certification Tire label This is the maximum load capacity that your vehicle can carry Be sure to include the weight of the occupants as part of your load If you added any accessories or equipment after your vehicle left the factory remember to subtract the weight of these things from the payload Your dealer can help you with this Add On Equipment When you carry removable items you may need to put a limit on how many people you carry inside your vehicle Be sure to weigh your vehicle before you buy and install the new equipment OTICE Your warranty doesn t cover parts or components that fail because of overloading Towing a Trailer If you don t use the correct equipment and drive properly you can lose control when you pull a trailer For example if the trailer is too heavy the brakes may not work well or even at all You and your passengers could be seriously injured Pull a trailer only if you have followed all the steps in this section Ask your dealer for advice and information about towing a trailer with your vehicle NOTICE Pulling a trailer improperly can damage your vehicle and result in costly
128. e s why A child in a rear facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger s air bag inflates This is because the back of the rear facing child restraint would be very close to the inflating air bag Always secure a rear facing child restraint in a rear seat outside position CAUTION Continued 1 46 You may secure a forward facing child restraint in the right front seat but before you do always move the front passenger seat as far back as it will go It s better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat outside position Wherever you install it be sure to secure the child restraint properly Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure people in the vehicle Be sure to properly secure any child restraint in your vehicle even when no child is in it Top Strap In Canada the law requires that forward facing child restraints have a top strap and that the strap be anchored In the United States some child restraints also have a top strap If your child restraint has a top strap it should be anchored Anchor brackets for the rear outside seat positions are located on the floor in the cargo area of your vehicle Don t use the rear set of tie down brackets Anchor the top strap to the closest bracket on the same side of the vehicle as the child restraint Once you have the top strap anchored you
129. e serviced right away 2 78 If the air bag readiness light stays on after you start your vehicle it means the air bag system may not be working properly The air bags in your vehicle may not inflate in a crash or they could even inflate without a crash To help avoid injury to yourself or others have your vehicle serviced right away if the air bag readiness light stays on after you start your vehicle The air bag readiness light should flash for a few seconds when you turn the ignition key to RUN If the light doesn t come on then have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem Charging System Indicator Light The charging system light will come on briefly when you turn on the ignition but the engine is not running as a check to show you it is working It should go out once the engine is running If it stays on or comes on while you are driving you may have a problem with the charging system It could indicate that you have problems with a generator drive belt or another electrical problem Have it checked right away Driving while this light is on could drain your battery If you must drive a short distance with the light on be certain to turn off all your accessories such as the radio and air conditioner Voltmeter Gage When your engine is not running but the ignition is on in RUN this gage shows your battery s state of charge in DC volts VOLTS When the engine is
130. e system to use outside air Press it again to close off the outside air Pressing the OUTSIDE AIR button will cancel the RECIRCULATION button L amp D RECIRCULATION Press this button to limit the amount of fresh air entering your vehicle This is helpful when you are trying to limit odors entering your vehicle In the AUTO mode the system will use recirculation as necessary to cool the air Pressing the recirculation button will change the operation to a manual mode and the air will recirculate non stop Press this button again to turn off the recirculation feature RECIRCULATION may be selected with the fan control in OFF to limit odors outside air and dust from entering your vehicle Pressing the RECIRCULATION button will cancel the OUTSIDE AIR button Re A C Press this button to turn the air conditioning on and off The system will cool and dehumidify the air inside the vehicle when the A C light is on Air conditioning will be automatically disabled when the outside temperature drops below a level which air conditioning is ineffective Remember that in order for the automatic system to perform well it needs A C to provide cooling performance Air Conditioning On hot days open the windows long enough to let hot inside air escape This reduces the time it takes for your vehicle to cool down Then keep your windows closed for the air conditioner to work its best For quick cool down on very hot days use MAX A C with
131. e JIMMY are registered trademarks of General Motors Corporation This manual includes the latest information at the time it was printed We reserve the right to make changes in the product after that time without further notice For vehicles first sold in Canada substitute the name General Motors of Canada Limited for GMC whenever it appears in this manual Please keep this manual in your vehicle so it will be there if you ever need it when you re on the road If you sell the vehicle please leave this manual in it so the new owner can use it vi g N We support voluntary technician certification CERTIFIED WE SUPPORT VOLUNTARY TECHNICIAN CERTIFICATION THROUGH National Institute for AUTOMOTIVE SERVICE EXCELLENCE Ne 7 For Canadian Owners Who Prefer a French Language Manual Aux propri taires canadiens Vous pouvez vous procurer un exemplaire de ce guide en frangais chez votre concessionaire ou au DGN Marketing Services Ltd 1577 Meyerside Dr Mississauga Ontario LST 1B9 2 Door Utility 4 Door Utility About Driving Your Vehicle As with other vehicles of this type failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or an accident Be sure to read the on pavement and off road driving guidelines in this manual See Your Driving the Road and Your Vehicle and Off Road Driving with Your Four Wheel Drive Vehicle in the Index How to Use
132. e Tire and Tools The jacking equipment you ll need is stored along the driver s side inner rear quarter panel In some cases you may have to remove the spare tire in order to reach the jack Your vehicle is also equipped with work gloves and a plastic ground mat to assist in the changing of a flat tire To remove your jack cover pull up on the latch es on the cover Remove the wheel blocks jack and wheel wrench The following instructions explain how to remove the spare tire depending on where it is mounted on your vehicle 5 20 NOTICE Never remove or restow a tire from to a stowage position under the vehicle while the vehicle is supported by a jack Always tighten the tire fully against the underside of the vehicle when restowing To remove the underbody mounted spare insert the chisel end of the wheel wrench on an angle into the hole in the rear bumper Be sure the chisel end of the wheel wrench connects into the hoist shaft Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise to lower the spare tire Keep turning the wheel wrench until the spare tire can be pulled out from under the vehicle When the tire has been completely lowered tilt the retainer at the end of the cable and pull it through the wheel opening Pull the tire out from under the vehicle NOTICE To help avoid vehicle damage do not drive the vehicle before the cable is properly stored If you have an inside mounted spare t
133. e a new GM original equipment wheel Tire Chains NOTICE If your vehicle has P235 75R15 P235 70R15 235 70R15 or 31x10 50RI5LT C size tires don t use tire chains They can damage your vehicle because there s not enough clearance NOTICE Continued NOTICE Continued Use another type of traction device only if its manufacturer recommends it for use on your vehicle and tire size combination and road conditions Follow that manufacturer s instructions To help avoid damage to your vehicle drive slowly readjust or remove the device if it s contacting your vehicle and don t spin your wheels If you do find traction devices that will fit install them on the rear tires If you have other size tires use tire chains only where legal and only when you must Use only SAE Class S type chains that are the proper size for your tires Install them on the drive axle tires four wheel drive vehicles can use chains on both axles and tighten them as tightly as possible with the ends securely fastened Drive slowly and follow the chain manufacturer s instructions If you can hear the chains contacting your vehicle stop and retighten them If the contact continues slow down until it stops Driving too fast or spinning the wheels with chains on will damage your vehicle 6 49 Appearance Care Remember cleaning products can be hazardous Some are toxic Others can burst into flame if you strike a match o
134. e clip 1 36 2 Slide the guide under and past the belt The elastic cord must be under the belt Then place the guide over the belt and insert the two edges of the belt into the slots of the guide 3 Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat 4 Buckle position and release the safety belt as The elastic cord must be under the belt and the described in Rear Seat Outside Passenger Positions guide on top earlier in this section Make sure that the shoulder belt crosses the shoulder To remove and store the comfort guides squeeze the belt edges together so that you can take them out from the guides Pull the guide upward to expose its storage clip and then slide the guide onto the clip Rotate the guide and clip inward and in between the seatback and the interior body leaving only the loop of elastic cord exposed 1 37 Center Rear Passenger Position 4 Door Models 1 38 Lap Belt When you sit in the center rear seating position you have a lap safety belt which has a retractor 1 Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you Don t let it get twisted 2 Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure 3 Feed the lap belt into the retractor to tighten it 4 Position and release it the same way as the lap part of a lap shoulder belt If the belt isn t long enough see Safety Belt Extender at the end of this
135. e harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation This device complies with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 this device may not cause interference and 2 this device must accept any interference including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device Changes and modifications to this system by other than an authorized service facility could void authorization to use this equipment Programming the Transmitter Do not use the HomeLink Transmitter with any garage door opener that does not have the stop and reverse feature This includes any garage door opener model manufactured before April 1 1982 Be sure that people and objects are clear of the garage door you are programming Your vehicle s engine should be turned off while programming the transmitter Follow these steps to program up to three channels 1 If you have previously programmed a transmitter channel proceed to Step 2 Otherwise hold down the two outside buttons on the HomeLink Transmitter until the indicator light begins to flash rapidly after 20 seconds Then release the buttons This procedure initializes the memory and erases any previous settings for all three channels 2 Decide which one of the three channels you want to program Hold the end of the hand held transmitter about 2 to 5 i
136. e has a feature called Retained Accessory Power RAP With RAP you can play your audio system even after the ignition is off See Retained Accessory Power in the Index Setting the Clock for Systems with SET Button Press SET Within five seconds press and hold the SEEK right arrow until the correct minute appears on the display Press and hold the SEEK left arrow until the correct hour appears on the display 3 10 Setting the Clock for Systems with HR and MN Buttons Press and hold HR until the correct hour appears on the display Press and hold MN until the correct minute appears on the display To display the clock with the ignition off press RECALL or HR MN and the time will be displayed for a few seconds There is an initial two second delay before the clock goes into the time set mode AM FM Stereo oa EL ia bo See oe E E mm rA m a i i I E i aad Playing the Radio VOLUME This knob turns the system on and off and controls the volume To increase volume and turn the radio on turn the knob clockwise Turn it counterclockwise to decrease volume and turn the radio off RECALL Display the time with the ignition off by pressing the recall knob When the radio is playing press this knob to recall the station frequency Finding a Station AM FM Press the lower knob to switch between AM and FM The display shows your selection TUNE Turn the lower knob to tune in radio
137. e when you drive over obstacles you ll need more distance for braking especially since you re on an unpaved surface When you re driving off road bouncing and quick changes in direction can easily throw you out of position This could cause you to lose control and crash So whether you re driving on or off the road you and your passengers should wear Safety belts Scanning the Terrain Off road driving can take you over many different kinds of terrain You need to be familiar with the terrain and its many different features Here are some things to consider Surface Conditions Off roading can take you over hard packed dirt gravel rocks grass sand mud snow or ice Each of these surfaces affects the steering acceleration and braking of your vehicle in different ways Depending upon the kind of surface you are on you may experience slipping sliding wheel spinning delayed acceleration poor traction and longer braking distances Surface Obstacles Unseen or hidden obstacles can be hazardous A rock log hole rut or bump can startle you if you re not prepared for them Often these obstacles are hidden by grass bushes snow or even the rise and fall of the terrain itself Here are some things to consider Is the path ahead clear Will the surface texture change abruptly up ahead Does the travel take you uphill or downhill There s more discussion of these subjects later Will you have to
138. ecause this operation can be a little difficult you may choose to have this done at your GM dealership service department If you do it yourself be sure to follow all the instructions here or you could get a false reading NOTICE Too much or too little fluid can damage your transmission Too much can mean that some of the fluid could come out and fall on hot engine parts or exhaust system parts starting a fire Be sure to get an accurate reading if you check your transmission fluid Check the fluid level only when your engine is off the vehicle is parked on a level place and the transmission is cool enough for you to rest your fingers on the transmission case Then follow these steps 1 Remove the filler plug 2 Check that the lubricant level is up to the bottom of the filler plug hole 3 If the fluid level is good install the plug and be sure it is fully seated If the fluid level is low add more fluid as described in the next steps How to Add Fluid Here s how to add fluid Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what kind of fluid to use See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants in the Index 1 Remove the filler plug 2 Add fluid at the filler plug hole Add only enough fluid to bring the fluid level up to the bottom of the filler plug hole 3 Install the filler plug Be sure the plug is fully seated Hydraulic Clutch The hydraulic clutch linkage in your vehicle is self adjusting
139. eceiver will continue to scan and momentarily stop at each station until you press the button again The sound will mute while scanning PUSHBUTTONS The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to your favorite stations You can set up to 18 stations six AM six FM1 and six FM2 Just 1 Turn the radio on 2 Press AM FM to select the band 3 Tune in the desired station 4 Press AUTO TONE to select the setting you prefer 5 Press and hold one of the six pushbuttons The sound will mute When it returns release the button Whenever you press that numbered button the station you set will return and the tone you selected will be automatically selected for that button 6 Repeat the steps for each pushbutton 3 26 P SCAN The preset scan button lets you scan through your favorite stations stored on your pushbuttons Select either the AM FM1 or FM2 mode and then press P SCAN It will scan through each station stored on your pushbuttons and stop for a few seconds before continuing to scan through all of the pushbuttons Press PSCAN again or one of the pushbuttons to stop scanning to listen to a specific stored station RSCAN will light up on the display while in this mode If one of the stations stored on a pushbutton is too weak for the location you are in the radio display will show the channel number P1 P6 for several seconds before advancing to the next preset station Setting the Tone BASS Press lightly on this kn
140. ed Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve stems They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt and moisture Tire Inspection and Rotation Tires should be rotated every 6 000 to 8 000 miles 10 000 to 13 000 km Any time you notice unusual wear rotate your tires as soon as possible and check wheel alignment Also check for damaged tires or wheels See When It s Time for New Tires and Wheel Replacement later in this section for more information Make sure the spare tire is stored securely Push pull and then try to rotate or turn the tire If it moves use the wheel wrench to tighten the cable See Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools in the Index The purpose of regular rotation is to achieve more uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle The first rotation is the most important See Scheduled Maintenance Services in the Index for scheduled rotation intervals 6 43 When rotating your tires always use one of the correct rotation patterns shown here After the tires have been rotated adjust the front and rear inflation pressures as shown on the Certification Tire label Make certain that all wheel nuts are properly tightened See Wheel Nut Torque in the Index 6 44 Rust or dirt on a wheel or on the parts to which it is fastened can make wheel nuts become loose after a time The wheel could come off and cause an accident When you change a wheel remove any rust or
141. ed using the slots supplied in the magazine You must first load the magazine with discs before you can play a compact disc Load the CDs from bottom to top placing the discs in the magazine label side up If you load a disc label side down the disc will not play and an error will occur Be careful to align and insert the disc into one disc tray only Repeat this procedure for loading up to six discs in the magazine Once you have loaded the discs in the magazine slide open the door of the compact disc CD changer Push the magazine into the changer in the direction of the arrow marked on the magazine Close the door by sliding it all the way forward When the CD magazine is loaded the changer will begin checking for discs in the magazine This will continue for up to one and a half minutes depending on the number of discs loaded To eject the magazine from the player slide the CD changer door all the way open then press EJECT NOTICE If the CD magazine fails to eject after the EJECT button has been pressed do not attempt to pry the magazine from the CD changer Physical damage caused by prying the magazine from the CD changer is not covered by warranty If the magazine will not eject take your vehicle to an authorized repair center for service Remember to keep the door closed whenever possible to keep dirt and dust from getting inside the changer 3 35 Whenever a CD magazine with discs is loaded in the cha
142. efore you turn on the ignition and move the vehicle the temperature indicated will be the last outside temperature recorded with the ignition on If the outside temperature is 37 F 3 C or lower the display will toggle between the word ICE and the current temperature every eight seconds This is a warning to the driver that road conditions may be icy and that appropriate precautions should be taken The compass is self calibrating so it does not need to be manually set However if C Calibration is displayed the compass will need to be calibrated You may also place the compass in a noncalibrated mode by pressing and holding the MODE and US MET buttons simultaneously while in the COMP TEMP mode After about 10 seconds the compass will display C and you can release the buttons Drive the vehicle in a complete 360 circle three times at a speed of less than 5 mph 8 km h and the compass will function normally Once the calibration is complete the display will return to a compass reading Variance is the difference between magnetic north and geographic north In some areas the difference between the two can be great enough to cause false compass readings If this happens follow these instructions to set the variance for your particular location 1 Find your location on the zone map earlier in this section Note your zone number 2 Press and hold both the MODE and the US MET buttons in the COMP TEMP mode 3 After five se
143. eld transmitter every two seconds without ever releasing the button on the HomeLink Transmitter Release both buttons when the indicator light on the HomeLink Transmitter begins to flash rapidly Operating the Transmitter Press and hold the appropriate button on the HomeLink Transmitter The indicator light comes on while the signal is being transmitted If the hand held transmitter appears to program the HomeLink Transmitter but does not open your garage door and if the garage door opener was manufactured after 1996 the garage door opener may have a rolling code system A rolling code system changes the code of the garage door opener every time you open or close the garage door To determine if you have this system press the button on the HomeLink Transmitter that you have programmed already If the indicator light flashes rapidly for one to two seconds then turns solid the garage door opener has a rolling code system In a rolling code system the garage door motor head unit must be trained to the HomeLink Transmitter Training a Garage Door Opener with a Rolling Code Feature If Equipped If you have not previously programmed the hand held transmitter to the HomeLink Transmitter see Programming the Transmitter listed previously If you have completed this programming already you now need to train the garage door opener motor head unit to recognize the HomeLink Transmitter Refer to your garage door opener
144. eners parts can later break or fall off You could be hurt Adding Equipment to the Outside of Your Vehicle Things you might add to the outside of your vehicle can affect the airflow around it This may cause wind noise and affect windshield washer performance Check with your dealer before adding equipment to the outside of your vehicle Fuel Use regular unleaded gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher It is recommended that the gasoline meet specifications which have been developed by the American Automobile Manufacturers Association AAMA and endorsed by the Canadian Motor Vehicle Manufacturers Association for better vehicle performance and engine protection Gasolines meeting the AAMA specification could provide improved driveability and emission control system performance compared to other gasolines Be sure the posted octane is at least 87 If the octane is less than 87 you may get a heavy knocking noise when you drive If it s bad enough it can damage your engine If you re using fuel rated at 87 octane or higher and you hear heavy knocking your engine needs service But don t worry if you hear a little pinging noise when you re accelerating or driving up a hill That s normal and you don t have to buy a higher octane fuel to get rid of pinging It s the heavy constant knock that means you have a problem If your vehicle is certified to meet California Emission Standards indicated on the underhood em
145. engine Turning the radiator pressure cap when the engine and radiator are hot can allow steam and Occasionally check the coolant level in the radiator For information on how to add coolant to the radiator see Cooling System in the Index scalding liquids to blow out and burn you badly With the coolant recovery tank you will almost never have to add coolant at the radiator Never turn the radiator pressure cap even a little when the engine and radiator are hot Add coolant mixture at the recovery tank but be careful not to spill it 6 27 NOTICE Your radiator cap is a 15 psi 105 kPa pressure type cap and must be tightly installed to prevent coolant loss and possible engine damage from overheating Be sure the arrows on the cap line up with the overflow tube on the radiator filler neck It is not necessary to regularly check power steering fluid unless you suspect there is a leak in the system or you hear an unusual noise A fluid loss in this system could indicate a problem Have the system inspected and repaired How to Check Power Steering Fluid Turn the key off let the engine compartment cool down wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean then unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with a clean rag Replace the cap and completely tighten it Then remove the cap again and look at the fluid level on the dipstick The level should be between the ADD and FULL marks If necessary add
146. ent Then rinse the blade with water Check the wiper blades and clean them as necessary replace blades that look worn Weatherstrips Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last longer seal better and not stick or squeak Apply silicone grease with a clean cloth at least every six months During very cold damp weather more frequent application may be required See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants in the Index 6 53 Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle The paint finish on your vehicle provides beauty depth of color gloss retention and durability Washing Your Vehicle The best way to preserve your vehicle s finish is to keep it clean by washing it often with lukewarm or cold water Don t wash your vehicle in the direct rays of the sun Use a car washing soap Don t use strong soaps or chemical detergents Be sure to rinse the vehicle well removing all soap residue completely You can get GM approved cleaning products from your dealer See Appearance Care and Materials in the Index Don t use cleaning agents that are petroleum based or that contain acid or abrasives All cleaning agents should be flushed promptly and not allowed to dry on the surface or they could stain Dry the finish with a soft clean chamois or an all cotton towel to avoid surface scratches and water spotting High pressure car washes may cause water to enter your vehicle 6 54 Cleaning Exterior Lamps Lense
147. entry transmitter If there is a third driver use the seat adjuster switch to adjust the seat Pressing any of the seat adjuster switches the SET button or pressing the desired memory button twice will cause the seat to stop moving If you push the numbered button to adjust the seat and start the vehicle while the seat is still adjusting adjustment will pause while the ignition is in START Adjustment will resume after the ignition is in RUN i If you have this feature the control is located on the side of the seat This feature will quickly heat the lower cushion and lower back of the driver and front passenger seats for added comfort Press the lower part of the switch to turn the heater on low Press the upper part of the switch to turn the heater on high Put the switch in the center position to turn the heater off The passenger s safety belt must be engaged for the heated seat feature to work on the passenger s seat To adjust the seatback lift the lever on the outer side of the seat Release the lever to lock the seatback where you want it Pull up on the lever and the seat will go to an upright position Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle is in motion can be dangerous Even if you buckle up your safety belts can t do their job when you re reclined like this The shoulder belt can t do its job because it won t be against your body Instead it will be in front of you In a cra
148. er Not necessarily Passing another vehicle on a two lane highway is a potentially dangerous move since the passing vehicle occupies the same lane as oncoming traffic for several seconds A miscalculation an error in judgment or a brief surrender to frustration or anger can suddenly put the passing driver face to face with the worst of all traffic accidents the head on collision So here are some tips for passing Drive ahead Look down the road to the sides and to crossroads for situations that might affect your passing patterns If you have any doubt whatsoever about making a successful pass wait for a better time Watch for traffic signs pavement markings and lines If you can see a sign up ahead that might indicate a turn or an intersection delay your pass A broken center line usually indicates it s all right to pass providing the road ahead is clear Never cross a solid line on your side of the lane or a double solid line even if the road seems empty of approaching traffic 4 13 Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to pass while you re awaiting an opportunity For one thing following too closely reduces your area of vision especially if you re following a larger vehicle Also you won t have adequate space if the vehicle ahead suddenly slows or stops Keep back a reasonable distance When it looks like a chance to pass is coming up start to accelerate but stay in the right lane an
149. er doesn t protect you from things beyond your control such as bad drivers Most accidents occur within 25 miles 40 km of home And the greatest number of serious injuries and deaths occur at speeds of less than 40 mph 65 km h Safety belts are for everyone 1 16 How to Wear Safety Belts Properly Adults This part is only for people of adult size Be aware that there are special things to know about safety belts and children And there are different rules for smaller children and babies If a child will be riding in your vehicle see the part of this manual called Children Follow those rules for everyone s protection First you ll want to know which restraint systems your vehicle has We ll start with the driver position Driver Position This part describes the driver s restraint system Lap Shoulder Belt The driver has a lap shoulder belt Here s how to wear it properly 1 Close and lock the door 2 Adjust the seat to see how see Seats in the Index so you can sit up straight Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure If the belt isn t long enough see Safety Belt Extender at the end of this section Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to 3 Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you Don t let it get twisted The shoulder belt may lock if
150. er will weigh more than 2 000 Ibs 900 kg You can ask a hitch dealer about sway controls Don t tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles 800 km your new vehicle is driven Your engine axle or other parts could be damaged Then during the first 500 miles 800 km that you tow a trailer don t drive over 50 mph 80 km h and don t make starts at full throttle This helps your engine and other parts of your vehicle wear in at the heavier loads If you have an automatic transmission you can use THIRD 3 or as you need to a lower gear when towing a trailer Operating your vehicle in THIRD 3 when towing a trailer will minimize heat buildup and extend the life of your transmission If you have a manual transmission and you are towing a trailer it s better not to use FIFTH 5 gear Just drive in FOURTH 4 gear or as you need to a lower gear See Tow Haul Mode in the Index Three important considerations have to do with weight the weight of the trailer the weight of the trailer tongue and the weight on your vehicle s tires 4 49 Tow Haul Mode V6 Engine Automatic Transmission Equipped Models If Equipped The Tow Haul Mode is a feature that assists when pulling a heavy trailer The purpose of the Tow Haul Mode is Reduce the frequency of shifts when pulling a heavy trailer Provide the same shift feel when pulling a heavy trailer as when the vehicle is unloaded Reduce
151. er drive through water that is slightly lower than the underbody of your vehicle If you can t avoid deep puddles or standing water drive through them very slowly 4 33 Driving Through Flowing Water Flowing or rushing water creates strong forces If you try to drive through flowing water as you might at a low water crossing your vehicle can be carried away As little as six inches of flowing water can carry away a smaller vehicle If this happens you and the other vehicle occupants could drown Don t ignore police warning signs and otherwise be very cautious about trying to drive through flowing water Some Other Rainy Weather Tips Besides slowing down allow some extra following distance And be especially careful when you pass another vehicle Allow yourself more clear room ahead and be prepared to have your view restricted by road spray Have good tires with proper tread depth See Tires in the Index 4 34 City Driving One of the biggest problems with city streets is the amount of traffic on them You ll want to watch out for what the other drivers are doing and pay attention to traffic signals Here are ways to increase your safety in city driving Know the best way to get to where you are going Get a city map and plan your trip into an unknown part of the city just as you would for a cross country trip Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscross most large cities Y
152. es meet the road Adding the sudden acceleration can demand too much of those places You can lose control What should you do if this ever happens Ease up on the accelerator pedal steer the vehicle the way you want it to go and slow down Speed limit signs near curves warn that you should adjust your speed Of course the posted speeds are based on good weather and road conditions Under less favorable conditions you ll want to go slower If you need to reduce your speed as you approach a curve do it before you enter the curve while your front wheels are straight ahead Try to adjust your speed so you can drive through the curve Maintain a reasonable steady speed Wait to accelerate until you are out of the curve and then accelerate gently into the straightaway 4 11 Steering in Emergencies There are times when steering can be more effective than braking For example you come over a hill and find a truck stopped in your lane or a car suddenly pulls out from nowhere or a child darts out from between parked cars and stops right in front of you You can avoid these problems by braking if you can stop in time But sometimes you can t there isn t room That s the time for evasive action steering around the problem Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like these First apply your brakes See Braking in Emergencies earlier in this section It is better to remove as much speed as
153. est No one can see as well at night as in the daytime But as we get older these differences increase A 50 year old driver may require at least twice as much light to see the Night driving is more dangerous than day driving One same thing at night as a 20 year old reason is that some drivers are likely to be impaired by alcohol or drugs with night vision problems or by fatigue What you do in the daytime can also affect your night vision For example if you spend the day in bright sunshine you are wise to wear sunglasses Your eyes will have less trouble adjusting to night But if you re driving don t wear sunglasses at night 4 30 They may cut down on glare from headlamps but they also make a lot of things invisible You can be temporarily blinded by approaching headlamps It can take a second or two or even several seconds for your eyes to readjust to the dark When you are faced with severe glare as from a driver who doesn t lower the high beams or a vehicle with misaimed headlamps slow down a little Avoid staring directly into the approaching headlamps Keep your windshield and all the glass on your vehicle clean inside and out Glare at night is made much worse by dirt on the glass Even the inside of the glass can build up a film caused by dust Dirty glass makes lights dazzle and flash more than clean glass would making the pupils of your eyes contract
154. evel and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote 27 000 Miles 45 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service See footnote Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote Lubricate chassis components or every 3 months whichever occurs first Lubricate chassis components or every 3 months whichever occurs first DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY 7 13 Short Trip City Scheduled Maintenance 30 000 Miles 50 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY Lubricate chassis components or every 3 months whichever occurs first See footnote Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote Replace fuel filter An Emission Control Service See footnote Replace engine air cleaner filter An Emission Control Service Change automatic transmission fluid and
155. fan control toward high Rear Window Defogger If Equipped If your vehicle has this option the rear window will have lines that warm the glass For best results clear the window of as much snow or ice as possible before using the rear window defogger To turn on the rear window defogger find the button marked REAR with the defog symbol on the lower right corner of your climate control system Press the button until the light in the button comes on then release it It will only work if the ignition switch is turned to RUN Pressing the REAR button on your climate control system will also activate your heated outside mirrors if equipped This will help to keep ice and snow from collecting on your mirror surfaces The rear window defogger will stay on for five to seven minutes then turn off If you need additional warming time turn it on again You can turn the defogger off at any time by pressing the button Do not attach a temporary vehicle license tape or decals across the defogger grid on the rear window NOTICE Don t use a razor blade or something else sharp on the inside of the rear window If you do you could cut or damage the warming grid and the repairs wouldn t be covered by your warranty Ventilation System For mild outside temperatures when little heating or cooling is needed use VENT to direct outside air through your vehicle Airflow is through the instrument panel outlets Your veh
156. filter if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these conditions Inheavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90 F 32 C or higher In hilly or mountainous terrain When doing frequent trailer towing Uses such as found in taxi police or delivery service If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions change the fluid and filter every 50 000 miles 83 000 km Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote 7 14 Short Trip City Scheduled Maintenance 33 000 Miles 55 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service See footnote Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote 36 000 Miles 60 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service See footnote Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote Lubricate chassis components or every 3 months
157. formed after 100 000 miles 166 000 km at the same intervals The services shown at 150 000 miles 240 000 km should be performed at the same interval after 150 000 miles 240 000 km See Owner Checks and Services and Periodic Maintenance Inspections following Footnotes The U S Environmental Protection Agency or the California Air Resources Board has determined that the failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to the completion of the vehicle s useful life We however urge that all recommended maintenance services be performed at the indicated intervals and the maintenance be recorded 7 8 Lubricate the front suspension ball joints steering linkage parking brake cable guides propshaft splines universal joints and brake pedal springs A good time to check your brakes is during tire rotation See Brake System Inspection under Periodic Maintenance Inspections in Part C of this schedule Drive axle service see Recommended Fluids and Lubricants in the Index for proper lubricant to use Check fluid level and add fluid as needed If driving in dusty areas or when towing a trailer drain fluid and refill every 15 000 miles 25 000 km If your vehicle has a locking differential drain fluid and refill at first engine oil change More frequent lubrication may be required for heavy duty or off road use S
158. from its stored position Turn the control clockwise to adjust sound to the right speakers and counterclockwise to adjust sound to the left speakers The middle position balances the sound between the speakers FADE Press lightly on this knob to release it from its stored position Turn the control clockwise to adjust the sound to the front speakers and counterclockwise for the rear speakers The middle position balances the sound between the speakers Push these knobs back into their stored positions when you re not using them Playing a Compact Disc PWR Press this knob to turn the system on You can also turn the system on when you insert a compact disc into the player with the ignition on Insert a disc partway into the slot label side up The player will pull it in Wait a few seconds and the disc should play The letters CD and a CD symbol will appear on the display Anytime you are playing a CD the letters CD will be next to the CD symbol If the disc comes back out and ERR appears on the display it could be that You are driving on a very rough road The disc should play when the road gets smoother The disc is upside down It is dirty scratched or wet Itis very humid If so wait about an hour and try again The disc player is very hot Press RECALL to make ERR go off the display PREV 1 Press PREV or the SEEK left arrow to search for the previous selection If you hold this button or pres
159. ft of the instrument panel and visible through the windshield Dealership name and location Vehicle delivery date and present mileage When contacting GMC please remember that your concern will likely be resolved at a dealer s facility That is why we suggest you follow Step One first if you have a concern STEP THREE Both General Motors and your dealer are committed to making sure you are completely satisfied with your new vehicle However if you continue to remain unsatisfied after following the procedure outlined in Steps One and Two file with the GM BBB Auto Line Program to enforce any additional rights you may have Canadian owners refer to your Warranty and Owner Assistance Information booklet for information on the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan CAMVAP The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court program administered by the Council of Better Business Bureaus to settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle repairs or the interpretation of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Although you are required to resort to this informal dispute resolution program prior to filing any court action use of the program is free of charge and your case will generally be heard within 40 days If you do not agree with the decision given in your case you may reject it and proceed with any other venue for relief available to you You may contact the BBB using the toll free telephone number or write them at the following address
160. gages shows there may be a problem check the section that tells you what to do about it Please follow this manual s advice Waiting to do repairs can be costly and even dangerous So please get to know your warning lights and gages They re a big help Safety Belt Reminder Light When the key is turned to RUN or START a chime will come on for about eight seconds to remind people to fasten their safety belts unless the driver s safety belt is already buckled The safety belt light will also come on and stay on for about 20 seconds then it will flash for about 55 seconds If the driver s belt is already buckled neither the chime nor the light will come on 2 77 Air Bag Readiness Light There is an air bag readiness light on the instrument panel which shows the air bag symbol The system checks the air bag s electrical system for malfunctions The light tells you if there is an electrical problem The system check includes the air bag sensors the air bag modules the wiring and the crash sensing and diagnostic module For more information on the air bag system see Air Bag in the Index This light will come on when you start your vehicle and it will flash for a few seconds Then the light should go out This means the system is ready If the air bag readiness light stays on after you start the vehicle or comes on when you are driving your air bag system may not work properly Have your vehicl
161. gh space between your vehicle and others is important And of course actual stopping distances vary greatly with the surface of the road whether it s pavement or gravel the condition of the road wet dry icy tire tread the condition of your brakes the weight of the vehicle and the amount of brake force applied Avoid needless heavy braking Some people drive in spurts heavy acceleration followed by heavy braking rather than keeping pace with traffic This is a mistake Your brakes may not have time to cool between hard stops Your brakes will wear out much faster if you do a lot of heavy braking If you keep pace with the traffic and allow realistic following distances you will eliminate a lot of unnecessary braking That means better braking and longer brake life If your engine ever stops while you re driving brake normally but don t pump your brakes If you do the pedal may get harder to push down If your engine stops you will still have some power brake assist But you will use it when you brake Once the power assist is used up it may take longer to stop and the brake pedal will be harder to push Anti Lock Brakes ABS Your vehicle has anti lock brakes ABS ABS is an advanced electronic braking system that will help prevent a braking skid When you start your engine and begin to drive away your anti lock brake system will check itself You may hear a momentary motor or clicking noise while this te
162. he United States or kilometers used in Canada The odometer mileage can be checked without the vehicle running Simply press the trip odometer button You may wonder what happens if your vehicle needs a new odometer installed If the new one can be set to the mileage total of the old odometer then it must be But if it can t then it s set at zero and a label must be put on the driver s door to show the old mileage reading when the new odometer was installed Trip Odometer The trip odometer can tell you how far your vehicle has been driven since you last set the trip odometer to zero To view the trip odometer press the button near the readout To reset the trip odometer hold the button until it resets 2 76 Tachometer If Equipped The tachometer displays the engine speed in revolutions per minute rpm Each tachometer has a different limit depending on the powertrain in your vehicle The tachometer has three areas normal operating range red warning range and red danger range The normal operating range shows your engine speed during normal driving conditions For example when the needle points to 2 it means the engine is running at 2 000 revolutions per minute rpm The tachometer needle will vary all the time that the engine is running The shaded red warning range tells you that your engine speed is reaching its upper limits Don t drive very long with the tachometer in the red warning range If you
163. heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No 109 Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law Warning The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded Excessive speed underinflation or excessive loading either separately or in combination can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure 6 47 Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance The wheels on your vehicle were aligned and balanced carefully at the factory to give you the longest tire life and best overall performance Scheduled wheel alignment and wheel balancing are not needed However if you notice unusual tire wear or your vehicle pulling one way or the other the alignment may need to be reset If you notice your vehicle vibrating when driving on a smooth road your wheels may need to be rebalanced Wheel Replacement Replace any wheel that is bent cracked or badly rusted or corroded If wheel nuts keep coming loose the wheel wheel bolts and wheel nuts should be replaced
164. heel nut caps may attach your hub cap to the wheel Remove these wheel nut caps before you take off 2 Turn the jack handle clockwise to raise the jack the hub cap lift head 3 Fit the jack into the appropriate hole nearest the flat tire A Front Frame Hole B Rear Frame Hole 2 Door or Spring Hanger Hole 4 Door 5 24 Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is dangerous If the vehicle slips off the jack you could be badly injured or killed Never get under a vehicle when it is supported only by a jack Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly positioned can damage the vehicle and even make the vehicle fall To help avoid personal injury and vehicle damage be sure to fit the jack lift head into the proper location before raising the vehicle 4 Raise the vehicle by turning the jack handle clockwise Raise the vehicle far enough off the ground so there is enough room for the spare tire to fit 5 Remove all the wheel nuts and take off the flat tire Remove any rust or dirt from the wheel bolts mounting surfaces and spare wheel Rust or dirt on the wheel or on the parts to which it is fastened can make the wheel nuts become loose after a time The wheel could come off and cause an accident When you change a wheel remove any rust or dirt from the places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle In an emergency you can use a cloth or a paper towel to do this but be sure
165. hen the engine starts let go of the key The idle speed will go down as your engine gets warm NOTICE Holding your key in START for longer than 15 seconds at a time will cause your battery to be drained much sooner And the excessive heat can damage your starter motor Wait about 15 seconds between each try to help avoid draining your battery or damaging your starter If it doesn t start right away hold your key in START If it doesn t start in 10 seconds push the accelerator pedal all the way down for five more seconds unless it starts sooner If your engine still won t start or starts but then stops wait 15 seconds and start over When the engine starts let go of the key and the accelerator pedal NOTICE Your engine is designed to work with the electronics in your vehicle If you add electrical parts or accessories you could change the way the engine operates Before adding electrical equipment check with your dealer If you don t your engine might not perform properly If you ever have to have your vehicle towed see the part of this manual that tells how to do it without damaging your vehicle See Towing Your Vehicle in the Index 2 19 Engine Coolant Heater If Equipped In very cold weather 0 F 18 C or colder the engine coolant heater can help You ll get easier starting and better fuel economy during engine warm up Usually the coolant heater should be plugged i
166. her wood acrylics Plexiglas plastic rubber and vinyl 1052925 16 oz 0 473 L Multi Purpose Interior Cleans carpets seats interior trim door panels Cleaner and floor mats See your General Motors Parts Department for these products For exterior use only See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants in the Index Not recommended for use on instrument panels 6 57 Vehicle Identification Number VIN SAMPLE4UXYM072675 au ee ASSEMBLY CODE MODEL YEAR PLANT This is the legal identifier for your vehicle It appears on a plate in the front corner of the instrument panel on the driver s side You can see it if you look through the windshield from outside your vehicle The VIN also appears on the Vehicle Certification and Service Parts labels and the certificates of title and registration Engine Identification The 8th character in your VIN is the engine code This code will help you identify your engine specifications and replacement parts 6 58 Service Parts Identification Label You ll find this label on the inside of the glove box It s very helpful if you ever need to order parts On this label is your VIN the model designation paint information and a list of all production options and special equipment Be sure that this label is not removed from the vehicle Electrical System Add On Electrical Equipment NOTICE Don t add anything electrical to your vehicle unless you check
167. here it stopped EJECT Press this button to remove the tape The radio will now play EJECT can be used with either the ignition or radio off To load a cassette tape with the ignition or radio off press EJECT before loading the cassette CLN If this message appears on the display the cassette tape player needs to be cleaned It will still play tapes but you should clean it as soon as possible to prevent damage to the tapes and player See Care of Your Cassette Tape Player in the Index After you clean the player press and hold EJECT for five seconds to reset the CLN indicator The radio will display to show the indicator was reset 3 24 CD Adapter Kits It is possible to use a portable CD player adapter kit with your cassette tape player after activating the bypass feature on your tape player To activate the bypass feature use the following steps 1 Turn the ignition to RUN or ACCESSORY 2 Turn the radio off 3 Press and hold the TAPE AUX button for five seconds The tape symbol on the display will flash for two seconds indicating the feature is active 4 Insert the adapter into the cassette slot It will power up the radio and begin playing This override routine will remain active until EJECT is pressed AM FM Stereo with Compact Disc Player and Automatic Tone Control If Equipped Playing the Radio PWR VOL Press this knob to turn the system on and off To increase volume turn this knob c
168. hers Your hazard warning flashers let you warn others They also let police know you have a problem Your front and rear turn signal lamps will flash on and off Press the button on top of the steering column all the way down to make your front and rear turn signal lamps flash on and off Your hazard warning flashers work no matter what position your key is in and even if the key isn t in To turn off the flashers press the button until the first click and release When the hazard warning flashers are on your turn signals won t work Other Warning Devices If you carry reflective triangles you can set one up at the side of the road about 300 feet 100 m behind your vehicle Jump Starting If your battery has run down you may want to use another vehicle and some jumper cables to start your vehicle But please use the following steps to do it safely Batteries can hurt you They can be dangerous because They contain acid that can burn you They contain gas that can explode or ignite They contain enough electricity to burn you If you don t follow these steps exactly some or all of these things can hurt you NOTICE Ignoring these steps could result in costly damage to your vehicle that wouldn t be covered by your warranty The ACDelco battery in your vehicle has a built in hydrometer Do not charge test or jump start the battery if the hydrometer looks clear or light yello
169. hese switches to shift into and out of four wheel drive You can choose among three driving settings 2HI This setting is for driving in most street and highway situations Your front axle is not engaged in two wheel drive When this lamp is lit it is about one half as bright as the others 4HI This setting engages your front axle to help drive your vehicle Use 4HI when you need extra traction such as on snowy or icy roads or in most off road situations qj right of the steering wheel 4LO This setting also engages your front axle to give you extra traction You may never need 4LO It sends the maximum power to all four wheels You might choose 4LO if you were driving off road in sand mud or deep snow and climbing or descending steep hills Indicator lights in the switches show you which setting you are in The indicator lights will come on briefly when you turn on the ignition and one will stay on If the lights do not come on you should take your vehicle in for service An indicator light will flash while shifting It will remain illuminated when the shift is completed Shifting from 2HI to 4HI Press and release the 4HI switch This can be done at any speed and the front axle will lock automatically Shifting from 4HI to 2HI Press and release the 2HI switch This can be done at any speed and the front axle will unlock automatically 2 27 Shifting from 2HI or 4HI to 4LO To shift from 2HI or 4HI to 4LO the ve
170. hicle must be stopped or moving less than 3 mph 4 8 km h with the transmission in NEUTRAL N in vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission or the clutch pedal engaged in vehicles equipped with a manual transmission The preferred method for shifting into 4LO is to have your vehicle moving 1 to 2 mph 1 6 to 3 2 km h Press and release the 4LO switch You must wait for the 4LO indicator light to stop flashing and remain illuminated before shifting your transmission into gear or releasing the clutch pedal If the 4LO switch is pressed when your vehicle is in gear and or moving the 4LO indicator light will flash for 30 seconds and not complete the shift unless your vehicle is moving slower than 3 mph 4 8 km h and the transmission is in NEUTRAL N or the clutch pedal engaged On automatic transmission equipped vehicles if your transfer case does not shift into 4LO your transmission indicator switch may require adjustment With your transmission in NEUTRAL N press and release the 4LO switch While the 4LO indicator light is flashing shift your transmission into PARK P Wait until the 4LO indicator light remains illuminated before shifting your transmission into gear This will get you into 4LO but you should take your vehicle in for service to restore normal operation 2 28 Shifting from 4LO to 4HI or 2HI To shift from 4LO to 4HI or 2HI your vehicle must be stopped or moving less than 3 mph 4 8 km h with the transm
171. hings you need to know in order to help your vehicle pass an inspection Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the SERVICE ENGINE SOON light is on or not working properly Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the OBD on board diagnostic system determines that critical emission control systems have not been completely diagnosed by the system The vehicle would be considered not ready for inspection This can happen if you have recently replaced your battery or if your battery has run down The diagnostic system is designed to evaluate critical emission control systems during normal driving This may take several days of routine driving If you have done this and your vehicle still does not pass the inspection for lack of OBD system readiness see your dealer or qualified service center to prepare the vehicle for inspection Oil Pressure Gage Canada United States The oil pressure gage shows the engine oil pressure in psi pounds per square inch when the engine is running Canadian vehicles indicate pressure in kPa kilopascals 2 85 Don t keep driving if the oil pressure is low If you do your engine can become so hot that it catches fire You or others could be burned Check your oil as soon as possible and have your vehicle serviced NOTICE Damage to your engine from neglected oil problems can be costly and is not covered by your warranty Oil pressure may vary with engine speed outside
172. hort Trip City Scheduled Maintenance 3 000 Miles 5 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service See footnote Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote 6 000 Miles 10 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service See footnote Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote Lubricate chassis components or every 3 months whichever occurs first Lubricate chassis components or every 3 months whichever occurs first DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY 7 9 Short Trip City Scheduled Maintenance 9 000 Miles 15 000 km a ooo Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service Lubricate chassis components or every 3 months whichever occurs first See footnote Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote 12 000 Mile
173. hort Trip City Scheduled Maintenance 96 000 Miles 160 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service See footnote Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote 99 000 Miles 165 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service See footnote Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote 7 28 Lubricate chassis components or every 3 months whichever occurs first Lubricate chassis components or every 3 months whichever occurs first DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY Short Trip City Scheduled Maintenance 100 000 Miles 166 000 km An Emission Control Service MILEAGE i Replace spark plugs Oooo o An Emission Control Service If you haven t used your vehicle under severe service conditions listed previously and therefore haven t changed your automatic transmission fluid change both the fluid and filter Manual transmission fluid doesn t requ
174. ht will show you when to shift to the next higher gear for best fuel economy 2 25 When this light comes on you can shift to the next Four Wheel Drive if Equipped higher gear if weather road and traffic conditions let you For the best fuel economy accelerate slowly and If your vehicle has four wheel drive you can send your shift when the light comes on engine s driving power to all four wheels for extra i traction To get the most satisfaction out of four wheel While you accelerate it is normal for the light to go on drive you must be familiar with its operation Read the and off if you quickly change the position of the part that follows before using four wheel drive You accelerator Ignore the SHIFT light when you downshift should use two wheel high 2HI for most normal driving conditions OTICE If you skip a gear when you downshift you could Driving in the 4HI or 4LO positions for a long time on dry or wet pavement could shorten the life of your vehicle s drivetrain lose control of your vehicle You could injure yourself or others Don t shift down more than one gear at a time when you downshift If your vehicle has four wheel drive and is equipped with a manual transmission disregard the SHIFT light when the transfer case is in 4LO 2 26 Electronic Transfer Case If Equipped If your four wheel drive vehicle has the electronic transfer case the transfer case switches are to the Use t
175. ication Order Form in this book and mailing it in with your check money order or credit card information to Helm Incorporated address below CURRENT PUBLICATIONS FOR 2000 GMC SERVICE MANUALS Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair information on engines transmission axle suspension brakes electrical steering body etc RETAIL SELL PRICE 120 00 TRANSMISSION TRANSAXLE TRANSFER CASE UNIT REPAIR MANUAL This manual provides information on unit repair service procedures adjustments and specifications for the 2000 GM transmissions transaxles and transfer cases RETAIL SELL PRICE 50 00 SERVICE BULLETINS Service Bulletins give technical service information needed to knowledgeably service General Motors cars and trucks Each bulletin contains instructions to assist in the diagnosis and service of your vehicle PLEASE COMPLETE THE ORDER FORM SHOWN ON THE FOLLOWING PAGE AND MAIL TO Helm Incorporated P O Box 07130 Detroit MI 48207 OWNER S INFORMATION Owner publications are written directly for Owners and intended to provide basic operational information about the vehicle The owner s manual will include the Maintenance Schedule for all models In Portfolio Includes a Portfolio Owner s Manual and Warranty Booklet RETAIL SELL PRICE 20 00 Without Portfolio Owner s Manual only RETAIL SELL PRICE 15 00 CURRENT amp PAST MODEL ORDER FORMS Service Publications are available for cu
176. icle Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to your vehicle make sure they are the proper ones as shown in Part D At Each Fuel Fill It is important for you or a service station attendant to perform these underhood checks at each fuel fill Engine Oil Level Check Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil if necessary See Engine Oil in the Index for further details Engine Coolant Level Check Check the engine coolant level and add DEX COOL coolant mixture if necessary See Engine Coolant in the Index for further details 7 42 Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check Check the windshield washer fluid level in the windshield washer tank and add the proper fluid if necessary See Windshield Washer Fluid in the Index for further details At Least Once a Month Tire Inflation Check Make sure tires are inflated to the correct pressures Don t forget to check your spare tire See Tires in the Index for further details Cassette Deck Service Clean cassette deck Cleaning should be done every 50 hours of tape play See Audio Systems in the Index for further details At Least Twice a Year Restraint System Check Make sure the safety belt reminder light and all your belts buckles latch plates retractors and anchorages are working properly Look for any other loose or damaged safety belt system parts If you see anything
177. icle s ventilation system supplies outside air to the inside of your vehicle when it is moving When the vehicle is not moving you can get outside air to flow through by selecting any mode and any fan speed You will find air outlets in the center and on the sides of your instrument panel You can direct the airflow side to side by rotating the thumbwheel located in the center of the vent The vent can be tilted up and down also To control the amount of airflow through the outlets rotate the thumbwheel below the vent Ventilation Tips Keep the hood and front air inlet free of ice snow or any other obstruction such as leaves The heater and defroster will work far better reducing the chance of fogging the inside of your windows When you enter a vehicle in cold weather move the fan control to high for a few moments before driving off This helps clear the intake ducts of snow and moisture and reduces the chance of fogging the inside of your windows Keep the air path under the front seats clear of objects This helps air to circulate throughout your vehicle Audio Systems Your audio system has been designed to operate easily and give years of listening pleasure You will get the most enjoyment out of it if you acquaint yourself with it first Find out what your audio system can do and how to operate all its controls to be sure you re getting the most out of the advanced engineering that went into it Your vehicl
178. icle before you can return to your lane Backing Up Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand Then to move the trailer to the left just move that hand to the left To move the trailer to the right move your hand to the right Always back up slowly and if possible have someone guide you Making Turns NOTICE Making very sharp turns while trailering could cause the trailer to come in contact with the vehicle Your vehicle could be damaged Avoid making very sharp turns while trailering When you re turning with a trailer make wider turns than normal Do this so your trailer won t strike soft shoulders curbs road signs trees or other objects Avoid jerky or sudden maneuvers Signal well in advance 4 55 Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer When you tow a trailer your vehicle has to have extra wiring and a heavy duty turn signal flasher included in the optional trailering package The arrows on your instrument panel will flash whenever you signal a turn or lane change Properly hooked up the trailer lamps will also flash telling other drivers you re about to turn change lanes or stop When towing a trailer the arrows on your instrument panel will flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailer are burned out Thus you may think drivers behind you are seeing your signal when they are not It s important to check occasionally to be sure the trailer bulbs are still working Driving On Grade
179. id and filter every 50 000 miles 83 000 km Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote Inspect engine accessory drive belt An Emission Control Service Replace fuel filter An Emission Control Service See footnote Replace engine air cleaner filter An Emission Control Service 7 36 ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY Long Trip Highway Scheduled Maintenance 67 500 Miles 112 500 km Le Change engine oil and filter or every 12 months whichever occurs first ACTUAL An Emission Control Service MILEAGE Lubricate chassis components or every 12 months whichever occurs first PF See footnote Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote 75 000 Miles 125 000 km pepe cesar apt a every 12 months whichever occurs first Lubricate chassis components or every 12 months whichever occurs first OOo S o See footnote Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote Continued
180. ight next to that button will flash three times to alert you that it s not available To find your comfort zone start with the 74 F 23 C setting and allow about 20 minutes for the system to adjust the temperature if necessary With the automatic setting the air conditioning compressor automatically cycles when needed to cool the air In cold weather when the system senses the need for heat the airflow will be directed out the floor outlets As the interior temperature approaches a desired setting the blower speed will decrease To maintain interior comfort the airflow will adjust between the instrument panel air outlets and floor outlets On bright sunny days in cool weather the airflow may come out of the air conditioning and floor outlets bi level mode to maintain comfort and prevent stuffiness To avoid blowing cold air in cold weather the system will delay turning on the fan until warm air is available The length of delay depends on the outside air temperature engine coolant temperature or the time since the engine was last started As the coolant warms up the blower fan speed will gradually increase and air will flow from the heater outlets with some airflow to the windshield to prevent fogging under most normal conditions If your vehicle is sitting out on a warm day and you have the fan set on AUTO the air will first flow out of the floor air outlets for a few seconds That is normal This is to expel hot air from
181. ill maintaining control of the vehicle There is an air bag readiness light on the instrument panel which shows the air bag symbol Anyone who is up against or very close to any The system checks the air bag electrical system for air bag when it inflates can be seriously injured malfunctions The light tells you if there is an electrical or killed Air bags plus lap shoulder belts offer problem See Air Bag Readiness Light in the Index the best protection for adults but not for young for more information children and infants CAUTION Continued 1 25 How the Air Bag System Works The right front passenger s air bag is in the instrument panel on the passenger s side Where are the air bags The driver s air bag is in the middle of the steering wheel 1 26 If something is between an occupant and an air bag the bag might not inflate properly or it might force the object into that person The path of an inflating air bag must be kept clear Don t put anything between an occupant and an air bag and don t attach or put anything on the steering wheel hub or on or near any other air bag covering When should an air bag inflate An air bag is designed to inflate in a moderate to severe frontal or near frontal crash The air bag will inflate only if the impact speed is above the system s designed threshold level If your vehicle goes straight into a wall that doesn t move or deform
182. important to have the correct hitch equipment Crosswinds large trucks going by and rough roads are a few reasons why you ll need the right hitch Here are some rules to follow If you ll be pulling a trailer that when loaded will weigh more than 3 500 Ibs 1 589 kg be sure to use a properly mounted weight distributing hitch and sway control of the proper size This equipment is very important for proper vehicle loading and good handling when you re driving Will you have to make any holes in the body of your vehicle when you install a trailer hitch If you do then be sure to seal the holes later when you remove the hitch If you don t seal them deadly carbon monoxide CO from your exhaust can get into your vehicle see Carbon Monoxide in the Index Dirt and water can too Safety Chains You should always attach chains between your vehicle and your trailer Cross the safety chains under the tongue of the trailer to help prevent the tongue from contacting the road if it becomes separated from the hitch Instructions about safety chains may be provided by the hitch manufacturer or by the trailer manufacturer Follow the manufacturer s recommendation for attaching safety chains and do not attach them to the bumper Always leave just enough slack so you can turn with your rig Never allow safety chains to drag on the ground Trailer Brakes If your trailer weighs more than 1 000 Ibs 450 kg loaded then it
183. ing and fall You should let your dealer s service department or other qualified service center do these jobs Make sure any necessary repairs are completed at once Proper procedures to perform these services may be found in a service manual See Service and Owner Publications in the Index Steering Suspension and Front Drive Axle Boot and Seal Inspection Inspect the front and rear suspension and steering system for damaged loose or missing parts signs of wear or lack of lubrication Inspect the power steering lines and hoses for proper hook up binding leaks cracks chafing etc Clean and then inspect the drive axle boot seals for damage tears or leakage Replace seals if necessary Exhaust System Inspection Inspect the complete exhaust system Inspect the body near the exhaust system Look for broken damaged missing or out of position parts as well as open seams holes loose connections or other conditions which could cause a heat build up in the floor pan or could let exhaust fumes into the vehicle See Engine Exhaust in the Index Engine Cooling System Inspection Inspect the hoses and have them replaced if they are cracked swollen or deteriorated Inspect all pipes fittings and clamps replace as needed Clean the outside of the radiator and air conditioning condenser To help ensure proper operation a pressure test of the cooling system and pressure cap is recommended at least once a year 7 47
184. ing trouble To avoid this everyone in the vehicle should get out as soon as it is safe to do so If you have breathing problems but can t get out of the vehicle after an air bag inflates then get fresh air by opening a window or door Air bags are designed to inflate only once After they inflate you ll need some new parts for your air bag system If you don t get them the air bag system won t be there to help protect you in another crash A new system will include air bag modules and possibly other parts The service manual for your vehicle covers the need to replace other parts Your vehicle is equipped with a diagnostic module which records information about the air bag system The module records information about the readiness of the system when the system commands air bag inflation and driver s safety belt usage at deployment Let only qualified technicians work on your air bag system Improper service can mean that your air bag system won t work properly See your dealer for service NOTICE If you damage the covering for the driver s or the right front passenger s air bag the bag may not work properly You may have to replace the air bag module in the steering wheel or both the air bag module and the instrument panel for the right front passenger s air bag Do not open or break the air bag coverings Servicing Your Air Bag Equipped Vehicle Air bags affect how your vehicle should be serviced
185. ings A good time to check your brakes is during tire rotation See Brake System Inspection under Periodic Maintenance Inspections in Part C of this schedule Drive axle service see Recommended Fluids and Lubricants in the Index for proper lubricant to use Check fluid level and add fluid as needed If your vehicle has a locking differential drain fluid and refill at first engine oil change Long Trip Highway Scheduled Maintenance 7 500 Miles 12 500 km C Change engine oil and filter or every 12 months whichever occurs first ACTUAL An Emission Control Service MILEAGE Lubricate chassis components or every 12 months whichever occurs first ooo See footnote Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote 15 000 Miles 25 000 km pepe eae Martie a every 12 months whichever occurs first Lubricate chassis components or every 12 months whichever occurs first OoOo S o See footnote Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote Continued 7 31 Long Trip Highway Scheduled Maintenance 15 000 Miles
186. into the lock Push the lock case to be sure it is secured The special lug nut and lock case is not intended to be used on any road wheel only on the spare wheel carrier Tighten the nuts on the wheel carrier to 22 to 32 lb ft 30 to 40 N m 5 30 Make sure the tire and carrier are secure Driving with the tire or carrier unlatched could injure pedestrians or damage the vehicle Return the jack wheel wrench and wheel blocks to the proper location in your vehicle s rear area Secure the items and replace the jack cover Retainer Rubber Band Some Models Work Gloves Mat Jack Storage Cover Wheel Blocks Hub Cap Removal Tool Some Models Wheel Wrench Jack Jacking Instructions Ser om moa we gt 5 31 If You re Stuck In Sand Mud Ice or Snow In order to free your vehicle when it is stuck you will need to spin the wheels but you don t want to spin your wheels too fast The method known as rocking can help you get out when you re stuck but you must use caution If you let your tires spin at high speed they can explode and you or others could be injured And the transmission or other parts of the vehicle can overheat That could cause an engine compartment fire or other damage When you re stuck spin the wheels as little as possible Don t spin the wheels above 35 mph 55 km h as shown on the speedometer 5 32 NOTICE Spinning your wheels can destroy pa
187. ion The sound will mute while searching for the next selection REV 4 Press this button to rapidly reverse the tape to the beginning of the cassette or until you press REV again The radio will play the last selected station while reversing the tape The tape direction arrow will blink during the reverse operation Dd 5 Press this button to reduce cassette tape noise The double D symbol will appear on the display while the player is in this mode Dolby Noise Reduction is manufactured under a license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation Dolby and the double D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation FWD 6 Press this button to rapidly forward the tape to the end of the cassette or until you press FWD again The radio will play the last selected station while forwarding the tape The tape direction arrow will blink during the forward operation AM FM Press this button to switch from a tape to the radio 3 23 CD TAPE Press this button if you have a tape loaded in the cassette tape player and the radio is turned on to play a tape Press AM FM to return to the radio when a tape is playing Press CD TAPE to switch between the tape player remote CD and console mounted CD changer if all are loaded When a tape is playing a lighted arrow will appear on the display and show the direction of play If the radio is turned off the tape stays in the player and will resume playing at the point w
188. ire the tire must be removed in order to have access to the jack storage To remove an inside mounted spare tire reach into your tire s cover and unscrew the wing nut at the center of the wheel Remove it and the retainer Unhook the tire from the mounting bracket and remove the cover To remove a rear mounted spare tire first make sure that the carrier arm is fully latched to the endgate Then remove the spare tire cover face of the lock case lock case straight off the key Put the spare tire near the flat tire The locking wheel nut can be removed by snapping the rubber weather cover off the Insert the key and pull the It is not necessary to turn 5 21 The tools you ll be using include the jack A and wheel wrench B Your vehicle may also have an optional hub cap removal tool 5 22 Position the chisel end of your wheel wrench or the hub cap removal tool if equipped in the notch of the hub cap and pry off the hub cap Some of the molded plastic hub caps have imitation wheel nuts molded into them The wheel wrench won t fit these imitation nuts so don t try to remove them with the socket end of the wheel wrench If you have individual wheel nut caps that cover each nut they must be removed in order to get to the wheel nuts Use the socket end of the wheel wrench to remove the wheel nut caps 1 Using the wheel wrench loosen all the wheel nuts Don t remove them yet Your w
189. ire change Inspect Positive Crankcase Ventilation PCV valve An Emission Control Service 150 000 Miles 240 000 km Drain flush and refill cooling system or every 60 months since last service whichever occurs first See Engine Coolant in the Index for what to use MILEAGE Inspect hoses Clean radiator condenser pressure cap and neck Pressure test PF cooling system and pressure cap An Emission Control Service SERVICED BY 7 29 Long Trip Highway Scheduled Maintenance The services shown in this schedule up to 100 000 miles 166 000 km should be performed after 100 000 miles 166 000 km at the same intervals The services shown at 150 000 miles 240 000 km should be performed at the same interval after 150 000 miles 240 000 km See Owner Checks and Services and Periodic Maintenance Inspections following Footnotes The U S Environmental Protection Agency or the California Air Resources Board has determined that the failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to the completion of the vehicle s useful life We however urge that all recommended maintenance services be performed at the indicated intervals and the maintenance be recorded 7 30 Lubricate the front suspension ball joints steering linkage parking brake cable guides propshaft splines universal joints and brake pedal spr
190. is will improve traction Hard packed snow and ice offer the worst tire traction On these surfaces it s very easy to lose control On wet ice for example the traction is so poor that you will have difficulty accelerating And if you do get moving poor steering and difficult braking can cause you to slide out of control Driving on frozen lakes ponds or rivers can be dangerous Underwater springs currents under the ice or sudden thaws can weaken the ice Your vehicle could fall through the ice and you and your passengers could drown Drive your vehicle on safe surfaces only 4 28 Driving in Water Light rain causes no special off road driving problems But heavy rain can mean flash flooding and flood waters demand extreme caution Find out how deep the water is before you drive through it If it s deep enough to cover your wheel hubs axles or exhaust pipe don t try it you probably won t get through Also water that deep can damage your axle and other vehicle parts If the water isn t too deep then drive through it slowly At fast speeds water splashes on your ignition system and your vehicle can stall Stalling can also occur if you get your tailpipe under water And as long as your tailpipe is under water you Il never be able to start your engine When you go through water remember that when your brakes get wet it may take you longer to stop Driving through rushing water can be dangerous
191. ission control label it is designed to operate on fuels that meet California specifications If such fuels are not available in states adopting California emissions standards your vehicle will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal specifications but emission control system performance may be affected The malfunction indicator lamp on your instrument panel may turn on and or your vehicle may fail a smog check test See Malfunction Indicator Lamp in the Index If this occurs return to your authorized GM dealer for diagnosis to determine the cause of failure In the event it is determined that the cause of the condition is the type of fuels used repairs may not be covered by your warranty Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low emissions may contain an octane enhancing additive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbony l MMT ask your service station operator whether or not the fuel contains MMT General Motors does not recommend the use of such gasolines If fuels containing MMT are used spark plug life may be reduced and your emission control system performance may be affected The malfunction indicator lamp on your instrument panel may turn on If this occurs return to your authorized GM dealer for service 6 4 To provide cleaner air all gasolines in the United States are now required to contain additives that will help prevent deposits from forming in your engine and fuel system allowing you
192. ission in NEUTRAL N or the clutch pedal engaged The preferred method for shifting out of 4LO is to have your vehicle moving 1 to 2 mph 1 6 to 3 2 km h Press and release the 4HI switch You must wait for the 4HI indicator light to stop flashing and remain illuminated before shifting your transmission into gear or releasing the clutch pedal If the 4HI switch is pressed when your vehicle is in gear and or moving the 4HI indicator light will flash for 30 seconds but not complete the shift unless the vehicle is moving slower than 3 mph 4 8 km h and the transmission is in NEUTRAL N or the clutch pedal engaged On automatic transmission equipped vehicles if your transfer case does not shift into 4HI your transmission indicator switch may require adjustment With your transmission in NEUTRAL N press and release the 4HI switch While the 4HI indicator light is flashing shift your transmission into PARK P Wait until the 4HI indicator light remains illuminated before shifting your transmission into gear This will get you into 4HI but you should take your vehicle in for service to restore normal operation Automatic Transfer Case If Equipped The transfer case switches are to the right of the steering wheel on the instrument panel Use these switches to shift into and out of four wheel drive You can choose among four driving settings Recommended Transfer Case Settings Transfer Case Settings AUTO Driving C
193. it by taking it to a place that collects used oil If you have a problem properly disposing of your used oil ask your dealer a service station or a local recycling center for help 6 15 Engine Air Cleaner Filter Operating the engine with the air cleaner filter off can cause you or others to be burned The air cleaner not only cleans the air it stops flame if the engine backfires If it isn t there and the engine backfires you could be burned Don t drive with it off and be careful working on the engine with the air cleaner filter off NOTICE 1 To remove the air cleaner remove the fasteners that If the air cleaner filter is off a backfire can cause hold the cover on a damaging engine fire And dirt can easily 2 Remove the cover and lift out the air filter get into your engine which will damage it Always have the air cleaner filter in place when 3 Insert a new air filter then replace the air sie you re driving cleaner cover 4 Tighten the fasteners to hold the cover in place 6 16 Automatic Transmission Fluid When to Check and Change A good time to check your automatic transmission fluid level is when the engine oil is changed Change both the fluid and filter every 15 000 miles 25 000 km if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these conditions Jn heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90 F 32 C or higher In hilly or mountainous terr
194. ith manual transmission 5 Shift the transmission lever to the desired position After the transfer case has shifted out of NEUTRAL the red light will go out 6 A re engagement sound is normal when shifting out of NEUTRAL Parking Brake To set the parking brake hold the regular brake pedal down with your right foot Push down the parking brake pedal with your left foot If the ignition is on the brake system warning light will come on To release the parking brake hold the regular brake pedal down BRAKE RELEASE Pull the BRAKE RELEASE lever fully It is located on the bottom of the driver s side of the instrument panel NOTICE Driving with the parking brake on can cause your rear brakes to overheat You may have to replace them and you could also damage other parts of your vehicle If you are towing a trailer and you must park on a hill see Towing a Trailer in the Index That section shows what to do first to keep the trailer from moving 2 33 Shifting Into PARK P Automatic Transmission Only It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in PARK P with the parking brake firmly set Your vehicle can roll If you have left the engine running the vehicle can move suddenly You or others could be injured To be sure your vehicle won t move even when you re on fairly level ground use the steps that follow With four wheel drive your vehicle will be f
195. ive vehicles However they have two additional systems that need lubrication Transfer Case When to Check Lubricant Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how often to check the lubricant See Periodic Maintenance Inspections in the Index How to Check Lubricant If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole you ll need to add some lubricant Add enough lubricant to raise the level to the bottom of the filler plug hole Use care not to overtighten plug What to Use Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what kind of lubricant to use See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants in the Index 6 23 Front Axle When to Check and Change Lubricant Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how often to check the lubricant and when to change it See Scheduled Maintenance Services in the Index How to Check Lubricant If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole you may need to add some lubricant 6 24 When the differential is cold add enough lubricant to raise the level to 1 2 inch 12 mm below the filler plug hole When the differential is at operating temperature warm add enough lubricant to raise the level to the bottom of the filler plug hole What to Use Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what kind of lubricant to use See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants in the Index Engine Coolant The cooling system in your vehicle
196. jects Secure the cargo properly Heavy loads on the roof raise the vehicle s center of gravity making it more likely to roll over You can be seriously or fatally injured if the vehicle rolls over Put heavy loads inside the cargo area not on the roof Keep cargo in the cargo area as far forward and low as possible You ll find other important information in this manual See Vehicle Loading Luggage Carrier and Tires in the Index Environmental Concerns Off road driving can provide wholesome and satisfying recreation However it also raises environmental concerns GM recognizes these concerns and urges every off roader to follow these basic rules for protecting the environment Always use established trails roads and areas that have been specially set aside for public off road recreational driving obey all posted regulations Avoid any driving practice that could damage the environment shrubs flowers trees grasses or disturb wildlife this includes wheel spinning breaking down trees or unnecessary driving through streams or over soft ground Always carry a litter bag make sure all refuse is removed from any campsite before leaving Take extreme care with open fires where permitted camp stoves and lanterns Never park your vehicle over dry grass or other combustible materials that could catch fire from the heat of the vehicle s exhaust system 4 17 Traveling to Remote
197. k See Fuel in the Index 2 89 Section 3 Comfort Controls and Audio Systems In this section you ll find out how to operate the comfort control and audio systems offered with your vehicle Be sure to read about the particular systems supplied with your vehicle 3 2 Comfort Controls 3 15 AM FM Stereo with Cassette Tape Player and 3 2 Standard Climate Control System Automatic Tone Control If Equipped 3 3 Electronic Climate Control System 3 20 AM FM Stereo with Cassette Tape Player If Equipped Bose If Equipped 3 7 Air Conditioning 3 25 AM FM Stereo with Compact Disc Player and 3 7 Heating Automatic Tone Control If Equipped 3 7 Defogging and Defrosting 3 29 AM FM Stereo with Compact Disc Player 3 8 Rear Window Defogger If Equipped Bose If Equipped 3 8 Ventilation System 3 33 Remote Cassette Tape Player If Equipped 3 10 Audio Systems 3 34 Console Mounted CD Changer If Equipped 3 10 Setting the Clock for Systems with 3 38 Theft Deterrent Feature If Equipped SET Button 3 40 Audio Steering Wheel Controls If Equipped 3 10 Setting the Clock for Systems with HR and 3 41 Understanding Radio Reception MN Buttons 3 41 Tips About Your Audio System 3 11 AM FM Stereo 3 42 Care of Your Cassette Tape Player 13 AM FM Stereo with Cassette Tape Player 3 44 Care of Your Compact Discs If Equipped 3 44 Care of Your Compact Disc Player 3 44 Fixed Mast Antenna Comfort Controls With this system you can control the heating
198. k the door with the manual door lock and open the door This should set off the alarm If the alarm does not sound when it should but the vehicle s headlamps flash check to see if the horn works The horn fuse may be blown To replace the fuse see Fuses and Circuit Breakers in the Index If the alarm does not sound or the vehicle s headlamps do not flash the vehicle should be serviced by an authorized service center Passlock Your vehicle is equipped with the Passlock theft deterrent system Passlock is a passive theft deterrent system Passlock enables fuel if the ignition lock cylinder is turned with a valid key If a correct key is not used or the ignition lock cylinder is tampered with fuel is disabled During normal operation the SECURITY light will go off approximately five seconds after the key is turned to the RUN ignition position If the engine stalls and the SECURITY light flashes wait about 10 minutes until the light stops flashing before trying to restart the engine Remember to release the key from START as soon as the engine starts If the engine does not start after three 3 tries the vehicle needs service If the engine is running and the SECURITY light comes on you will be able to restart the engine if you turn the engine off However your Passlock system is not working properly and must be serviced by your dealer Your vehicle is not protected by Passlock at this time You may also want
199. ke up for road and wind noise as you drive Set the volume at the desired level Turn the control ring behind the upper knob clockwise to adjust the SCV Then as you drive SCV automatically increases the volume as necessary to overcome noise at any particular speed The volume level should always sound the same to you as you drive If you don t want to use SCV turn the control all the way down Each notch on the control ring allows for more volume compensation at faster vehicle speeds Finding a Station AM FM Press this button to switch between AM FM1 and FM2 The display will show your selection TUNE Press this knob lightly so it extends Turn it to choose radio stations Push the knob back into its stored position when you re not using it 3 29 SEEK Press the right arrow to tune to the next higher station and the left arrow to tune to the next lower station and stay there The sound will mute while seeking SCAN Press and hold SEEK for two seconds until SCAN appears on the display SCAN allows you to listen to stations for a few seconds The receiver will continue to scan and momentarily stop at each station until you press the button again The sound will mute while scanning PUSHBUTTONS The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to your favorite stations You can set up to 18 stations six AM six FM1 and six FM2 Just 1 Turn the radio on 2 Press AM FM to select the band 3 Tune in the desired statio
200. l claiming thousands of victims every year Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive a vehicle Judgment Muscular Coordination Vision Attentiveness Police records show that almost half of all motor vehicle related deaths involve alcohol In most cases these deaths are the result of someone who was drinking and driving In recent years over 17 000 annual motor vehicle related deaths have been associated with the use of alcohol with more than 300 000 people injured Many adults by some estimates nearly half the adult population choose never to drink alcohol so they never drive after drinking For persons under 21 it s against the law in every U S state to drink alcohol There are good medical psychological and developmental reasons for these laws The obvious way to solve the leading highway safety problem is for people never to drink alcohol and then drive But what if people do How much is too much if the driver plans to drive It s a lot less than many might think Although it depends on each person and situation here is some general information on the problem The Blood Alcohol Concentration BAC of someone who is drinking depends upon four things The amount of alcohol consumed The drinker s body weight The amount of food that is consumed before and during drinking The length of time it has taken the drinker to consume the alcohol According to the Ame
201. le seals for leaking See footnote 7 22 Lubricate chassis components or every 3 months whichever occurs first Lubricate chassis components or every 3 months whichever occurs first DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY Short Trip City Scheduled Maintenance 72 000 Miles 120 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service MILEAGE i Lubricate chassis components or every 3 months whichever occurs first ooo ee See footnote Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote 75 000 Miles 125 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first ACTUAL SERVICED BY aes SERVICED BY An Emission Control Service MILEAGE Lubricate chassis components or every 3 months whichever occurs first hn See footnote Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these conditions In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90 F 32 C or higher Inhilly or mountainous terrain Continued 7 23 Sh
202. le straight out Never pull on the hooks at a sideways angle The hooks could break off and you or others could be injured from the chain or cable snapping back NOTICE Never use the recovery hooks to tow the vehicle Your vehicle could be damaged and it would not be covered by warranty Section 6 Service and Appearance Care Here you will find information about the care of your vehicle This section begins with service and fuel information and then it shows how to check important fluid and lubricant levels There is also technical information about your vehicle and a part devoted to its appearance care 6 2 Service 6 30 6 3 Fuel 6 34 6 5 Fuels in Foreign Countries 6 35 6 5 Filling Your Tank 6 39 6 8 Filling a Portable Fuel Container 6 41 6 8 Checking Things Under the Hood 6 50 6 11 Engine Oil 6 50 6 16 Engine Air Cleaner Filter 6 52 6 17 Automatic Transmission Fluid 6 54 6 20 Manual Transmission Fluid 6 57 6 21 Hydraulic Clutch 6 58 6 22 Rear Axle 6 58 6 23 Four Wheel Drive 6 59 6 24 Engine Coolant 6 65 6 28 Radiator Pressure Cap 6 65 6 28 Power Steering Fluid 6 66 6 29 Windshield Washer Fluid Brakes Battery Bulb Replacement Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement Tires Appearance Care Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle Care of Safety Belts Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle GM Vehicle Care Appearance Materials Vehicle Identification Number VIN Service Parts Identification Label Electrical System Replacemen
203. le to have new ones made easily using this number Your selling dealer should also have this number NOTICE Your vehicle has a number of new features that can help prevent theft But you can have a lot of trouble getting into your vehicle if you ever lock your keys inside You may even have to damage your vehicle to get in So be sure you have extra keys Door Locks There are several ways to lock and unlock your vehicle You can use the keyless entry system if you have this feature You can use your key to unlock your door from the outside Patchett Cones tan ie Caneerous To lock your door from the inside slide the lever on Passengers especially children can easily your inside door down open the doors and fall out When a door is locked the inside handle won t open it To unlock the door slide the lever on your inside door up You will see a red area on the lever Outsiders can easily enter through an unlocked door when you slow down or stop your vehicle This may not be so obvious You increase the chance of being thrown out of the vehicle in a crash if the doors aren t locked Wear safety belts properly lock your doors and you will be far better off whenever you drive your vehicle If your vehicle has power door locks the switch is located on the armrest Remove the ignition key and press LOCK to lock all the doors at once To unlock the doors press the raised area next to the key sym
204. ler safely be It depends on how you plan to use your rig For example speed altitude road grades outside temperature and how much your vehicle is used to pull a trailer are all important And it can also depend on any special equipment that you have on your vehicle The following chart shows how much your trailer can weigh based upon your vehicle model and options Axle Vehicle Ratio Max Trailer Wt 2 Wheel Drive 3 08 4 900 Ibs 2 224 kg Auto Trans 3 42 5 900 Ibs 2 678 kg 2 Wheel Drive 3 42 4 400 Ibs 1 997 kg Manual Trans 4 Wheel Drive 3 08 4 600 Ibs 2 088 kg Auto Trans 3 42 5 600 Ibs 2 542 kg 3 73 5 600 Ibs 2 542 kg 4 Wheel Drive 3 42 4 000 Ibs 1 816 kg Manual Trans 3 73 4 500 Ibs 2 043 kg Maximum trailer weight is calculated assuming the driver and one passenger are in the tow vehicle and it has all the required trailering equipment The weight of additional optional equipment passengers and cargo in the tow vehicle must be subtracted from the maximum trailer weight The weight of the trailer tongue also affects the maximum trailer weight See Weight of the Trailer Tongue later in this section You can ask your dealer for our trailering information or advice or you can write us at the address listed in your Warranty and Owner Assistance Information Booklet In Canada write to General Motors of Canada Limited Customer Communication Centre 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Oshawa
205. ll display but the word CD will be replaced with either AM FM1 or FM2 If the radio is turned off the disc stays in the player and will resume playing at the point where it stopped 3 32 CD AUX Press this button if you have a disc loaded in the CD player and the radio is turned on to play a compact disc Press AM FM to return to the radio when a compact disc is playing Press CD AUX to switch between the compact disc player and console mounted CD changer if both are loaded When a disc is playing the letters CD and the CD symbol will appear on the display If the radio is turned off the disc stays in the player and will resume playing at the point where it stopped EJECT Press this button to eject the disc from the player and play the radio When the same or a new disc is inserted the disc will start playing on track one Ifa compact disc is left sitting in the opening for more than a few seconds the player will pull the CD back in The radio will continue playing When the ignition is off press this button to load a CD Remote Cassette Tape Player If Equipped If you have an AM FM Stereo Audio Compact Disc Automatic Tone Control System that includes a remote cassette player the cassette player is located in the center of the instrument panel If you have an AM FM Stereo Audio Compact Disc Automatic Tone Control System that includes a remote cassette player the cassette player is located in the front of the center
206. ll four wheels on the ground These transmissions have no provisions for internal lubrication while being towed To properly tow these vehicles they should be placed on a platform trailer with all four wheels off the ground Towing with all four wheels on the ground should be avoided In rare cases when it s unavoidable and your vehicle has to be towed with all four wheels on the ground the propeller shaft to axle yoke orientation should be marked and the propeller shaft removed following the applicable service manual removal installation procedure See Service and Owner Publications in the Index Dust or dirt can enter the back of the transmission through the opening created by removing the propeller shaft if proper protection is not provided Also check the transmission fluid level before driving the vehicle Four Wheel Drive Vehicles 4 With the engine running shift the transfer case to Automatic Transfer Case NEUTRAL See Four Wheel Drive in the Index for the proper procedure to select the NEUTRAL position for your vehicle Shifting the transfer case into NEUTRAL can cause your vehicle to roll even if the transmission is in PARK P for an automatic transmission or if your vehicle is in gear for a manual transmission You or others could be injured Make sure the parking brake is firmly set before you shift the transfer case into NEUTRAL See Four Wheel Drive Automatic Transfe
207. lled should turn the light off 2 84 Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water If so your electrical system may be wet The condition will usually be corrected when the electrical system dries out A few driving trips should turn the light off Have you recently changed brands of fuel If so be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel see Fuel in the Index Poor fuel quality will cause your engine not to run as efficiently as designed You may notice this as stalling after start up stalling when you put the vehicle into gear misfiring hesitation on acceleration or stumbling on acceleration These conditions may go away once the engine is warmed up This will be detected by the system and cause the light to turn on If you experience one or more of these conditions change the fuel brand you use It will require at least one full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off If none of the above steps have made the light turn off have your dealer or qualified service center check the vehicle Your dealer has the proper test equipment and diagnostic tools to fix any mechanical or electrical problems that may have developed Emissions Inspection and Maintenance Programs Some state provincial and local governments have or may begin programs to inspect the emission control equipment on your vehicle Failure to pass this inspection could prevent you from getting a vehicle registration Here are some t
208. lls or in deep snow or mud If the selector lever is put in FIRST 1 while the vehicle is moving forward the transmission won t shift into first gear until the vehicle is going slowly enough NOTICE If your rear wheels can t rotate don t try to drive This might happen if you were stuck in very deep sand or mud or were up against a solid object You could damage your transmission Also if you stop when going uphill don t hold your vehicle there with only the accelerator pedal This could overheat and damage the transmission Use your brakes or shift into PARK P to hold your vehicle in position on a hill 2 23 Tow Haul Selector Switch If Equipped Your vehicle may be equipped with a tow haul selector switch This switch will be located on the floor console If your vehicle is equipped with the tow haul selector switch you can use this feature to more efficiently tow or haul a heavy load To select the tow haul mode press in on the switch The Tow Haul light on the instrument panel cluster will come on To go back to normal operation press the switch again The indicator light on the instrument panel cluster will go out See Tow Haul Mode in the Index for more information 2 24 Manual Transmission Operation 5 Speed This is your shift pattern Here s how to operate your transmission FIRST 1 Press the clutch pedal and shift into FIRST 1 Then slowly let up on the clutch pe
209. loads on the roof is not recommended e Tie the load to the tie downs at either end of the crossrails When loading cargo directly on the roof panel use the crossrails to keep the load from shifting e If you need to carry long items move the crossrails as far apart as possible Tie the load to the tie downs provided Also tie the load to the bumpers Do not tie the load so tightly that the crossrails or side rails are damaged 2 65 NOTICE Loading cargo that weighs more than 200 Ibs 91 kg on the luggage carrier may damage your vehicle When you carry large things never let them hang over the rear or the sides of your vehicle When loading cargo on the roof panel be sure it rests on the slats and does not scratch or damage the vehicle Put the cargo against the side rails and fasten it securely to the luggage carrier Put the main weight as far forward as you can and move the rear crossrail forward as far as possible to keep the load from shifting Don t exceed the maximum vehicle capacity when loading your vehicle For more information on vehicle capacity and loading see Loading Your Vehicle in the Index To prevent damage or loss of cargo as you re driving check now and then to make sure the luggage carrier and cargo are still securely fastened 2 66 Ashtrays and Cigarette Lighter Pull the front ashtray door down to open it NOTICE Don t put papers and other things that burn into
210. lockwise Turn it counterclockwise to decrease volume The knob is capable of rotating continuously RECALL Display the time with the ignition off by pressing this button When the radio is playing press this button to recall the station frequency SCV Your system has a feature called Speed Compensated Volume SCV With SCV your audio system adjusts automatically to make up for road and wind noise as you drive Set the volume at the desired level Turn the control ring behind the upper knob clockwise to adjust the SCV Then as you drive SCV automatically increases the volume as necessary to overcome noise at any particular speed The volume level should always sound the same to you as you drive If you don t want to use SCV turn the control all the way down Each notch on the control ring allows for more volume compensation at faster vehicle speeds Finding a Station AM FM Press this button to switch between AM FM1 and FM2 The display will show your selection TUNE Press this knob lightly so it extends Turn it to choose radio stations Push the knob back into its stored position when you re not using it SEEK Press the right arrow to tune to the next higher station and the left arrow to tune to the next lower station and stay there The sound will mute while seeking 3 25 SCAN Press and hold SEEK for two seconds until SCAN appears on the display SCAN allows you to listen to stations for a few seconds The r
211. lumn shift lever it features an electronic shift position indicator within the instrument panel cluster This display must be powered anytime the shift lever is capable of being moved out of PARK P This means that if your key is in OFF but not locked there will be a small current drain on your battery which could discharge your battery over a period of time If you need to leave your key in the ignition in OFF for an extended period it is recommended that you disconnect the battery cable from the battery to prevent discharging your battery PARK P This locks your rear wheels It s the best position to use when you start your engine because your vehicle can t move easily It is dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in PARK P with the parking brake firmly set Your vehicle can roll Don t leave your vehicle when the engine is running unless you have to If you have left the engine running the vehicle can move suddenly You or others could be injured To be sure your vehicle won t move even when you re on fairly level ground always set your parking brake and move the shift lever to PARK P See Shifting Into PARK P in the Index If you have four wheel drive your vehicle will be free to roll even if your shift lever is in PARK P if your transfer case is in NEUTRAL So be sure the transfer case is in a drive gear not in NEUTRAL See Four Wheel Drive Automatic
212. ly and therefore haven t changed your automatic transmission fluid change both the fluid and filter Manual transmission fluid doesn t require change 7 18 Lubricate chassis components or every 3 months whichever occurs first DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY Short Trip City Scheduled Maintenance 51 000 Miles 85 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service See footnote Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote 54 000 Miles 90 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service See footnote Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote Lubricate chassis components or every 3 months whichever occurs first Lubricate chassis components or every 3 months whichever occurs first DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY 7 19 Short Trip City Scheduled Maintenance 57 000 Miles 95 000 km
213. moke if you re near gasoline or refueling your vehicle Keep sparks flames and smoking materials away from gasoline The fuel cap is behind a hinged door on driver s side of your vehicle While refueling hang the cap by the tether from the hook on the filler door To remove the cap turn it slowly to the left counterclockwise The cap has a spring in it if you let go of the cap too soon it will spring back to the right If you get gasoline on yourself and then something ignites it you could be badly burned Gasoline can spray out on you if you open the fuel filler cap too quickly This spray can happen if your tank is nearly full and is more likely in hot weather Open the fuel filler cap slowly and wait for any hiss noise to stop Then unscrew the cap all the way Be careful not to spill gasoline Clean gasoline from painted surfaces as soon as possible See Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle in the Index When you put the cap back on turn it to the right clockwise until you hear a clicking sound Make sure you fully install the cap The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or improperly installed This would allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere See Malfunction Indicator Lamp in the Index NOTICE If you need a new cap be sure to get the right type Your dealer can get one for you If you get the wrong type it may not fit properly This may cause
214. mpartment door are used to make sure the button on the compartment door will contact the control button on the garage door opener Add one peg at a time until the garage door opener operates with the compartment door closed when you press the button 2 58 Now with the compartment door closed press the button again to make sure the garage door opener operates properly With the garage door opener positioned properly and the right number of pegs in place you should only have to press the button slightly to operate the opener Adjust the position of the garage door opener and add or remove pegs as needed until the opener operates properly Temperature and Compass Display The outside air temperature and the compass are displayed at the front of the overhead console The control buttons are located to the left of the display Turn the display on or off by pressing the ON OFF button Display the temperature in either degrees Fahrenheit English or Celsius metric by pressing the US MET button Before you turn on the ignition and move the vehicle the temperature indicated will be the last outside temperature recorded with the ignition on If the outside temperature is 37 F 3 C or lower when you turn on the ignition ICE will appear on the display This is a warning to the driver that road conditions may be icy and that appropriate precautions should be taken The compass is self calibrating so it does n
215. n 4 Press and hold one of the six pushbuttons The sound will mute When it returns release the button Whenever you press that numbered button the station you set will return 5 Repeat the steps for each pushbutton 3 30 P SCAN The preset scan button lets you scan through your favorite stations stored on your pushbuttons Select either the AM FM1 or FM2 mode and then press P SCAN It will scan through each station stored on your pushbuttons and stop for a few seconds before continuing to scan through all of the pushbuttons Press P SCAN again or one of the pushbuttons to stop scanning to listen to a specific stored station PSCAN will light up on the display while in this mode If one of the stations stored on a pushbutton is too weak for the location you are in the radio display will show the channel number P1 P6 for several seconds before advancing to the next preset station Setting the Tone BASS Press lightly on this knob to release it from its stored position Turn the knob clockwise to increase bass and counterclockwise to decrease bass TREB Press lightly on this knob to release it from its stored position Turn the knob clockwise to increase treble and counterclockwise to decrease treble If a station is weak or noisy you may want to decrease the treble Push these knobs back into their stored positions when you re not using them Adjusting the Speakers BAL Press lightly on this knob to release it
216. n drinkable water and DEX COOL coolant If coolant other than DEX COOL is added to the system premature engine heater core or radiator corrosion may result In addition the engine coolant will require change sooner at 30 000 miles 50 000 km or 24 months whichever occurs first Damage caused by the use of coolant other than DEX COOL is not covered by your new vehicle warranty 6 25 NOTICE If you use an improper coolant mixture your engine could overheat and be badly damaged The repair cost wouldn t be covered by your warranty Too much water in the mixture can freeze and crack the engine radiator heater core and other parts If you have to add coolant more than four times a year have your dealer check your cooling system NOTICE If you use the proper coolant you don t have to add extra inhibitors or additives which claim to improve the system These can be harmful 6 26 Checking Coolant The vehicle must be on a level surface When your engine is cold the coolant level should be at ADD or a little higher When your engine is warm the level should be up to FULL HOT or a little higher Adding Coolant If you need more coolant add the proper DEX COOL coolant mixture at the coolant recovery tank You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot engine parts Coolant contains ethylene glycol and it will burn if the engine parts are hot enough Don t spill coolant on a hot
217. n push the seatback all the way back until the latch catches If the seatback was reclined before being folded forward it will return to the reclined position If the seatback isn t locked it could move forward in a sudden stop or crash That could cause injury to the person sitting there Always press rearward on the seatback to be sure it is locked Easy Entry Seat 2 Door Models The right front seat of your vehicle makes it easy to get in and out of the rear seat e Tilt the right front seatback completely forward and the whole seat will slide forward Move the seatback to its original position after someone gets into the rear seat area Then move the seat rearward until it locks If an easy entry right front seat isn t locked it can move In a sudden stop or crash the person sitting there could be injured After you ve used it be sure to push rearward on an easy entry seat to be sure it is locked Tilt the seatback completely forward again to get out Rear Seats Your vehicle has a folding rear seat which lets you fold the seatbacks down for more cargo space The rear seat release handles are on the rear of the seatbacks Push back on the seatbacks as you pull up on the handles The head restraint will automatically fold out of the way when the seatback is folded down To raise the seatbacks just lift up the seatbacks and push until they lock in the upright position Push and pull on the
218. n Emission Control Service ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY Lubricate chassis components or every 12 months whichever occurs first See footnote Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these conditions In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90 F 32 C or higher In hilly or mountainous terrain When doing frequent trailer towing Uses such as found in taxi police or delivery service If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions change the fluid and filter every 50 000 miles 83 000 km Replace fuel filter An Emission Control Service See footnote Replace engine air cleaner filter An Emission Control Service Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote 7 39 Long Trip Highway Scheduled Maintenance 97 500 Miles 162 500 km Change engine oil and filter or every 12 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service See footnote Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote Rotate
219. n a minimum of four hours prior to starting your vehicle To Use the Engine Coolant Heater 1 Turn off the engine 2 Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord The cord is located on the driver s side of the engine compartment behind the underhood fuse block 3 Plug it into a normal grounded 110 volt AC outlet 2 20 Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet could cause an electrical shock Also the wrong kind of extension cord could overheat and cause a fire You could be seriously injured Plug the cord into a properly grounded three prong 110 volt AC outlet If the cord won t reach use a heavy duty three prong extension cord rated for at least 15 amps 4 Before starting the engine be sure to unplug and store the cord as it was before to keep it away from moving engine parts If you don t it could be damaged How long should you keep the coolant heater plugged in The answer depends on the outside temperature the kind of oil you have and some other things Instead of trying to list everything here we ask that you contact your dealer in the area where you ll be parking your vehicle The dealer can give you the best advice for that particular area Automatic Transmission Operation Your automatic transmission may have a shift lever located on the console between the seats or on the steering column There are several different positions for your shift lever If your vehicle is equipped with a co
220. n automatic transmission vehicles try to start the engine in each gear The starter should work only in PARK P or NEUTRAL N If the starter works in any other position your vehicle needs service On manual transmission vehicles put the shift lever in NEUTRAL N push the clutch down halfway and try to start the engine The starter should work only when the clutch is pushed down all the way to the floor If the starter works when the clutch isn t pushed all the way down your vehicle needs service Automatic Transmission Shift Lock Control System Check When you are doing this check the vehicle could move suddenly If it does you or others could be injured Follow the steps below 1 Before you start be sure you have enough room around the vehicle It should be parked on a level surface 2 Firmly apply the parking brake see Parking Brake in the Index if necessary NOTE Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately if the vehicle begins to move 3 With the engine off turn the key to the RUN position but don t start the engine Without applying the regular brake try to move the shift lever out of PARK P with normal effort If the shift lever moves out of PARK P your vehicle needs service Ignition Transmission Lock Check While parked and with the parking brake set try to turn the ignition key to LOCK in each shift lever position With an automatic transmission the key should turn
221. n selected TOW HAUL For more information see Tow Haul Mode in the Index 2 87 Check Gages Light The CHECK GAGES light will come on briefly when CHECK you are starting the engine GAGES If the light comes on and stays on while you are driving check your coolant temperature and engine oil pressure gages to see if they are in the warning zones Gate Ajar Light If this light comes on your liftgate or liftglass is ajar Try closing the liftgate or GATE liftglass again Never drive AJAR with the liftgate or liftglass even partially open 2 88 Fuel Gage United States Canada When the ignition is on the fuel gage tells you about how much fuel you have remaining Here are four things that some owners ask about None of these show a problem with your fuel gage At the gas station the gas pump shuts off before the gage reads F Full It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than the gage indicated For example the gage may have indicated the tank was half full but it actually took a little more or less than half the tank s capacity to fill the tank The gage moves a little when you turn a corner or speed up The gage doesn t go back to E Empty when you turn off the ignition Low Fuel Light The LOW FUEL light will come on briefly when you LOW are starting the engine FUEL This light comes on when the fuel tank is low on fuel To turn it off add fuel to the fuel tan
222. n will be indicated by the system before any problem is apparent This may prevent more serious damage to your vehicle This system is also designed to assist your service technician in correctly diagnosing any malfunction This light should come on as a check to show you it is NOTICE working when the ignition is on and the engine is not running If the light doesn t come on have it repaired This light will also come on during a malfunction in one of two ways If you keep driving your vehicle with this light on after a while your emission controls may not work as well your fuel economy may not be as Light Flashing A misfire condition has been good and your engine may not run as smoothly detected A misfire increases vehicle emissions and This could lead to costly repairs that may not be may damage the emission control system on your _ covered by your warranty vehicle Dealer or qualified service center diagnosis and service may be required Light On Steady An emission control system malfunction has been detected on your vehicle NOTICE Dealer or qualified service center diagnosis and service may be required Modifications made to the engine transmission If the Light Is Flashing exhaust or fuel system of your vehicle or the replacement of the original tires with other than those of the same Tire Performance Criteria TPC can affect your vehicle s emission controls Reducing vehicle speed and may cau
223. n will chirp REAR When you press the REAR button twice within three seconds to release the rear liftgate glass the parking lamps will flash and the interior lights will go on If your vehicle has an automatic transmission the transmission must be in PARK P or NEUTRAL N If your vehicle has a manual transmission you must engage the parking brake Remote Panic Alarm When the button with the horn symbol on the key transmitter is pressed the horn will sound and the headlamps and taillamps will flash for up to 30 seconds This can be turned off by pressing the horn button again waiting for 30 seconds or starting the vehicle Matching Transmitter s To Your Vehicle Each remote keyless entry transmitter is coded to prevent another transmitter from unlocking your vehicle If a transmitter is lost or stolen a replacement can be purchased through your dealer Remember to bring any remaining transmitters with you when you go to your dealer When the dealer matches the replacement transmitter to your vehicle any remaining transmitters must also be matched Once your dealer has coded the new transmitter the lost transmitter will not unlock your vehicle Each vehicle can have only four transmitters matched to it Battery Replacement Under normal use the battery in your transmitter should last about two years You can tell the battery is weak if the transmitter won t work at the normal range in any location If you have to get
224. nches 5 to 13 cm away from the surface of the HomeLink Transmitter so that you can still see the indicator light 2 70 3 Using both hands press the hand held transmitter button and the desired button on the HomeLink Transmitter Continue to press both buttons through Step 4 4 Hold down both buttons until you see the red light on the HomeLink Transmitter flash rapidly The rapid flashing indicates that the HomeLink Transmitter has been programmed Release both buttons once the light starts to flash rapidly If you have trouble programming the HomeLink Transmitter make sure that you have followed the directions exactly as described and that the battery in the hand held transmitter is not dead If you still cannot program it rotate the hand held transmitter end over end and try again The HomeLink Transmitter may not work with older garage door openers that do not meet current Federal Consumer Safety Standards If you cannot program the transmitter after repeated attempts refer to Training a Garage Door Opener with Rolling Codes later in this section or contact the manufacturer of the unit at 1 800 355 3515 Be sure to keep the original hand held transmitter in case you need to erase and reprogram the HomeLink Transmitter Note to Canadian Owners During programming the hand held transmitter may automatically stop transmitting after one or two seconds In this case you should press and re press the button on the hand h
225. nd condensation See Rear Window Defogger in the Index for more information Storage Compartments Glove Box To open your glove box lift the lever on the front of the glove box and lower the door The glove box should not be open while driving 2 56 Overhead Console If Equipped The overhead console includes reading lamps a compartment for a garage door opener a temperature and compass display and a storage compartment for sunglasses Some models have a driver information system in the console See Driver Information System later in this section Reading Lamps Press the button near each lamp to turn the reading lamps on and off The lamps can also be swiveled to point in the desired direction Installing a Garage Door Opener If you have a garage door opener the front overhead compartment can be used to conveniently store the opener If you have the optional HomeLink Transmitter please see HomeLink Transmitter in the Index for instructions on how to use the system To install the garage door opener first open the compartment door by pressing the latch forward Peel the protective backing from the hook and loop patch Press it firmly to the back of your garage door opener as close to the center of the opener as possible Center the garage door opener activation button over the console door button and press the opener firmly into place 2 57 The pegs inside the co
226. nd go important to do it properly Added sound equipment may interfere with the operation of Tips About Your Audio System your vehicle s engine Delphi Delco Electronics Hearing damage from loud noise is almost undetectable radio or other systems and Even damage them until it is too late Your hearing can adapt to higher Your vehicle s systems may interfere with the volumes of sound Sound that seems normal can be operation of sound equipment that has been loud and harmful to your hearing Take precautions by added improperly adjusting the volume control on your radio to a safe So before adding sound equipment check with sound level before your hearing adapts to it your dealer and be sure to check Federal rules covering mobile radio and telephone units 3 41 Care of Your Cassette Tape Player A tape player that is not cleaned regularly can cause reduced sound quality ruined cassettes or a damaged mechanism Cassette tapes should be stored in their cases away from contaminants direct sunlight and extreme heat If they aren t they may not operate properly or may cause failure of the tape player Your tape player should be cleaned regularly after every 50 hours of use Your radio may display CLN to indicate that you have used your tape player for 50 hours without resetting the tape clean timer If this message appears on the display your cassette tape player needs to be cleaned It will still play tapes but you should clean
227. nd lubricant meeting requirements of Universal Joints NLGI 2 Category LB Chassis Chassis Lubricant GM Part or GC LB Lubrication No 12377985 or equivalent or lubricant meeting requirements of Constant Chassis Lubricant GM Part NLGI 2 Category LB Velocity No 12377985 or equivalent or or GC LB Universal Joint lubricant meeting requirements of Front and Rear SAE 80W 90 Axle Lubricant GM meses S Axle Standard Part No 1052271 or equivalent Differential 7 50 USAGE FLUID LUBRICANT USAGE FLUID LUBRICANT Clutch Pushrod Chassis Lubricant GM Part Tailgate Multi Purpose Lubricant to Clutch No 12377985 or equivalent or Mounted Spare Superlube GM Part Fork Joint lubricant meeting requirements of Tire Carrier if No 12346241 or equivalent NLGI 2 Category LB equipped Outer or GC LB Tailgate Handle Pivot Points and Assembly GM Part No 12346293 or Himpe Secondary Latch equivalent or lubricant meeting Weatherstrip Dielectric Silicone Grease GM Pivots Spring requirements of NLGI 2 Conditioning Part No 12345579 or equivalent sia oan Sie or DEALA Weatherstrip Synthetic Grease with Teflon Squeaks Superlube GM Part Hood and Multi Purpose Lubricant No 12371287 or equivalent Door Hinges Superlube GM Part No 12346241 or equivalent Hood Latch Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol 7 51 Part E Maintenance Record After the scheduled services are performed record the date odome
228. nd the lower knob to move the sound to the front or rear speakers The middle position balances the sound between the speakers Playing a Cassette Tape Your tape player is built to work best with tapes that are up to 30 to 45 minutes long on each side Tapes longer than that are so thin they may not work well in this player Once the tape is playing use the knobs for VOLUME BAL FADE BASS and TREB just as you do for the radio REV Press the SEEK left arrow to reverse the cassette tape Press the SEEK right arrow to stop reversing the tape FWD Press the SEEK right arrow to advance the cassette tape Press the SEEK left arrow to stop forwarding the tape RECALL Press this knob to switch tape sides EJECT Press this button to remove the tape or stop the tape and play the radio CLN If this message appears on the display the cassette tape player needs to be cleaned It will still play tapes but you should clean it as soon as possible to prevent damage to the tapes and player See Care of Your Cassette Tape Player in the Index After you clean the player press and hold EJECT for five seconds to reset the CLN indicator The radio will display to show the indicator was reset CD Adapter Kits It is possible to use a portable CD player adapter kit with your cassette tape player after activating the bypass feature on your tape player To activate the bypass feature use the following steps 1 Turn the radio on
229. ndex When you are ready to drive move the shift lever out of PARK P before you release the parking brake If torque lock does occur you may need to have another vehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of the pressure from the parking pawl in the transmission so you can pull the shift lever out of PARK P Shifting Out of PARK P Automatic Transmission Only Your vehicle has an automatic transmission shift lock control system You have to fully apply your regular brake before you can shift from PARK P when the ignition is in RUN See Automatic Transmission Operation in the Index If you cannot shift out of PARK P ease pressure on the shift lever push the shift lever all the way into PARK P as you maintain brake application Then move the shift lever into the gear you want You must press the shift lever button if you have the console shift lever If you ever hold the brake pedal down but still can t shift out of PARK P try this 1 Turn the key to OFF ee 5 Apply and hold the brake until the end of Step 4 Shift the transmission to NEUTRAL N Start the vehicle and then shift to the drive gear you want Have the vehicle fixed as soon as you can Parking Your Vehicle Manual Transmission Models Only Before you get out of your vehicle turn off your engine put your manual transmission in REVERSE R and firmly apply the parking brake If you are parking on a hill or if y
230. ndshield or the safety belts With safety belts you slow down as the vehicle does You get more time to stop You stop over more distance and your strongest bones take the forces That s why safety belts make such good sense Here Are Questions Many People Ask About Safety Belts and the Answers Q A Won t I be trapped in the vehicle after an accident if I m wearing a safety belt You could be whether you re wearing a safety belt or not But you can unbuckle a safety belt even if you re upside down And your chance of being conscious during and after an accident so you can unbuckle and get out is much greater if you are belted If my vehicle has air bags why should I have to wear safety belts Air bags are in many vehicles today and will be in most of them in the future But they are supplemental systems only so they work with safety belts not instead of them Every air bag system ever offered for sale has required the use of safety belts Even if you re in a vehicle that has air bags you still have to buckle up to get the most protection That s true not only in frontal collisions but especially in side and other collisions 1 15 Q If Pm a good driver and I never drive far from home why should I wear safety belts A You may be an excellent driver but if you re in an accident even one that isn t your fault you and your passengers can be hurt Being a good driv
231. ner If any one of these is true for your vehicle then you need to change your oil and filter every 3 000 miles 5 000 km or 3 months whichever occurs first If none of them is true use the long trip highway maintenance schedule Change the oil and filter every 7 500 miles 12 500 km or 12 months whichever occurs first Driving a vehicle with a fully warmed engine under highway conditions causes engine oil to break down slower Remote Oil Filter Four Wheel Drive The access door for the remote oil filter is in the steering linkage shield assembly located under the radiator support Twist the screw to unlock or lock the door If you open the door make sure it is securely closed when you are finished What to Do with Used Oil Did you know that used engine oil contains certain elements that may be unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer Don t let used oil stay on your skin for very long Clean your skin and nails with soap and water or a good hand cleaner Wash or properly throw away clothing or rags containing used engine oil See the manufacturer s warnings about the use and disposal of oil products Used oil can be a real threat to the environment If you change your own oil be sure to drain all free flowing oil from the filter before disposal Don t ever dispose of oil by putting it in the trash pouring it on the ground into sewers or into streams or bodies of water Instead recycle
232. ner Publications in Canada Customer Satisfaction Procedure Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to your dealer and to GMC Normally any concerns with the sales transaction or the operation of your vehicle will be resolved by your dealer s sales or service departments Sometimes however despite the best intentions of all concerned misunderstandings can occur If your concern has not been resolved to your satisfaction the following steps should be taken STEP ONE Discuss your concern with a member of dealership management Normally concerns can be quickly resolved at that level If the matter has already been reviewed with the sales service or parts manager contact the owner of the dealership or the general manager STEP TWO If after contacting a member of dealership management it appears your concern cannot be resolved by the dealership without further help contact the GMC Consumer Relations Manager by calling 1 800 GMC 8782 1 800 462 8782 Customer Assistance prompt In Canada contact GM of Canada Customer Communication Centre in Oshawa by calling 1 800 263 3777 English or 1 800 263 7854 French We encourage you to call the toll free number in order to give your inquiry prompt attention Please have the following information available to give the Customer Assistance Representative Vehicle Identification Number This is available from the vehicle registration or title or the plate at the top le
233. ng a soft clean cloth with mild soap and water Rinse with clean water After rinsing thoroughly dry with a soft clean towel A wax may then be applied The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted surface of your vehicle Don t use strong soaps chemicals abrasive polishes abrasive cleaners cleaners with acid or abrasive cleaning brushes on them because you could damage the surface Do not use chrome polish on any wheels other than chrome plated wheels Don t take your vehicle through an automatic car wash that has silicon carbide tire cleaning brushes These brushes can also damage the surface of these wheels Cleaning Tires To clean your tires use a stiff brush with a tire cleaner NOTICE When applying a tire dressing always take care to wipe off any overspray or splash from all painted surfaces on the body or wheels of the vehicle Petroleum based products may damage the paint finish and tires 6 55 Sheet Metal Damage If your vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal repair or replacement make sure the body repair shop applies anti corrosion material to the parts repaired or replaced to restore corrosion protection Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide the corrosion protection while maintaining the warranty Finish Damage Any stone chips fractures or deep scratches in the finish should be repaired right away Bare metal will corrode quickly and may develop into a major repai
234. ng directs most of the air through the instrument panel outlets and a small amount through the floor outlets The air conditioning compressor is not working when VENT is selected e td HEATER This setting directs most of the warmed air through the heater floor outlets and some air through the windshield defroster outlets We Airflow is divided equa etween the BLEND Airflow is divided equally b h heater floor outlet and the windshield defroster outlets Gp DEFROST This setting directs most air through the windshield defroster outlets and some through the heater floor outlets Electronic Climate Control System If Equipped Fan Control The knob on the left side of the electronic climate control panel controls the fan speed To manually increase airflow move the knob clockwise To manually decrease airflow move it counterclockwise OFF If the knob is in OFF outside air will still enter the vehicle and will be directed based on the position of the mode knob AUTO If the knob is in AUTO the fan speed will vary as the system maintains the selected temperature 3 3 Temperature Knob The middle knob on the control panel lets you select the desired air temperature in your vehicle This knob will allow you to adjust the interior air temperature independently of the function knob setting Move the knob clockwise toward 82 for warmer air Move the knob counterclockwise toward 6
235. ng garage heavy overcast weather or a tunnel This is normal There is a delay in the transition between the daytime and nighttime operation of the Daytime Running Lamps DRL and the automatic headlamp systems so that driving under bridges or bright overhead street lights does not affect the system The DRL and automatic headlamp system will only be affected when the light sensor sees a change in lighting lasting longer than the delay 2 50 To idle your vehicle with the automatic headlamp system off set the parking brake while the ignition is off Then start your vehicle The automatic headlamp system will stay off until you release the parking brake As with any vehicle you should turn on the regular headlamp system when you need it Lamps On Reminder A reminder chime will sound when your headlamps or parking lamps are manually turned on the driver s door is opened and your ignition is in OFF LOCK or ACCESSORY To turn the chime off turn the knob all the way to the left or turn the instrument panel dimmer down to the fully dimmed position In the automatic mode the headlamps turn off once the ignition key is in OFF Daytime Running Lamps Daytime Running Lamps DRL can make it easier for others to see the front of your vehicle during the day DRL can be helpful in many different driving conditions but they can be especially helpful in the short periods after dawn and before sunset The DRL system will make your he
236. ng the same belt The belt can t properly spread the impact forces In a crash the two children can be crushed together and seriously injured A belt must be used by only one person at a time Q What if a child is wearing a lap shoulder belt but the child is so small that the shoulder belt is very close to the child s face or neck A Move the child toward the center of the vehicle but be sure that the shoulder belt still is on the child s shoulder so that in a crash the child s upper body would have the restraint that belts provide If the child is sitting in a rear outside position of a four door model see Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides in the Index If the child is so small that the shoulder belt is still very close to the child s face or neck you might want to place the child in a seat that has a lap belt if your vehicle has one 1 54 Never do this Here a child is sitting in a seat that has a lap shoulder belt but the shoulder part is behind the child If the child wears the belt in this way in a crash the child might slide under the belt The belt s force would then be applied right on the child s abdomen That could cause serious or fatal injuries Wherever the child sits the lap portion of the belt should be worn low and snug on the hips just touching the child s thighs This applies belt force to the child s pelvic bones in a crash 1 55 Safety Belt Extender If the
237. nger the CD changer symbol will appear on the radio display If the CD changer is checking the magazine for CDs the CD symbol will flash on the display until the changer is ready to play When a CD begins playing a disc and track number will be displayed The disc numbers are listed on the front of the magazine If your vehicle is equipped with the AM FM Stereo with Cassette Tape Player Bose all of the CD changer functions are controlled by the radio buttons except for ejecting the CD magazine PREV 1 Press this button or the SEEK left arrow to go to the previous track if the current selection has been playing for less than eight seconds If the PREV button is pressed and the current selection has been playing for more than eight seconds it will go to the beginning of the current selection If you hold or press this button more than once the player will continue moving back through the disc The sound will mute while seeking PROG 2 Press this button to select a disc The disc number and track number will be displayed NEXT 3 Press this button or the SEEK right arrow to go to the next track If you hold the button or press it more than once the player will continue moving forward through the disc The sound will mute while seeking 3 36 REV 4 Press and hold this button to reverse quickly through a track selection Release it to resume playing FWD 6 Press and hold this button to advance quickly through a tra
238. ns at the same time for three seconds The tape symbol on the display will flash showing that the cut tape detection feature is no longer active 5 Eject the cleaning cassette after the manufacturer s recommended cleaning time If your vehicle is equipped with the AM FM Stereo with Cassette Tape Player and Automatic Tone Control 1 Turn the ignition to RUN or ACCESSORY 2 Turn the radio off 3 Press and hold the TAPE AUX button for five seconds The tape symbol on the display will flash for two seconds 4 Insert the scrubbing action cleaning cassette 5 Eject the cleaning cassette after the manufacturer s recommended cleaning time When the cleaning cassette has been ejected the cut tape detection feature is active again You may also choose a non scrubbing action wet type cleaner which uses a cassette with a fabric belt to clean the tape head This type of cleaning cassette will not eject on its own A non scrubbing action cleaner may not clean as thoroughly as the scrubbing type cleaner The use of a non scrubbing action dry type cleaning cassette is not recommended After you clean the player press and hold EJECT for five seconds to reset the CLN indicator The radio will display to show the indicator was reset Cassettes are subject to wear and the sound quality may degrade over time Always make sure the cassette tape is in good condition before you have your tape player serviced 3 43 Care of You
239. nterruption expenses up to 500 00 when directly associated with warranty disablement Trip Interruption service covers expenses such as meals and overnight lodging if vehicle disablement occurs at least 150 miles 240 km from your home or rental property Please Note you will be required to obtain prior approval from GMC Roadside Assistance and pay for expenses at the time of disablement Original receipts should be submitted to GMC Roadside Assistance for reimbursement A service representative will provide assistance when you call The Roadside Assistance services listed are available to retail and retail lease customers operating 2000 GMC light duty trucks for a period of 3 years 36 000 miles 60 000 km All services must be pre arranged by GMC Roadside Assistance Over the phone assistance such as providing the name of the closest dealer or minor technical advice etc is available to all owner operators of GMC trucks regardless of vehicle or mileage Just dial GMC Roadside Assistance at 1 800 GMC 8782 1 800 462 8782 Roadside Assistance prompt to reach a qualified representative who can assist you Your Roadside Assistance representative will ask for the following information when your call is received Vehicle Identification Number VIN Name and home address Telephone number and location from which you are calling Location license plate number and color of your GMC truck Mileage of vehicle and desc
240. ntrol can be dangerous where you can t drive safely at a steady speed So don t use your cruise control on winding If you leave your cruise control switch on when you re not using cruise you might hit a button roads or in heavy traffic Cruise control can be dangerous on slippery roads On such roads fast changes in tire traction can cause needless wheel spinning and you could lose control Don t use cruise control on slippery roads and go into cruise when you don t want to You could be startled and even lose control Keep the cruise control switch off until you want to use cruise control 1 Move the cruise control switch to ON 2 Get up to the speed you want 3 Press in the SET button at the end of the lever and release it 4 Take your foot off the accelerator pedal 2 47 Resuming a Set Speed Suppose you set your cruise control at a desired speed and then you apply the brake This of course shuts off the cruise control But you don t need to reset it Once you re going about 25 mph 40 km h or more you can move the cruise control switch briefly from ON to R A You ll go right back up to your chosen speed and stay there If you hold the switch at R A the vehicle will keep going faster until you release the switch or apply the brake So unless you want to go faster don t hold the switch at R A Increasing Speed While Using Cruise Control There are two ways to go to a higher speed
241. o some limited production tires While the tires available on General Motors passenger cars and light trucks may vary with respect to these grades they must also conform to Federal safety requirements and additional General Motors Tire Performance Criteria TPC standards Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course For example a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half 1 1 2 times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use however and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate Traction AA A B C The traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C Those grades represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction performance Warning The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight ahead braking traction tests and does not include acceleration cornering hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics Temperature A B C The temperature grades are A the highest B and C representing the tire s resistance to the generation of
242. o uphill You may want to shift down to a lower gear The lower gears help cool your engine and transmission and you can climb the hill better Stay in your own lane when driving on two lane roads in hills or mountains Don t swing wide or cut across the center of the road Drive at speeds that let you stay in your own lane As you go over the top of a hill be alert There could be something in your lane like a stalled car or an accident You may see highway signs on mountains that warn of special problems Examples are long grades passing or no passing zones a falling rocks area or winding roads Be alert to these and take appropriate action 4 39 Winter Driving Here are some tips for winter driving Have your vehicle in good shape for winter You may want to put winter emergency supplies in your vehicle 4 40 Include an ice scraper a small brush or broom a supply of windshield washer fluid a rag some winter outer clothing a small shovel a flashlight a red cloth and reflective warning triangles And if you will be driving under severe conditions include a small bag of sand a piece of old carpet or a couple of burlap bags to help provide traction Be sure you properly secure these items in your vehicle Driving on Snow or Ice Most of the time those places where your tires meet the road probably have good traction However if there is snow or ice between your tires and the road you can have a ve
243. ob to release it from its stored position Turn the knob clockwise to increase bass and counterclockwise to decrease bass When the BASS control is rotated the AUTO TONE display will go blank TREB Press lightly on this knob to release it from its stored position Turn the knob clockwise to increase treble and counterclockwise to decrease treble When the TREB control is rotated the AUTO TONE display will go blank If a station is weak or noisy you may want to decrease the treble Push these knobs back into their stored positions when you re not using them AUTO TONE Press this button to select among the six preset equalization settings and tailor the sound to the music or voice being heard Each time you press the button the selection will switch to one of the preset settings of CLASSIC NEWS ROCK POP C W Country Western or JAZZ To return to the manual mode press and release this button until the AUTO TONE display goes blank This will return the tone adjustment to the BASS and TREB controls If a BASS or TREB control is rotated the AUTO TONE display will go blank Use PUSHBUTTONS to program AUTO TONE Adjusting the Speakers BAL Press lightly on this knob to release it from its stored position Turn the control clockwise to adjust sound to the right speakers and counterclockwise to adjust sound to the left speakers The middle position balances the sound between the speakers FADE Press lightly on this knob to relea
244. of oil to use For crankcase capacity see Capacities and Specifications in the Index NOTICE Don t add too much oil If your engine has so much oil that the oil level gets above the cross hatched area that shows the proper operating range your engine could be damaged Be sure to fill it enough to put the level somewhere in the proper operating range Push the dipstick all the way back in when you re through ee Oils recommended for your vehicle can be identified by FOR BEST FUEL ECONOMY AND COLD STARTING SELECT THE LOWEST looking for the starburst symbol SAE VISCOSITY GRADE OIL FOR THE EXPECTED TEMPERATURE RANGE This symbol indicates that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleum Institute API Do not use any oil which does not carry this starburst symbol HOT FOR THIS WEATHER SYMBOL If you change your own oil be sure you use oil that has the starburst symbol on the front of the oil container If you have your oil changed for you be sure the oil put into your engine is American Petroleum Institute certified for gasoline engines EIS You should also use the proper viscosity oil for your SAE 5W 30 vehicle as shown in the following chart PREFERRED COLD WEATHER DO NOT USE SAE 20W 50 OR ANY OTHER GRADE OIL NOT RECOMMENDED 6 13 As shown in the chart SAE 5W 30 is best for your vehicle However you can use SAE 10W 30 if it s going to be 0 F 18 C or above These numbers on
245. of the way If you slam the door on it you can damage both the belt and your vehicle A pregnant woman should wear a lap shoulder belt and the lap portion should be worn as low as possible below the rounding throughout the pregnancy The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the mother When a safety belt is worn properly it s more likely that the fetus won t be hurt in a crash For pregnant women as for anyone the key to making safety belts effective is wearing them properly Right Front Passenger Position To learn how to wear the right front passenger s safety belt properly see Driver Position earlier in this section The right front passenger s safety belt works the same way as the driver s safety belt except for one thing If you ever pull the shoulder portion of the belt out all the way you will engage the child restraint locking feature If this happens just let the belt go back all the way and start again Air Bag System This part explains the air bag system Your vehicle has air bags one air bag for the driver and another air bag for the right front passenger Frontal air bags are designed to help reduce the risk of injury from the force of an inflating air bag But these air bags must inflate very quickly to do their job and comply with federal regulations 1 24 Here are the most important things to know about the air bag system You can be severely injured or killed in a c
246. on stored on your pushbuttons and stop for a few seconds before continuing to scan through all of the pushbuttons Press P SCAN again or one of the pushbuttons to stop scanning to listen to a specific preset station P SCAN will light up on the display while in this mode If one of the stations stored on a pushbutton is too weak for the location you are in the radio display will show the channel number P1 P6 for several seconds before advancing to the next preset station Setting the Tone BASS Press lightly on this knob to release it from its stored position Turn the knob clockwise to increase bass and counterclockwise to decrease bass When the BASS control is rotated the AUTO TONE display will go blank TREB Press lightly on this knob to release it from its stored position Turn the knob clockwise to increase treble and counterclockwise to decrease treble When the TREB control is rotated the AUTO TONE display will go blank If a station is weak or noisy you may want to decrease the treble Push these knobs back into their stored positions when you re not using them AUTO TONE Press this button to select among the six preset equalization settings and tailor the sound to the music or voice being heard Each time you press the button the selection will switch to one of the preset settings of CLASSIC NEWS ROCK POP C W Country Western or JAZZ To return to the manual mode press and release this button until the AUTO
247. onditions 4wD 4LO Norma yesh too o o o Variable Jys I Severe Tooo ves Pd Extreme o Io ves tg Vehicle n Tow ft VES See Recreational Vehicle Towing or Towing Your Vehicle in the Index for further information 2HI This setting is used for driving in most street and highway situations Your front axle is not engaged in two wheel drive This setting also provides the best fuel economy AUTO 4WD This setting is ideal for use when road conditions are variable When driving your vehicle in AUTO 4WD the front axle is engaged but the vehicle s power is sent only to the rear wheels When the vehicle senses a loss of traction the system will automatically engage four wheel drive Driving in this mode results in slightly lower fuel economy than 2HI 2 29 4HI Use 4HI when you need extra traction such as on snowy or icy roads or in most off road situations This setting also engages your front axle to help drive your vehicle 4LO This setting also engages your front axle and delivers extra torque You may never need 4LO It sends maximum power to all four wheels You might choose 4LO if you are driving off road in deep sand deep mud deep snow and climbing or descending steep hills Shifting the transfer case to NEUTRAL can cause your vehicle to roll even if the transmission is in PARK P or if you have a manual transmission even if you are in gear You or someone else could be seriously injure
248. onds indicating the feature is active 4 Insert the adapter into the cassette slot It will power up the radio and begin playing This override routine will remain active until EJECT is pressed 3 20 AM FM Stereo with Cassette Tape Player Bose If Equipped Included with the AM FM Stereo with Cassette Tape Player are six Bose high performance speakers and a six channel Bose amplifier Please see your dealer for details Playing the Radio PWR VOL Press this knob to turn the system on and off To increase volume turn the knob clockwise Turn it counterclockwise to decrease volume The knob is capable of being rotated continuously MUTE Press this button to silence the system Press it again to turn on the sound RECALL Display the time with the ignition off by pressing this button When the radio is playing press this button to recall the station frequency SCV Your system has a feature called Speed Compensated Volume SCV With SCV your audio system adjusts automatically to make up for road and wind noise as you drive Set the volume at the desired level Turn the control ring behind the upper knob clockwise to adjust the SCV Then as you drive SCV automatically increases the volume as necessary to overcome noise at any particular speed The volume level should always sound the same to you as you drive If you don t want to use SCV turn the control all the way down Each notch on the control ring all
249. ore you can try again When you try again you will only have three chances to enter the correct code before INOP appears If you lose or forget your code contact your dealer Disabling the Theft Deterrent Feature Enter your secret code as follows pause no more than 15 seconds between steps 1 Turn the ignition to ACCESSORY or RUN 2 Turn the radio off 3 Press the and 4 buttons together Hold them down until SEC shows on the display 4 Press MN and 000 will appear on the display 5 Press MN again to make the last two digits agree with your code 6 Press HR to make the first one or two digits agree with your code 7 Press AM FM after you have confirmed that the code matches the secret code you have written down The display will show indicating that the radio is no longer secured If the code entered is incorrect SEC will appear on the display The radio will remain secured until the correct code is entered When battery power is removed and later applied to a secured radio the radio won t turn on and LOC will appear on the display 3 39 To unlock a secured radio see Unlocking the Theft Deterrent Feature After a Power Loss earlier in this section Audio Steering Wheel Controls If Equipped If your vehicle has this feature you can control certain radio functions using the buttons on your steering wheel PROG Press this button to play a station you have programmed on the radio p
250. ort Trip City Scheduled Maintenance 75 000 Miles 125 000 km Continued When doing frequent trailer towing Uses such as found in taxi police or delivery service If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions change the fluid and filter every 50 000 miles 83 000 km Inspect engine air cleaner filter if you are driving in dusty conditions Replace filter if necessary An Emission Control Service See footnote Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote 78 000 Miles 130 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service Lubricate chassis components or every 3 months whichever occurs first See footnote Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote 7 24 DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY Short Trip City Scheduled Maintenance 81 000 Miles 135 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service See footnote Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant
251. ot need to be manually set However when your vehicle is new the compass may function erratically If it does CAL Calibration will appear on the display To correct the problem drive in a complete 360 circle three times and the compass will function normally Variance is the difference between magnetic north and geographic north In some areas the difference between the two can be great enough to cause false compass readings If this happens follow these instructions to set the variance for your particular location 2 59 1 Find your location on the zone map Note your zone number 2 Press and hold both the ON OFF and the US MET buttons The display will go off 3 After five seconds VAR CAL will appear on the display When it does release both buttons 4 Press US MET until your zone number appears on the display 5 Press ON OFF to enter your zone number Your variance is now set 2 60 Driver Information System If Equipped This system displays the outside air temperature compass direction and trip information in the overhead console US MET The US MET United States metric button allows you to switch the display between the English and metric system MODE The MODE button can be used to toggle between three modes of operation OFF COMP TEMP and TRIP COMP TEMP The display provides the outside temperature and one of eight compass readings to indicate the direction the vehicle is facing B
252. ou ll save time and energy See the next part Freeway Driving Treat a green light as a warning signal A traffic light is there because the corner is busy enough to need it When a light turns green and just before you start to move check both ways for vehicles that have not cleared the intersection or may be running the red light Freeway Driving Mile for mile freeways also called thruways parkways expressways turnpikes or superhighways are the safest of all roads But they have their own special rules 4 35 The most important advice on freeway driving is Keep up with traffic and keep to the right Drive at the same speed most of the other drivers are driving Too fast or too slow driving breaks a smooth traffic flow Treat the left lane on a freeway as a passing lane At the entrance there is usually a ramp that leads to the freeway If you have a clear view of the freeway as you drive along the entrance ramp you should begin to check traffic Try to determine where you expect to blend with the flow Try to merge into the gap at close to the prevailing speed Switch on your turn signal check your mirrors and glance over your shoulder as often as necessary Try to blend smoothly with the traffic flow Once you are on the freeway adjust your speed to the posted limit or to the prevailing rate if it s slower Stay in the right lane unless you want to pass Before changing lanes check your mirrors
253. our vehicle is pulling a trailer see Towing a Trailer in the Index 2 37 Parking Over Things That Burn Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust parts under your vehicle and ignite Don t park over papers leaves dry grass or other things that can burn 2 38 Engine Exhaust Engine exhaust can kill It contains the gas carbon monoxide CO which you can t see or smell It can cause unconsciousness and death You might have exhaust coming in if Your exhaust system sounds strange or different Your vehicle gets rusty underneath Your vehicle was damaged in a collision Your vehicle was damaged when driving over high points on the road or over road debris Repairs weren t done correctly Your vehicle or exhaust system had been modified improperly If you ever suspect exhaust is coming into your vehicle Drive it only with all the windows down to blow out any CO and Have your vehicle fixed immediately Running Your Engine While You re Parked Automatic Transmission It s better not to park with the engine running But if ever you have to here are some things to know Idling the engine with the climate control system off could allow dangerous exhaust into your vehicle see the earlier Caution under Engine Exhaust Also idling in a closed in place can let deadly carbon monoxide CO into your vehicle even if the fan switch is at the highest setting One place thi
254. ous Your reflexes perceptions attentiveness and judgment can be affected by even a small amount of alcohol You can have a serious or even fatal collision if you drive after drinking Please don t drink and drive or ride with a driver who has been drinking Ride home in a cab or if you re with a group designate a driver who will not drink Control of a Vehicle You have three systems that make your vehicle go where you want it to go They are the brakes the steering and the accelerator All three systems have to do their work at the places where the tires meet the road Sometimes as when you re driving on snow or ice it s easy to ask more of those control systems than the tires and road can provide That means you can lose control of your vehicle 4 7 Braking Braking action involves perception time and reaction time First you have to decide to push on the brake pedal That s perception time Then you have to bring up your foot and do it That s reaction time Average reaction time is about 3 4 of a second But that s only an average It might be less with one driver and as long as two or three seconds or more with another Age physical condition alertness coordination and eyesight all play a part So do alcohol drugs and frustration But even in 3 4 of a second a vehicle moving at 60 mph 100 km h travels 66 feet 20 m That could be a lot of distance in an emergency so keeping enou
255. owner s manual for the proper transmitter training procedure for your garage door opener brand 1 Find the training button on the garage door opener motor head unit The exact location and color will vary by garage door opener brand If you have difficulty finding the training button refer to your garage door opener owner s manual 2 71 2 Press the training button on the garage door opener motor head unit An indicator light will begin to flash when the motor head unit enters the training mode Following this step you have 30 seconds to start Step 3 3 Return to the HomeLink Transmitter in your vehicle and firmly press and release the HomeLink Transmitter button you have already programmed for two to three seconds Press and release the button again you may need to do this step up to three times to make sure that the HomeLink Transmitter has been trained to the garage door opener motor head unit Check that the training was successful The motor head unit indicator light should no longer be flashing The garage door opener should now recognize the HomeLink Transmitter You may either use the HomeLink Transmitter or the hand held transmitter to open the garage door 2 72 If after following these instructions you still have problems training the garage door opener call the manufacturer of the unit at 1 800 355 3515 Erasing Channels To erase all three programmed channels hold down the two outside buttons until
256. ows for more volume compensation at faster vehicle speeds Finding a Station AM FM Press this button to switch between AM FM1 and FM2 The display will show your selection TUNE Press this knob lightly so it extends Turn it to choose radio stations Push the knob back into its stored position when you re not using it SEEK Press the right arrow to tune to the next higher station and the left arrow to tune to the next lower station and stay there The sound will mute while seeking SCAN Press and hold SEEK for two seconds until SCAN appears on the display SCAN allows you to listen to stations for a few seconds The receiver will continue to scan and momentarily stop at each station until you press the button again The sound will mute while scanning PUSHBUTTONS The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to your favorite stations You can set up to 18 stations six AM six FM1 and six FM2 Just 1 Turn the radio on Press AM FM to select the band won Tune in the desired station gt Press and hold one of the six pushbuttons The sound will mute When it returns release the button Whenever you press that numbered button the station you set will return 5 Repeat the steps for each pushbutton 3 21 P SCAN The preset scan button lets you scan through your favorite stations stored on your pushbuttons Select either the AM FM1 or FM2 mode and then press P SCAN It will scan through each station
257. pidly reverse the tape The tape will rapidly reverse to the beginning of the cassette reel or until you press REV again The radio plays the last selected station during REV 3 33 5 Press this pushbutton to turn Dolby on and off Dolby is active when a tape is inserted in the remote cassette The double D symbol will appear on the display Dolby Noise Reduction is manufactured under a license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation Dolby and the double D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation FWD 6 Press this button to rapidly advance the tape The tape will rapidly advance to the end of the cassette reel or until you press FWD again The radio plays the last selected station during FWD PROG Press this button on the remote player to go from one side of the tape to the other TAPE Press the AM FM button to switch from the player and the radio when a tape is playing To return to the tape player press CD AUX The lighted arrow will appear next to the symbol and show the direction of play when a tape is active EJECT Press this button on the remote player to remove the tape EJECT can be used with either the ignition or radio off Also you must press EJECT before loading a cassette with the radio off to allow loading 3 34 Console Mounted CD Changer If Equipped A aE a With the compact disc changer you can play up to six discs continuously Normal size discs may be play
258. playing press the AM FM button To return to the player press CD AUX When a disc is playing the letters CD and the CD symbol will appear on the display If the radio is turned off the disc stays in the player and will resume playing at the point where it stopped EJECT Press this button to eject the disc from the player and play the radio When the same or a new disc is inserted the disc will start playing on track one Ifa compact disc is left sitting in the opening for more than a few seconds the player will pull the CD back in The radio will continue playing When the ignition is off press this button to load a CD AM FM Stereo with Compact Disc Player Bose If Equipped miii mrn prr Included with the AM FM Stereo with Compact Disc Player are six Bose high performance speakers and a six channel Bose amplifier Please see your dealer for details Playing the Radio PWR VOL Press this knob to turn the system on and off To increase volume turn this knob clockwise Turn it counterclockwise to decrease volume The knob is capable of rotating continuously MUTE Press this button to silence the system Press it again to turn on the sound RECALL Display the time with the ignition off by pressing this button When the radio is playing press this button to recall the station frequency SCV Your system has a feature called Speed Compensated Volume SCV With SCV your audio system adjusts automatically to ma
259. ponge and change to a clean area often A soft brush may be used if stains are stubborn If a ring forms on fabric after spot cleaning clean the entire area immediately or it will set Using Multi Purpose Interior Cleaner on Fabric 1 Vacuum and brush the area to remove any loose dirt 2 Always clean a whole trim panel or section Mask surrounding trim along stitch or welt lines 3 Mix powdered cleaner following the directions on the container label to form thick suds 4 Use suds only and apply with a clean sponge Don t saturate the material and don t rub it roughly 5 As soon as you ve cleaned the section use a sponge to remove the suds 6 Wipe cleaned area with a clean damp towel or cloth 7 Wipe with a clean cloth and let dry Special Fabric Cleaning Problems Stains caused by such things as catsup coffee black egg fruit fruit juice milk soft drinks vomit urine and blood can be removed as follows 1 Carefully scrape off excess stain then sponge the soiled area with cool water Ifa stain remains follow the multi purpose interior cleaner instructions described earlier 3 If an odor lingers after cleaning vomit or urine treat the area with a water baking soda solution 1 teaspoon 5 ml of baking soda to 1 cup 250 ml of lukewarm water 4 Let dry Stains caused by candy ice cream mayonnaise chili sauce and unknown stains can be removed as follows 1 Carefully scrape off excess
260. ps Brightness Control Turn the switch next to the headlamp switch up to make your instrument panel lights brighter Turn the switch all the way up to turn on the interior lamps Illuminated Entry Your vehicle is equipped with an illuminated entry feature When a door is opened the dome lamps will come on if the DOME OVERRIDE button is in the out position When the doors are closed or the front door handles are lifted and released the lamps will stay on for a short period of time and will turn off automatically If you use your keyless entry transmitter to unlock your vehicle the interior lights will come on for a short time whether or not the DOME OVERRIDE button is in the out position Exit Lighting With exit lighting the interior lamps will come on when you remove the key from the ignition to help you see while exiting the vehicle If the DOME OVERRIDE button is in the out position these lights will stay on for a short period of time and then will go out 2 52 Front Reading Lamps If Equipped Press the button near each lamp on the overhead console to turn the reading lamps on and off The lamps can be swiveled to point in the desired direction If you have the mini console press the lens on each lamp to turn it on or off Front Map Lamps If Equipped If your vehicle has optional front map lamps they are located on the inside rearview mirror They will automatically come on for approximatel
261. pull the turn signal lever toward you but not so far that you hear a click If your headlamps are in the automatic position or on low beam your high beam headlamps will turn on They ll stay on as long as you hold the lever toward you and the high beam indicator on the instrument panel cluster will come on Release the lever to return to normal operation Windshield Wipers You control the windshield wipers by turning the band with the wiper symbol on it For a single wiping cycle turn the band to MIST Hold it there until the wipers start then let go The wipers will stop after one wipe If you want more wipes hold the band on MIST longer You can set the wiper speed for a long or short delay between wipes This can be very useful in light rain or snow Turn the band to choose the delay time The closer to LO the shorter the delay For steady wiping at low speed turn the band away from you to the LO position For steady high speed wiping turn the band further to HI To stop the wipers move the band to the OFF position Be sure to clear ice and snow from the wiper blades before using them If they re frozen to the windshield carefully loosen or thaw them If your blades do become worn or damaged get new blades or blade inserts Windshield Washer There is a paddle marked with the windshield washer symbol at the top of the multifunction lever To spray washer fluid on the windshield push the paddle The wipers
262. put in be sure you get new approved GM replacement parts If you don t your brakes may no longer work properly For example if someone puts in brake linings that are wrong for your vehicle the balance between your front and rear brakes can change for the worse The braking performance you ve come to expect can change in many other ways if someone puts in the wrong replacement brake parts Battery Your new vehicle comes with a maintenance free ACDelco battery When it s time for a new battery get one that has the replacement number shown on the original battery s label We recommend an ACDelco battery 6 34 Vehicle Storage If you re not going to drive your vehicle for 25 days or more remove the black negative cable from the battery This will help keep your battery from running down Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas that can explode You can be badly hurt if you aren t careful See Jump Starting in the Index for tips on working around a battery without getting hurt Contact your dealer to learn how to prepare your vehicle for longer storage periods Also for your audio system see Theft Deterrent Feature in the Index Bulb Replacement Before you replace any bulbs be sure that all the lamps are off and the engine isn t running See Replacement Bulbs in the Index For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this section contact your GM dealer s se
263. r 10 minutes Then follow the hot check procedures 6 18 Checking Transmission Fluid Cold A cold check is made after the vehicle has been sitting for eight hours or more with the engine off and is used only as a reference Let the engine run at idle for five minutes if outside temperatures are 50 F 10 C or more If it s colder than 50 F 10 C you may have to idle the engine longer Should the fluid level be low during a cold check you must perform a hot check before adding fluid This will give you a more accurate reading of the fluid level Checking the Fluid Level Prepare your vehicle as follows Park your vehicle on a level place Keep the engine running With the parking brake applied place the shift lever in PARK P With your foot on the brake pedal move the shift lever through each gear range pausing for about three seconds in each range Then position the shift lever in PARK P Let the engine run at idle for three minutes or more Then without shutting off the engine follow these steps 1 The handle for the automatic transmission dipstick is located near the center of the engine compartment Flip the Z handle up and then pull pE out the dipstick and mmaa iay Peer Hf eee wipe it with a clean rag or paper towel 3 Check both sides of the dipstick and read the lower level The fluid level must be in the COLD area below the cross hatched area for a cold check or in
264. r Case in the Index Use the following procedure to correctly tow your vehicle on all four wheels 1 Firmly set the parking brake 5 Release the parking brake only after the vehicle being towed is firmly attached to the towing vehicle 2 Place the transmission in PARK P Ses os 6 Turn the ignition to OFF The OFF position unlocks 3 Securely attach the vehicle being towed to the the steering column and reduces battery drain tow vehicle Unlocking the steering column will allow the proper movement of the front wheels and tires during towing 4 45 Loading Your Vehicle GAWR FRT Cc RIM COLD TIRE PRESSURE Cc Co The Certification Tire label is found on the driver s door edge above the door latch The label shows the size of your original tires and the inflation pressures needed to obtain the gross weight capacity of your vehicle This is called the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle all occupants fuel cargo and trailer tongue weight if pulling a trailer 4 46 The Certification Tire label also tells you the maximum weights for the front and rear axles called Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR To find out the actual loads on your front and rear axles you need to go to a weigh station and weigh your vehicle Your dealer can help you with this Be sure to spread out your load equally on both sides of the centerline Never exceed the GVWR for your
265. r Compact Discs Handle discs carefully Store them in their original cases or other protective cases and away from direct sunlight and dust If the surface of a disc is soiled dampen a clean soft cloth in a mild neutral detergent solution and clean it wiping from the center to the edge Be sure never to touch the signal surface when handling discs Pick up discs by grasping the outer edges or the edge of the hole and the outer edge Care of Your Compact Disc Player The use of CD lens cleaner discs is not advised due to the risk of contaminating the lens of the CD optics with lubricants internal to the CD mechanism 3 44 Fixed Mast Antenna The fixed mast antenna can withstand most car washes without being damaged If the mast should ever become slightly bent you can straighten it out by hand If the mast is badly bent as it might be by vandals you should replace it Check every once in a while to be sure the mast is still tightened to the fender Section 4 Your Driving and the Road Here you ll find information about driving on different kinds of roads and in varying weather conditions We ve also included many other useful tips on driving 4 2 Your Driving the Road and Your Vehicle 4 30 Driving at Night 4 4 Defensive Driving 4 31 Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads 4 4 Drunken Driving 4 34 City Driving 4 7 Control of a Vehicle 4 35 Freeway Driving 4 36 4 8 Braking Before Leaving on a Long Trip 4 11 Steering 4
266. r attached on a hill If something goes wrong your rig could start to move People can be injured and both your vehicle and the trailer can be damaged But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill here s how to do it 1 Apply your regular brakes but don t shift into PARK P yet or into gear for a manual transmission Then turn your wheels into the curb if facing downhill or into traffic if facing uphill 2 Have someone place chocks under the trailer wheels 3 When the wheel chocks are in place release the regular brakes until the chocks absorb the load 4 Reapply the regular brakes Then apply your parking brake and then shift into PARK P or REVERSE R for a manual transmission If you have a four wheel drive vehicle with an automatic transfer case be sure the transfer case is in a drive gear not in NEUTRAL Release the regular brakes It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in PARK P with the parking brake firmly set Your vehicle can roll If you have left the engine running the vehicle can move suddenly You or others could be injured To be sure your vehicle won t move even when you re on fairly level ground use the steps that follow Always put the shift lever fully in PARK P with the parking brake firmly set If the transfer case on four wheel drive vehicles is in NEUTRAL your vehicle will be free to roll even if your shift lever
267. r clockwise 6 62 Name TRL TRN TRR TRN TRL B U VEH B U RT TURN LT TURN HDLP W W LT TRN RT TRN RR PRK TRL PRK LTHDLP RTHDLP FRPRK Usage Trailer Left Turn Trailer Right Turn Trailer Back Up Lamps Vehicle Back Up Lamps Right Turn Signal Front Left Turn Signal Front Not Used Left Turn Signal Rear Right Turn Signal Rear Right Rear Parking Lamps Trailer Park Lamps Left Headlamp Right Headlamp Front Parking Lamps Name INT BAT ENG I ECM B ABS ECM I A C W W PMP HORN BTSI B U LP IGN B RAP Usage I P Fuse Block Feed Engine Sensors Solenoids MAF CAM PURGE VENT Engine Control Module Fuel Pump Module Oil Pressure Anti Lock Brake System Engine Control Module Injectors Air Conditioning Not Used Horn Automatic Transmission Shift Lock Control System Back Up Lamps Column Feed IGN 2 3 4 Retained Accessory Power 6 63 Name LD LEV OXYSEN IGNE MIR LKS FOG LP IGNA STUD 2 PARKLP LR PRK IGN C HTDSEAT HVAC 6 64 Usage Not Used Oxygen Sensor Engine Mirrors Door Locks Fog Lamps Starting and Charging IGN 1 Accessory Feeds Electric Brake Parking Lamps Left Rear Parking Lamps Starter Solenoid Fuel Pump PRNDL Heated Seat HVAC System Name TRCHMSL RRDFOG TBC CRANK HAZLP VECHMSL HTDMIR ATC STOPLP RR W W Usage Trailer Center High Mount Stop Light Rear Defogger Truck Body Computer Clutch Switch NSBU Switch Hazard Lamps
268. r emission control system to function properly Therefore you should not have to add anything to the fuel In addition gasolines containing oxygenates such as ethers and ethanol and reformulated gasolines may be available in your area to contribute to clean air General Motors recommends that you use these gasolines particularly if they comply with the specifications described earlier NOTICE Your vehicle was not designed for fuel that contains methanol Don t use it It can corrode metal parts in your fuel system and also damage plastic and rubber parts That damage wouldn t be covered under your warranty Fuels in Foreign Countries If you plan on driving in another country outside the United States or Canada the proper fuel may be hard to find Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel not recommended in the previous text on fuel Costly repairs caused by use of improper fuel wouldn t be covered by your warranty To check on fuel availability ask an auto club or contact a major oil company that does business in the country where you ll be driving You can also write us at the following address for advice Just tell us where you re going and give your Vehicle Identification Number VIN General Motors Overseas Distribution Corporation 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Oshawa Ontario L1H 8P7 Filling Your Tank Gasoline vapor is highly flammable It burns violently and that can cause very bad injuries Don t s
269. r expense Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch up materials available from your dealer or other service outlets Larger areas of finish damage can be corrected in your dealer s body and paint shop Underbody Maintenance Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust control can collect on the underbody If these are not removed accelerated corrosion rust can occur on the underbody parts such as fuel lines frame floor pan and exhaust system even though they have corrosion protection 6 56 At least every spring flush these materials from the underbody with plain water Clean any areas where mud and other debris can collect Dirt packed in closed areas of the frame should be loosened before being flushed Your dealer or an underbody car washing system can do this for you Chemical Paint Spotting Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a chemical fallout Airborne pollutants can fall upon and attack painted surfaces on your vehicle This damage can take two forms blotchy ringlet shaped discolorations and small irregular dark spots etched into the paint surface Although no defect in the paint job causes this GM will repair at no charge to the owner the surfaces of new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within 12 months or 12 000 miles 20 000 km of purchase whichever occurs first GM Vehicle Care Appearance Materials 1052918 8 oz 0 237 L or All Protectant Protects leat
270. r get them on a hot part of the vehicle Some are dangerous if you breathe their fumes in a closed space When you use anything from a container to clean your vehicle be sure to follow the manufacturer s warnings and instructions And always open your doors or windows when you re cleaning the inside Never use these to clean your vehicle Gasoline Benzene Naphtha Carbon Tetrachloride Acetone Paint Thinner Turpentine Lacquer Thinner Nail Polish Remover They can all be hazardous some more than others and they can all damage your vehicle too 6 50 Don t use any of these unless this manual says you can In many uses these will damage your vehicle Alcohol Laundry Soap Bleach Reducing Agents Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle Use a vacuum cleaner often to get rid of dust and loose dirt Wipe vinyl leather plastic and painted surfaces with a clean damp cloth Cleaning of Fabric Carpet Your dealer has two cleaners Multi Purpose Interior Cleaner and Capture Non Solvent Dry Spot and Soil Remover for cleaning fabric and carpet They will clean normal spots and stains very well You can get GM approved cleaning products from your dealer See Appearance Care and Materials in the Index Here are some cleaning tips Always read the instructions on the cleaner label Clean up stains as soon as you can before they set Carefully scrape off any excess stain Use a clean cloth or s
271. r tires have an all season tread design the TPC number will be followed by an MS for mud and snow If you ever replace your tires with those not having a TPC Spec number make sure they are the same size load range speed rating and construction type bias bias belted or radial as your original tires 6 45 Mixing tires could cause you to lose control while driving If you mix tires of different sizes or types radial and bias belted tires the vehicle may not handle properly and you could have a crash Using tires of different sizes may also cause damage to your vehicle Be sure to use the same size and type tires on all wheels If you use bias ply tires on your vehicle the wheel rim flanges could develop cracks after many miles of driving A tire and or wheel could fail suddenly causing a crash Use only radial ply tires with the wheels on your vehicle 6 46 Uniform Tire Quality Grading The following information relates to the system developed by the United States National Highway Traffic Safety Administration which grades tires by treadwear traction and temperature performance This applies only to vehicles sold in the United States The grades are molded on the sidewalls of most passenger car tires The Uniform Tire Quality Grading system does not apply to deep tread winter type snow tires space saver or temporary use spare tires tires with nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches 25 to 30 cm or t
272. radiator pressure cap is hot Wait for the cooling system and radiator pressure cap to cool if you ever have to turn the pressure cap 2 Then keep turning the pressure cap but now push down as you turn it Remove the pressure cap 1 You can remove the radiator pressure cap when the cooling system including the radiator pressure cap and upper radiator hose is no longer hot Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwise until it first stops Don t press down while turning the pressure cap If you hear a hiss wait for that to stop A hiss means there is still some pressure left 3 Fill the radiator with the proper DEX COOL coolant mixture up to the base of the filler neck See Engine Coolant in the Index for more information about the proper coolant mixture 5 16 4 Then fill the coolant recovery tank to ADD mark 5 Put the cap back on the coolant recovery tank but leave the radiator pressure cap off 6 Start the engine and let it run until you can feel the upper radiator hose getting hot Watch out for the engine cooling fan 7 By this time the coolant level inside the radiator filler neck may be lower If the level is lower add more of the proper DEX COOL coolant mixture through the filler neck until the level reaches the base of the filler neck 8 Then replace the pressure cap At any time during this procedure if coolant begins to flow out of the filler neck reinstall the p
273. ransmission fluid doesn t require change 52 500 Miles 87 500 km Change engine oil and filter or every 12 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service MILES GE Lubricate chassis components or every 12 months whichever occurs first PF See footnote Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote 7 35 Long Trip Highway Scheduled Maintenance 60 000 Miles 100 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 12 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service Lubricate chassis components or every 12 months whichever occurs first See footnote Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these conditions Inheavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90 F 32 C or higher Inhilly or mountainous terrain When doing frequent trailer towing Uses such as found in taxi police or delivery service If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions change the flu
274. rash if you aren t wearing your safety belt even if you have air bags Wearing your safety belt during a crash helps reduce your chance of hitting things inside the vehicle or being ejected from it Air bags are supplemental restraints to the safety belts All air bags are designed to work with safety belts but don t replace them Air bags are designed to work only in moderate to severe crashes where the front of your vehicle hits something They aren t designed to inflate at all in rollover rear side or low speed frontal crashes And for unrestrained occupants air bags may provide less protection in frontal crashes than more forceful air bags have provided in the past Everyone in your vehicle should wear a safety belt properly whether or not there s an air bag for that person Neither the vehicle s safety belt system nor its air Air bags inflate with great force faster than the bag system is designed for them Young children blink of an eye If you re too close to an inflating and infants need the protection that a child air bag as you would be if you were leaning restraint system can provide Always secure forward it could seriously injure you Safety children properly in your vehicle To read how belts help keep you in position before and during see the part of this manual called Children a crash Always wear your safety belt even with air bags The driver should sit as far back as possible while st
275. reasons you should follow this schedule if you operate your vehicle under any of these conditions is that these conditions cause engine oil to break down sooner Short Trip City Intervals Every 3 000 Miles 5 000 km Engine Oil and Filter Change or 3 months whichever occurs first Chassis Lubrication or 3 months whichever occurs first Drive Axle Service or 3 months whichever occurs first Every 6 000 Miles 10 000 km Tire Rotation Every 15 000 Miles 25 000 km Engine Air Cleaner Filter Inspection if driving in dusty conditions Automatic Transmission Service severe conditions only Every 30 000 Miles 50 000 km Engine Air Cleaner Filter Replacement Fuel Filter Replacement Every 50 000 Miles 83 000 km Automatic Transmission Service normal conditions Continued 7 5 Scheduled Maintenance Short Trip City Intervals Every 60 000 Miles 100 000 km Engine Accessory Drive Belt Inspection Every 100 000 Miles 166 000 km Spark Plug Wire Inspection Spark Plug Replacement Positive Crankcase Ventilation PCV Valve Inspection Every 150 000 Miles 240 000 km Cooling System Service or every 60 months whichever occurs first These intervals only summarize maintenance services Be sure to follow the complete scheduled maintenance on the following pages 7 6 Long Trip Highway Definition Follow this scheduled maintenance only if none of the conditions from the Short Trip City
276. ree to roll even if your shift lever is in PARK P if your transfer case is in NEUTRAL So be sure the transfer case is in a drive gear not in NEUTRAL See Four Wheel Drive Automatic Transfer Case in the Index Always put the shift lever fully in PARK P with the parking brake firmly set If you re pulling a trailer see Towing a Trailer in the Index 2 34 Column Shift Lever 1 Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot and set the parking brake Move the shift lever into PARK P position like this Pull the lever toward you Console Shift Lever 1 Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot and set the parking brake 2 Move the shift lever into PARK P position like this Move the lever up as far as it will go Turn the ignition key to LOCK Remove the key and take it with you If you can leave your vehicle with the key your vehicle is in PARK P Hold in the button on the lever Push the lever all the way toward the front of the vehicle 3 Turn the ignition key to LOCK 4 Remove the key and take it with you If you can leave your vehicle with the key your vehicle is in PARK P 2 35 Leaving Your Vehicle With the Engine Running Automatic Transmission Only It can be dangerous to leave your vehicle with the engine running Your vehicle could move suddenly if the shift lever is not fully in PARK P with the parking brake firmly se
277. repairs not covered by your warranty To pull a trailer correctly follow the advice in this part and see your dealer for important information about towing a trailer with your vehicle 4 48 Your vehicle may be able to tow a trailer To identify what the vehicle trailering capacity is for your vehicle you should read the information in Weight of the Trailer that appears later in this section If yours was built with trailering options as many are it s ready for heavier trailers But trailering is different than just driving your vehicle by itself Trailering means changes in handling durability and fuel economy Successful safe trailering takes correct equipment and it has to be used properly That s the reason for this part In it are many time tested important trailering tips and safety rules Many of these are important for your safety and that of your passengers So please read this section carefully before you pull a trailer If You Do Decide To Pull A Trailer If you do here are some important points There are many different laws including speed limit restrictions having to do with trailering Make sure your rig will be legal not only where you live but also where you ll be driving A good source for this information can be state or provincial police Consider using a sway control if your trailer will weigh 2 000 Ibs 900 kg or less You should always use a sway control if your trail
278. reservoir full Are all windows clean inside and outside Wiper Blades Are they in good shape Fuel Engine Oil Other Fluids Have you checked all levels Lamps Are they all working Are the lenses clean Tires They are vitally important to a safe trouble free trip Is the tread good enough for long distance driving Are the tires all inflated to the recommended pressure Weather Forecasts What s the weather outlook along your route Should you delay your trip a short time to avoid a major storm system Maps Do you have up to date maps Highway Hypnosis Is there actually such a condition as highway hypnosis Or is it just plain falling asleep at the wheel Call it highway hypnosis lack of awareness or whatever There is something about an easy stretch of road with the same scenery along with the hum of the tires on the road the drone of the engine and the rush of the wind against the vehicle that can make you sleepy Don t let it happen to you If it does your vehicle can leave the road in less than a second and you could crash and be injured What can you do about highway hypnosis First be aware that it can happen Then here are some tips Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated with a comfortably cool interior Keep your eyes moving Scan the road ahead and to the sides Check your mirrors and your instruments frequently Ifyou get sleepy pull off the road into a rest
279. reset buttons on the selected band If a cassette tape is playing press this button to play the other side of the tape If a compact disc is playing in the console mounted CD changer if equipped press this button to go to the next available CD 3 40 SEEK Press the up arrow to tune to the next radio station and the down arrow to tune to the previous radio station If a cassette tape or compact disc is playing the player will advance with the up arrow and reverse with the down arrow MUTE Press this button to silence the system Press it again to turn on the sound VOL Press the up or down arrow to increase or decrease volume Understanding Radio Reception To help avoid hearing loss or damage AM e Adjust the volume control to the lowest setting Increase volume slowly until you hear comfortably The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM and clearly especially at night The longer range however can cause stations to interfere with each other AM can pick up noise from things like storms and power lines Try NOTICE reducing the treble to reduce this noise if you ever get it i FM Stereo Before you add any sound equipment to your FM stereo will give you the best sound but FM signals ae 7 po ape aie ae rolg will reach only about 10 to 40 miles 16 to 65 km Tall ee buildings or hills can interfere with FM signals causing can add what you want If you can it s very the sound to come a
280. ressure cap Be sure the arrows on the pressure cap line up like this Engine Fan Noise This vehicle has a clutched engine cooling fan When the clutch is engaged the fan spins faster to provide more air to cool the engine In most everyday driving conditions the clutch is not engaged This improves fuel economy and reduces fan noise Under heavy vehicle loading trailer towing and or high outside temperatures the fan speed increases when the clutch engages So you may hear an increase in fan noise This is normal and should not be mistaken as the transmission slipping or making extra shifts It is merely the cooling system functioning properly The fan will slow down when additional cooling is not required and the clutch disengages You may also hear this fan noise when you start the engine It will go away as the fan clutch disengages 5 18 If a Tire Goes Flat It s unusual for a tire to blow out while you re driving especially if you maintain your tires properly If air goes out of a tire it s much more likely to leak out slowly But if you should ever have a blowout here are a few tips about what to expect and what to do If a front tire fails the flat tire will create a drag that pulls the vehicle toward that side Take your foot off the accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly Steer to maintain lane position and then gently brake to a stop well out of the traffic lane A rear blowout
281. rican Medical Association a 180 Ib 82 kg person who drinks three 12 ounce 355 ml bottles of beer in an hour will end up with a BAC of about 0 06 percent The person would reach the same BAC by drinking three 4 ounce 120 ml glasses of wine or three mixed drinks if each had 1 1 2 ounces 45 ml of a liquor like whiskey gin or vodka It s the amount of alcohol that counts For example if the same person drank three double martinis 3 ounces or 90 ml of liquor each within an hour the person s BAC would be close to 0 12 percent A person who consumes food just before or during drinking will have a somewhat lower BAC level There is a gender difference too Women generally have a lower relative percentage of body water than men Since alcohol is carried in body water this means that a woman generally will reach a higher BAC level than a man of her same body weight when each has the same number of drinks The law in many U S states sets the legal limit at a BAC of 0 10 percent In a growing number of U S states and throughout Canada the limit is 0 08 percent In some other countries it s even lower The BAC limit for all commercial drivers in the United States is 0 04 percent The BAC will be over 0 10 percent after three to six drinks in one hour Of course as we ve seen it depends on how much alcohol is in the drinks and how quickly the person drinks them But the ability to drive is affected well below a
282. ription of problem Roadside Assistance is available 24 hours a day 7 days a week 365 days a year including weekends and holidays Should you have any questions about roadside assistance call the GMC Roadside Assistance Center or contact your dealer Roadside Assistance is not part of or included in the coverage provided by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty GMC reserves the right to make any changes or discontinue the Roadside Assistance program at any time without notification Canadian Roadside Assistance Vehicles purchased in Canada have an extensive Roadside Assistance program accessible from anywhere in Canada or the United States Please refer to the separate brochure provided by the dealer or call 1 800 268 6800 for emergency services Courtesy Transportation GMC has always exemplified quality and value in its offering of motor vehicles To enhance your ownership experience we and our participating dealers are proud to offer Courtesy Transportation a customer support program for new vehicles The Courtesy Transportation program is offered to retail purchase lease customers in conjunction with the Bumper to Bumper coverage provided by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Several transportation options are available when warranty repairs are required This will reduce your inconvenience during watranty repairs Plan Ahead When Possible When your vehicle requires warranty service you should contact your dealer and reque
283. rmine the preferred viscosity for your vehicle s engine see Engine Oil in the Index Hydraulic Brake System Windshield Washer Solvent Hydraulic Clutch System Parking Brake Cable Guides 50 50 mixture of clean drinkable water and use only GM Goodwrench DEX COOL or Havoline DEX COOL Coolant See Engine Coolant in the Index Engine Coolant Power Steering System USAGE FLUID LUBRICANT Delco Supreme 11 Brake Fluid GM Part No 12377967 or equivalent DOT 3 Brake Fluid GM Optikleen Washer Solvent GM Part No 1051515 or equivalent Hydraulic Clutch Fluid GM Part No 12345347 or equivalent DOT 3 Brake Fluid Chassis Lubricant GM Part No 12377985 or equivalent or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI 2 Category LB or GC LB GM Power Steering Fluid GM Part No 1052884 1 pint 1050017 1 quart or equivalent 7 49 USAGE FLUID LUBRICANT USAGE FLUID LUBRICANT Manual Synchromesh Transmission Fluid Rear Axle Axle Lubricant use only Transmission GM Part No 12345349 Locking GM Part No 1052271 Do not add or equivalent Differential friction modifier Automatic DEXRON III Automatic Automatic Automatic Transfer Case Fluid Transmission Transmission Fluid Transfer Case GM Part No 12378396 Multi Purpose Lubricant Rear Driveline Chassis Lubricant GM Part Superlube GM Part Center No 12377985 or equivalent or No 12346241 or equivalent Spline a
284. rn or a lane change if the arrows flash Flash to Pass more quickly than normal a signal bulb may be burned e Windshield Wipers out and other drivers won t see your turn signal Windshield Washer e Cruise Control If Equipped 2 43 If a bulb is burned out replace it to help avoid an accident If the arrows don t go on at all when you signal a turn check the fuse see Fuses and Circuit Breakers in the Index and for burned out bulbs If you have a trailer towing option with added wiring for the trailer lamps a different turn signal flasher is used With this flasher installed the signal indicator will flash even if a turn signal bulb is burned out Check the front and rear turn signal lamps regularly to make sure they are working Turn Signal On Chime If your turn signal is left on for more than 3 4 of a mile 1 2 km a chime will sound at each flash of the turn signal To turn off the chime move the turn signal lever to the off position Headlamp High Low Beam Changer To change the headlamps from low beam to high or high to low pull the multifunction lever all the way toward you Then release it 2 44 When the high beams are on this indicator light on the instrument panel cluster will also be on Flash to Pass This feature lets you use your high beam headlamps to signal a driver in front of you that you want to pass It works even if your headlamps are in the automatic position To use it
285. rol until you have the desired lumbar support To decrease lumbar support press and hold the rear of the control Memory Seat If Equipped If your vehicle has this feature the control on the driver s seat looks like this You can use this memory function to save your seat cushion and seatback settings by using the following procedure 1 Adjust the driver s seat to a safe and comfortable driving position 2 Press the SET button and then one of the two numbered memory buttons You will hear a chime for each button pushed to confirm that your settings have been placed in memory 3 To program your keyless entry transmitter press the UNLOCK button within five seconds of programming the memory button You will hear a chime to confirm programming of the transmitter When your vehicle is in PARK P for an automatic transmission or the parking brake is engaged for a manual transmission push and release the numbered memory button you just stored The seat will move to the set position You will hear one chime Pressing the UNLOCK button of a keyless entry transmitter will adjust the seat to the corresponding stored memory position You will hear one chime Repeat Steps 1 and 2 to readjust the seat The transmitter need not be reprogrammed unless it needs to correspond to the other numbered memory button To set the seat for a second driver follow the previous steps but use the other numbered button and the other keyless
286. rrent and past model GM vehicles To request an order form please specify year and model name of the vehicle OR ORDER TOLL FREE 1 800 551 4123 Monday Friday 8 00 AM 6 00 PM Eastern Time For Credit Card Orders Only VISA MasterCard Discover ORDER TOLL FREE Orders will be mailed within 10 days of receipt Please allow adequate time for postal NOTE For Credit Card Holders Only service If further information is needed write to the address shown below or call 1 800 551 4123 1 800 551 4123 Material cannot be returned for credit without packing slip with return Monday Friday 8 00 AM 6 00 PM EST information within 30 days of delivery On returns a re stocking fee may be applied FAX Orders Only 1 313 865 5927 against the original order Car amp Light Truck j Transmission Unit Repair Owner s Manual In Portfolio en NOTE Dealers and Companies please provide dealer or company name and also the Check or Money name of the person to whose attention the shipment should be sent Order payable to Michigan Purchasers Mail completed order form to Helm Inc USA funds add 6 sales tax HELM INCORPORATED e P O Box 07130 Detroit MI 48207 only do not send cash For purchases outside U S A please write to the above address for quotation C U S Order Processing 6 00 C MasterCard Canadian Postage C See Note Below CUSTOMER S NAME ATTENTION el Discover STREET ADDRESS NO P O BOX NUMBERS Number
287. rts of your vehicle as well as the tires If you spin the wheels too fast while shifting your transmission back and forth you can destroy your transmission For information about using tire chains on your vehicle see Tire Chains in the Index Rocking Your Vehicle To Get It Out First turn your steering wheel left and right That will clear the area around your front wheels If you have a four wheel drive vehicle shift into 4HI Then shift back and forth between REVERSE R and a forward gear or with a manual transmission between FIRST 1 or SECOND 2 and REVERSE R spinning the wheels as little as possible Release the accelerator pedal while you shift and press lightly on the accelerator pedal when the transmission is in gear By slowly spinning your wheels in the forward and reverse directions you will cause a rocking motion that may free your vehicle If that doesn t get you out after a few tries you may need to be towed out Or you can use your recovery hooks if your vehicle has them If you do need to be towed out see Towing Your Vehicle in the Index Using the Recovery Hooks Your vehicle may be equipped with recovery hooks The recovery hooks are provided at the front of your vehicle You may need to use them if you re stuck off road and need to be pulled to some place where you can continue driving 5 33 5 34 The recovery hooks when used are under a lot of force Always pull the vehic
288. running the gage shows the condition of the charging system Readings between the low and high warning zones indicate the normal operating range Readings in the low warning zone may occur when a large number of electrical accessories are operating in the vehicle and the engine is left at an idle for an extended period This condition is normal since the charging system is not able to provide full power at engine idle As engine speeds are increased this condition should correct itself as higher engine speeds allow the charging system to create maximum power 2 79 You can only drive for a short time with the reading in either warning zone If you must drive turn off all unnecessary accessories Readings in either warning zone indicate a possible problem in the electrical system Have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible Shift Light You have the shift light on the instrument panel cluster if you have a manual transmission SHIFT Shifting when the indicator light is on will help you get the best fuel economy See Shift Light in the Index 2 80 Brake System Warning Light When the ignition is on the brake system warning light will come on when you set your parking brake The light will stay on if your parking brake doesn t release fully If it stays on after your parking brake is fully released it means you have a brake problem Your vehicle s hydraulic brake system is divided into two parts If one p
289. rvice department Halogen Bulbs Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside and can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb You or others could be injured Be sure to read and follow the instructions on the bulb package Headlamps One Piece Composite Headlamp System 1 Open the hood 2 Remove the black retainer clips by lifting up 3 Pull the headlamp assembly out 4 Unplug the electrical connector 6 35 Turn the bulb assembly counterclockwise to remove it Put the new bulb assembly into the headlamp assembly and turn it clockwise until it is tight 7 Plug in the electrical connector 8 Put the headlamp assembly back into the vehicle Install the two retaining clips 1 Open the hood Ca eico Fri Pii ee ta a aL i mer i a 2 Remove the black retainer clips by lifting up 3 Pull the headlamp assembly out One Piece Front Turn Signal Lamp Assembly 1 Remove the headlamp assembly as shown under One Piece Composite Headlamp System earlier in this section 2 Twist the bulb socket to remove it from the headlamp assembly 4 Turn the bulb assembly counterclockwise to remove it 5 Put the new bulb assembly into the headlamp assembly and turn it clockwise until it is tight i 3 Pull the bulb straight out to remove it from the socket 6 Plug in the electrical connector A 4 Push the new bulb into the socket until it snaps 7 Put the headlamp assembly back
290. ry slippery situation You ll have a lot less traction or grip and will need to be very careful What s the worst time for this Wet ice Very cold snow or ice can be slick and hard to drive on But wet ice can be even more trouble because it may offer the least traction of all You can get wet ice when it s about freezing 32 F 0 C and freezing rain begins to fall Try to avoid driving on wet ice until salt and sand crews can get there Whatever the condition smooth ice packed blowing or loose snow drive with caution Accelerate gently Try not to break the fragile traction If you accelerate too fast the drive wheels will spin and polish the surface under the tires even more Your anti lock brakes improve your vehicle s stability when you make a hard stop on a slippery road Even though you have an anti lock braking system you ll want to begin stopping sooner than you would on dry pavement See Anti Lock in the Index e Allow greater following distance on any slippery road Watch for slippery spots The road might be fine until you hit a spot that s covered with ice On an otherwise clear road ice patches may appear in shaded areas where the sun can t reach around clumps of trees behind buildings or under bridges Sometimes the surface of a curve or an overpass may remain icy when the surrounding roads are clear If you see a patch of ice ahead of you brake before you
291. s Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before you start down a long or steep downgrade If you don t shift down you might have to use your brakes so much that they would get hot and no longer work well 4 56 On a long uphill grade shift down and reduce your speed to around 45 mph 70 km h to reduce the possibility of engine and transmission overheating If you have an automatic transmission you should use THIRD 3 when towing a trailer Operating your vehicle in THIRD 3 when towing a trailer will minimize heat buildup and extend the life of your transmission Or if you have a manual transmission it s better not to use FIFTH 5 gear just drive in FOURTH 4 gear or as you need to a lower gear See Tow Haul Mode in the Index When towing at high altitude on steep uphill grades consider the following Engine coolant will boil at a lower temperature than at normal altitudes If you turn your engine off immediately after towing at high altitude on steep uphill grades your vehicle may show signs similar to engine overheating To avoid this let the engine run while parked preferably on level ground with the automatic transmission in PARK P or the manual transmission out of gear and the parking brake applied for a few minutes before turning the engine off If you do get the overheat warning see Engine Overheating in the Index Parking on Hills You really should not park your vehicle with a traile
292. s Use lukewarm or cold water a soft cloth and a car washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses Follow instructions under Washing Your Vehicle Finish Care Occasional waxing or mild polishing of your vehicle by hand may be necessary to remove residue from the paint finish You can get GM approved cleaning products from your dealer See Appearance Care and Materials in the Index Your vehicle has a basecoat clearcoat paint finish The clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored basecoat Always use waxes and polishes that are non abrasive and made for a basecoat clearcoat paint finish NOTICE Machine compounding or aggressive polishing on a basecoat clearcoat paint finish may dull the finish or leave swirl marks Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other salts ice melting agents road oil and tar tree sap bird droppings chemicals from industrial chimneys etc can damage your vehicle s finish if they remain on painted surfaces Wash the vehicle as soon as possible If necessary use non abrasive cleaners that are marked safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging weather and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a period of years You can help to keep the paint finish looking new by keeping your vehicle garaged or covered whenever possible Cleaning Aluminum Wheels If Equipped Keep your wheels clean usi
293. s 20 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service Lubricate chassis components or every 3 months whichever occurs first See footnote Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote 7 10 Short Trip City Scheduled Maintenance 15 000 Miles 25 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service Lubricate chassis components or every 3 months whichever occurs first See footnote Inspect engine air cleaner filter if you are driving in dusty conditions Replace filter if necessary An Emission Control Service See footnote Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY under one or more of these conditions In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90 F 32 C or higher In hilly or mountainous terrain When doing frequent trailer towing Uses
294. s accident When driving downhill avoid turns that take you across the incline of the hill A hill that s not too steep to drive down may be too steep to drive across You could roll over if you don t drive straight down Never go downhill with the transmission in NEUTRAL N or with the clutch pedal depressed in a manual shift This is called free wheeling Your brakes will have to do all the work and could overheat and fade Stop your vehicle by applying the regular brakes Apply the parking brake Shift to PARK P or to NEUTRAL N with the manual transmission and while still braking restart the engine Shift back to a low gear release the parking brake and drive straight down If the engine won t start get out and get help 4 25 Driving Across an Incline Sooner or later an off road trail will probably go across the incline of a hill If this happens you have to decide whether to try to drive across the incline Here are some things to consider e A hill that can be driven straight up or down may be too steep to drive across When you go straight up or down a hill the length of the wheel base the distance from the front wheels to the rear wheels reduces the likelihood the vehicle will tumble end over end But when you drive across an incline the much more narrow track width the distance between the left and right wheels may not prevent the vehicle from tilting and rolling over Also dri
295. s can happen is a garage Exhaust with CO can come in easily NEVER park ina garage with the engine running Another closed in place can be a blizzard See Blizzard in the Index 2 39 It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in PARK P with the parking brake firmly set Your vehicle can roll Don t leave your vehicle when the engine is running unless you have to If you ve left the engine running the vehicle can move suddenly You or others could be injured To be sure your vehicle won t move even when you re on fairly level ground always set your parking brake and move the shift lever to PARK P If you have four wheel drive your vehicle will be free to roll even if your shift lever is in PARK P if your transfer case is in NEUTRAL So be sure the transfer case is in a drive gear not in NEUTRAL See Four Wheel Drive Automatic Transfer Case in the Index 2 40 Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle won t move See Shifting Into PARK P in the Index If you re pulling a trailer see Towing a Trailer in the Index Locking Rear Axle If your vehicle has this feature your locking rear axle can give you additional traction on snow mud ice sand or gravel It works like a standard axle most of the time but when one of the rear wheels has no traction and the other does this feature will allow the wheel with trac
296. s it more than once the disc will advance further Sound is muted in this mode RDM 2 Press this button to play the tracks on the disc in random order While in the RDM mode RANDOM appears on the display Press RDM again to return to normal play NEXT 3 Press NEXT or the SEEK right arrow to search for the next selection If you hold this button or press it more than once the disc will advance further The next track number will appear on the display Sound is muted in this mode 3 31 REV 4 Press and hold REV to return rapidly to a favorite passage You will hear the disc selection play at high speed while you press the REV button This allows you to listen and find out when the disc is at the desired selection Release REV to resume playing FWD 6 Press and hold this button to advance rapidly within a track You will hear the disc selection play at high speed while you press the FWD button This allows you to listen and find out when the disc is at the desired selection Release FWD to resume playing RECALL Press this button to see what track is playing Press it again within five seconds to see how long the CD has been playing that track Elapsed time is displayed in minutes and seconds The track number will also appear when a new track begins to play Press RECALL again to return to the time display AM FM While in the CD mode press this button to stop playing the CD and play the radio The CD symbol will sti
297. s the sound between the speakers Push these knobs back into their stored positions when you re not using them Playing a Cassette Tape Your tape player is built to work best with tapes that are up to 30 to 45 minutes long on each side Tapes longer than that are so thin they may not work well in this player To load a cassette tape with the ignition off press EJECT or RECALL Then insert the cassette tape If the ignition is on but the radio is off the tape will begin playing Once the tape is playing use the VOL BAL FADE BASS and TREB controls just as you do for the radio The tape symbol and a direction arrow will be on the display whenever a tape is being played Anytime a tape is inserted the top side is selected for play first The player automatically senses if the cassette tape is metal or CrO and adjusts for best playback sound PREV 1 Press the PREV button or the SEEK left arrow to search for the previous selection A minimum three second blank gap is required for the player to stop at the beginning of the selection The tape direction arrow will blink during the SEEK operation PROG 2 Press this button to switch from one side of the tape to the other NEXT 3 Press the NEXT button or the SEEK right arrow to search for the next selection A minimum three second blank gap is required for the player to stop at the beginning of the selection The tape direction arrow will blink during the SEEK operat
298. se are listed in Part D Make sure whoever services your vehicle uses these All parts should be replaced and all necessary repairs done before you or anyone else drives the vehicle These schedules are for vehicles that carry passengers and cargo within recommended limits You will find these limits on your vehicle s Certification Tire label See Loading Your Vehicle in the Index are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal driving limits are driven off road in the recommended manner See Off Road Driving With Your Four Wheel Drive Vehicle in the Index use the recommended fuel See Fuel in the Index Selecting the Right Schedule First you ll need to decide which of the two schedules is right for your vehicle Here s how to decide which schedule to follow Scheduled Maintenance Short Trip City Definition Follow the Short Trip City Scheduled Maintenance if any one of these conditions is true for your vehicle Most trips are less than 5 to 10 miles 8 to 16 km This is particularly important when outside temperatures are below freezing Most trips include extensive idling such as frequent driving in stop and go traffic You operate your vehicle in dusty areas or off road frequently You frequently tow a trailer or use a carrier on top of your vehicle If the vehicle is used for delivery service police taxi or other commercial application One of the
299. se it from its stored position Turn the control clockwise to adjust the sound to the front speakers and counterclockwise for the rear speakers The middle position balances the sound between the speakers Push these knobs back into their stored positions when you re not using them Playing a Compact Disc PWR Press this knob to turn the system on You can also turn the system on when you insert a compact disc into the player with the ignition on Insert a disc partway into the slot label side up The player will pull it in Wait a few seconds and the disc should play CD and a CD symbol will also appear on the display Anytime you are playing a CD the letters CD will be next to the CD symbol If the disc comes back out and ERR appears on the display it could be that You are driving on a very rough road The disc should play when the road gets smoother The disc is upside down It is dirty scratched or wet It is very humid If so wait about an hour and try again The disc player is very hot Press RECALL to make ERR go off the display 3 27 PREV 1 Press PREV or the SEEK left arrow to search for the previous selection If you hold this button or press it more than once the disc will advance further Sound is muted in this mode RDM 2 Press this button to play the tracks on the disc in random order While in the RDM mode RANDOM appears on the display Press RDM again to return to normal play
300. se the SERVICE ENGINE SOON light to come on Modifications to these systems could lead to costly repairs not covered by your warranty This may also result in a failure to pass If you are towing a trailer reduce the amount of a required Emission Inspection Maintenance test cargo being hauled as soon as it is possible The following may prevent more serious damage to your vehicle Avoiding hard accelerations e Avoiding steep uphill grades e 2 83 If the light stops flashing and remains on steady see If the Light Is On Steady following If the light continues to flash when it is safe to do so stop the vehicle Find a safe place to park your vehicle Turn the key off wait at least 10 seconds and restart the engine If the light remains on steady see If the Light Is On Steady following If the light is still flashing follow the previous steps and drive the vehicle to your dealer or qualified service center for service If the Light Is On Steady You may be able to correct the emission system malfunction by considering the following Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle If so reinstall the fuel cap making sure to fully install the cap See Filling Your Tank in the Index The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or improperly installed A loose or missing fuel cap will allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere A few driving trips with the cap properly insta
301. section Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to Children Everyone in a vehicle needs protection That includes infants and all children smaller than adult size Neither the distance traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes the need for everyone to use safety restraints In fact the law in every state in the United States and in every Canadian province says children up to some age must be restrained while in a vehicle Smaller Children and Babies Children who are up against or very close to any air bag when it inflates can be seriously injured or killed Air bags plus lap shoulder belts offer the best protection for adults but not for young children and infants Neither the vehicle s safety belt system nor its air bag system is designed for them Young children and infants need the protection that a child restraint system can provide Always secure children properly in your vehicle 1 39 Smaller children and babies should always be restrained in a child or infant restraint The instructions for the restraint will say whether it is the right type and size for your child A very young child s hip bones are so small that a regular belt might not stay low on the hips as it should Instead the belt will likely be over the child s abdomen In a crash the belt would apply force right on the child s abdomen whi
302. ses heater hoses radiator water pump or somewhere else in the cooling system 5 11 NOTICE When adding coolant it is important that you use only DEX COOL silicate free coolant If coolant other than DEX COOL is added to the system premature engine heater core or radiator corrosion may result In addition the engine coolant will require change sooner at 30 000 miles 50 000 km or 24 months whichever occurs first Damage caused by the use of coolant other than DEX COOL is not covered by your new vehicle warranty NOTICE If there seems to be no leak start the engine again See if the engine cooling fan speed increases when idle speed is doubled by pushing the accelerator pedal down If it doesn t your vehicle needs service Turn off the engine Heater and radiator hoses and other engine parts can be very hot Don t touch them If you do you can be burned Don t run the engine if there is a leak If you run the engine it could lose all coolant That could cause an engine fire and you could be burned Get any leak fixed before you drive the vehicle Engine damage from running your engine without coolant isn t covered by your warranty 5 12 How to Add Coolant to the Coolant Recovery Tank NOTICE If you haven t found a problem yet but the coolant level isn t at the ADD mark add a 50 50 mixture of clean In cold weather water can freeze and crack the drinkable water and DEX COOL
303. sette or until you press FWD again The radio will play the last selected station while forwarding the tape The tape direction arrow will blink during the forward operation AM FM Press this button to switch from a tape to the radio TAPE AUX Press this button to return to the tape player when playing the radio The lighted arrow will appear and show the direction of play when a tape is in the active mode EJECT Press this button to remove the tape The radio will now play EJECT can be used with either the ignition or radio off To load a cassette tape with the ignition or radio off press EJECT before loading the cassette CLN If this message appears on the display the cassette tape player needs to be cleaned It will still play tapes but you should clean it as soon as possible to prevent damage to the tapes and player See Care of Your Cassette Tape Player in the Index After you clean the player press and hold EJECT for five seconds to reset the CLN indicator The radio will display to show the indicator was reset 3 19 CD Adapter Kits It is possible to use a portable CD player adapter kit with your cassette tape player after activating the bypass feature on your tape player To activate the bypass feature use the following steps 1 Turn the ignition to RUN or ACCESSORY 2 Turn the radio off 3 Press and hold the TAPE AUX button for five seconds The tape symbol on the display will flash for two sec
304. sh you could go into it receiving neck or other injuries The lap belt can t do its job either In a crash the belt could go up over your abdomen The belt forces would be there not at your pelvic bones This could cause serious internal injuries But don t have a seatback reclined if your vehicle For proper protection when the vehicle is in is moving motion have the seatback upright Then sit well back in the seat and wear your safety belt properly Head Restraints Head restraints are fixed on some models and adjustable on others Slide an adjustable head restraint up or down so that the top of the restraint is closest to the top of your ears This position reduces the chance of a neck injury in a crash The rear seat head restraints in your vehicle are adjustable Slide an adjustable head restraint up or down so that the top of the restraint is closest to the top of your ears This position reduces the chance of a neck injury in a crash Push the button located under the rear seat head restraint to raise or lower it After releasing the button push and pull on the head restraint to make sure it s locked in place Seatback Latches The front seatback folds forward to let people get into the back seat or to access the storage area behind the seat To fold the front seatback forward move the handle on the side of the seat rearward and pull the seatback forward To return the seatback to the upright positio
305. sistance 1 800 268 6800 All Overseas Locations GMODC Customer Communication Centre 169 007 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Oshawa Ontario L1H 8P7 Telephone 905 644 4112 Fax 905 644 4866 Caribbean Numbers 1 800 496 9992 English Puerto Rico 1 800 496 9993 Spanish Puerto Rico 1 800 751 4135 English Dominican Republic 1 800 751 4136 Spanish Dominican Republic 1 800 496 9994 U S Virgin Islands 1 800 389 0009 Bahamas 1 800 534 0122 Bermuda Barbados Antigua amp B V I If toll free service is not available in the Caribbean call Puerto Rico 1 787 763 1315 GM Mobility Program for Persons with Disabilities This program available to qualified applicants can reimburse you up to 1 000 toward aftermarket driver or passenger adaptive equipment you may require for your vehicle hand controls wheelchair scooter lifts etc This program can also provide you with free resource information such as area driver assessment centers and mobility equipment installers The program is available for a limited period of time from the date of vehicle purchase lease See your dealer for more details or call the GM Mobility Assistance Center at 1 800 323 9935 Text telephone TTY users call 1 800 833 9935 GM of Canada also has a Mobility Program Call 1 800 GM DRIVE 463 7483 for details When calling from outside Canada please dial 1 905 644 3063 All TTY users call 1 800 263 3830 8 5 Roadside Assistance
306. sition could drain your battery and prevent you from starting your vehicle LOCK B This position locks your ignition steering wheel and transmission It s a theft deterrent feature You will only be able to remove your key when the ignition is turned to LOCK On manual transmission vehicles turning the key to LOCK will lock the steering column and result in a loss of ability to steer the vehicle This could cause a collision If you need to turn the engine off while the vehicle is moving turn the key only to OFF Don t press the key release button while the vehicle is moving NOTICE If your key seems stuck in LOCK and you can t turn it be sure you are using the correct key if so is it all the way in If it is then turn the steering wheel left and right while you turn the key hard But turn the key only with your hand Using a tool to force it could break the key or the ignition switch If none of this works then your vehicle needs service OFF C This position lets you turn off the engine but still turn the steering wheel Use OFF if you must have your vehicle in motion while the engine is off for example if your vehicle is being towed RUN D This is the position for driving START E This position starts your engine 2 17 Key Release Button The key cannot be removed from the ignition of manual transmission vehicles unless the key release button is used To remove the key on manu
307. smission taking your key out also locks your transmission Also remember to lock the doors Parking at Night Park in a lighted spot close all windows and lock your vehicle Remember to keep your valuables out of sight Put them in a storage area or take them with you Parking Lots If you park in a lot where someone will be watching your vehicle it s best to lock it up and take your keys But what if you have to leave your ignition key What if you have to leave something valuable in your vehicle Put your valuables in a storage area like your glove box e If your vehicle has a remote keyless entry system take the transmitter with you Lock all the doors except the driver s 2 13 Content Theft Deterrent If Equipped Your vehicle may be equipped with a content theft deterrent alarm system With this system the SECURITY light will flash as you open the door if your ignition is off SECURITY This light reminds you to activate the theft deterrent system Here s how to do it 1 Open the door 2 Lock the door with the power door lock switch or the remote keyless entry transmitter The SECURITY light should come on and stay on 3 Close all doors The SECURITY light should go off after approximately 30 seconds The alarm is not armed until the SECURITY light goes off 2 14 If a door is opened without the key or the remote keyless entry transmitter the alarm will go off Your vehicle
308. so see warning labels on your vehicle They use the same words CAUTION or NOTICE Vehicle Symbols These are some of the symbols you may find on your vehicle For example These symbols These symbols These symbols These symbols Here are some these symbols are important have to do with are on some of are used on other symbols are used on an for you and your lamps your controls warning and you may see original battery your passengers indicator lights whenever your aa MASTER s s WINDSHIELD CAUTION ii LIGHTING Ay WIPER SZ POSSIBLE SWITCH 7 ENGINE INJURY COOLANT jon E m PROTECT EYES BY SHIELDING N TEMP DOOR LOCK al TURN amp D WINDSHIELD UNLOCK SIGNALS WASHER BATTERY CHARGING SYSTEM noes LI GP sme D WARNING A FLASHER REAR COOLANT wA SPEAKER Y WINDOW m PARKING M CAUSTIC LAMPS N WINDSHIELD BURNS AVOID SPARKS OR FLANES power GMG DAYTIME DEFOGGER winpow RUNNING O LAMPS BATTERY FASTEN ACID COULD ke SEAT DEFROSTER CRUSE BELTS HAZARD ENGINE OIL PRESSURE 7 SPARKOR ily COULD Ew VENTILATING EXPLODE AIR BAG TN FOG LAMPS x FAN BATTERY ANTI LOCK Ges BRAKES Service Station Guide Battery See Section 6 Cooling System Tire Pressure See Section 5 See Section 6 For a More Spare Tire Pressure Detailed Look at See Section 6 What s Under the Hood See Section 6 Hood Release See Section 6 ia a Engine Oil Dipstick
309. ss your vehicle is moving less than 3mph 4 8 km h with the transmission in NEUTRAL N or with the clutch pedal pressed for vehicles with manual transmission 2 31 Shifting to NEUTRAL To shift the transfer case to NEUTRAL first make sure the vehicle is parked so that it will not roll 1 Set the parking brake KRW N 10 Start the vehicle Connect the vehicle to the towing vehicle Put the transmission in NEUTRAL N or have the clutch pedal pressed for vehicles with manual transmission Shift the transfer case to 2HI Simultaneously press and hold the 2HI and 4LO buttons for 10 seconds The red NEUTRAL light will come on when the transfer case shift to NEUTRAL is complete Shift the transmission to REVERSE R for one second then shift the transmission to DRIVE D for one second or FIRST 1 for vehicles with manual transmission Turn the ignition to OFF Place the transmission shift lever in PARK P or FIRST 1 for vehicles with manual transmission Release the parking brake prior to towing 2 32 Shifting Out of NEUTRAL To shift out of NEUTRAL 1 Set the parking brake and apply the regular brake pedal 2 Start the vehicle with the transmission in PARK P or FIRST 1 for vehicles with manual transmission 3 Press the button for the desired transfer case position 2HI 4HI AUTO 4WD or 4LO 4 Put the transmission in NEUTRAL N or press the clutch pedal for vehicles w
310. ssed for vehicles with manual transmission The preferred method for shifting into 4LO is to have your vehicle moving or 2 mph 1 6 to 3 2 km h Press and release the 4LO switch You must wait for the 4LO indicator light to stop flashing and remain illuminated before shifting your transmission into gear If the 4LO switch is pressed when your vehicle is in gear and or moving the 4LO indicator light will flash for 30 seconds and not complete the shift unless your vehicle is moving less than 3 mph 4 8 km h and the transmission is in NEUTRAL N or with the clutch pedal pressed for vehicles with manual transmission After 30 seconds the transfer case will return to the setting last chosen Shifting Out of 4LO To shift from 4LO to 4HI AUTO 4WD or 2HI your vehicle must be stopped or moving less than 3 mph 4 8 km h with the transmission in NEUTRAL N or with the clutch pedal pressed for vehicles with manual transmission and the engine running The preferred method for shifting out of 4LO is to have your vehicle moving 1 or 2 mph 1 6 to 3 2 km h Press and release the 4HI AUTO 4WD or 2HI switch You must wait for the 4HI AUTO 4WD or 2HI indicator light to stop flashing and remain illuminated before shifting your transmission into gear If the 4HI AUTO 4WD or 2HI switch is pressed when your vehicle is in gear and or moving the 4HI AUTO 4WD or 2HI indicator light will flash for 30 seconds but will not complete the shift unle
311. st is going on This is normal e If there s a problem with the anti lock brake system this warning light will stay on See Anti Lock Brake System Warning Light in the Index Here s how anti lock works Let s say the road is wet You re driving safely Suddenly an animal jumps out in front of you You slam on the brakes Here s what happens with ABS A computer senses that wheels are slowing down If one of the wheels is about to stop rolling the computer will separately work the brakes at each front wheel and at both rear wheels The anti lock system can change the brake pressure faster than any driver could The computer is programmed to make the most of available tire and road conditions You can steer around the obstacle while braking hard As you brake your computer keeps receiving updates on wheel speed and controls braking pressure accordingly 4 10 Remember Anti lock doesn t change the time you need to get your foot up to the brake pedal or always decrease stopping distance If you get too close to the vehicle in front of you you won t have time to apply your brakes if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops Always leave enough room up ahead to stop even though you have anti lock brakes Using Anti Lock Don t pump the brakes Just hold the brake pedal down firmly and let anti lock work for you You may feel the brakes vibrate or you may notice some noise but this is normal
312. st an appointment By scheduling a service appointment and advising your service consultant of your transportation needs your dealer can help minimize your inconvenience If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service department immediately keep driving it until it can be scheduled for service unless of course the problem is safety related If it is please call your dealership let them know this and ask for instructions 8 8 If the dealer requests that you simply drop the vehicle off for service you are urged to do so as early in the work day as possible to allow for same day repair Transportation Options Warranty service can generally be completed while you wait However if you are unable to wait GMC helps minimize your inconvenience by providing several transportation options Depending on the circumstances your dealer can offer you one of the following Shuttle Service Participating dealers can provide you with shuttle service to get you to your destination with minimal interruption of your daily schedule This includes a one way shuttle ride to a destination up to 10 miles from the dealership Public Transportation or Fuel Reimbursement If your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs reimbursement up to 30 per day five days maximum may be available for the use of public transportation such as taxi or bus In addition should you arrange transportation through a friend or relative reimbursement for re
313. st through large water puddles or even going through some car washes can cause problems too The water may affect your brakes Try to avoid puddles But if you can t try to slow down before you hit them Wet brakes can cause accidents They won t work as well in a quick stop and may cause pulling to one side You could lose control of the vehicle After driving through a large puddle of water or a car wash apply your brake pedal lightly until your brakes work normally Hydroplaning Hydroplaning is dangerous So much water can build up under your tires that they can actually ride on the water This can happen if the road is wet enough and you re going fast enough When your vehicle is hydroplaning it has little or no contact with the road Hydroplaning doesn t happen often But it can if your tires do not have much tread or if the pressure in one or more is low It can happen if a lot of water is standing on the road If you can see reflections from trees telephone poles or other vehicles and raindrops dimple the water s surface there could be hydroplaning Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds There just isn t a hard and fast rule about hydroplaning The best advice is to slow down when it is raining Driving Through Deep Standing Water NOTICE If you drive too quickly through deep puddles or standing water water can come in through your engine s air intake and badly damage your engine Nev
314. stain 2 First clean with cool water and allow to dry completely 3 Ifa stain remains follow instructions for Multi Purpose Interior Cleaner 6 51 Cleaning Vinyl Use warm water and a clean cloth Rub with aclean damp cloth to remove dirt You may have to do it more than once Things like tar asphalt and shoe polish will stain if you don t get them off quickly Use a clean cloth and a vinyl leather cleaner See your dealer for this product Cleaning Leather Use a soft cloth with lukewarm water and a mild soap or saddle soap and wipe dry with a soft cloth Then let the leather dry naturally Do not use heat to dry For stubborn stains use a leather cleaner See your dealer for this product Never use oils varnishes solvent based or abrasive cleaners furniture polish or shoe polish on leather Soiled or stained leather should be cleaned immediately If dirt is allowed to work into the finish it can harm the leather 6 52 Cleaning the Top of the Instrument Panel Use only mild soap and water to clean the top surfaces of the instrument panel Sprays containing silicones or waxes may cause annoying reflections in the windshield and even make it difficult to see through the windshield under certain conditions Cleaning Interior Plastic Components Use only a mild soap and water solution on a soft cloth or sponge Commercial cleaners may affect the surface finish Care of Safety Belts Keep
315. stations SEEK Press the right arrow to tune to the next higher station and the left arrow to tune to the next lower station and stay there SCAN Select either AM FM1 or FM2 mode and press both SEEK buttons to listen to a few seconds of each radio station SCAN will light up on the display The radio will automatically SCAN to the next higher station play that station for a few seconds then SCAN to the next higher station Press VOLUME or both SEEK buttons to stop scanning 3 11 PUSHBUTTONS The four numbered pushbuttons let you return to your favorite stations You can set up to 14 stations seven AM and seven FM Just 1 Turn the radio on 2 Press AM FM to select the band 3 Tune in the desired station 4 Press SET SET will appear on the display 5 Press one of the four pushbuttons within five seconds Whenever you press that numbered button the station you set will return 6 Repeat the steps for each pushbutton In addition to the four stations already set up to three more stations may be preset on each band by pressing two adjoining buttons at the same time Just 1 Tune in the desired station 2 Press SET SET will appear on the display 3 Press two adjoining buttons at the same time within five seconds Whenever you press the same two buttons the station you set will return 4 Repeat the steps for each pair of pushbuttons 3 12 Setting the Tone BASS Slide this lever up or down to
316. stop suddenly or change direction quickly When you drive over obstacles or rough terrain keep a firm grip on the steering wheel Ruts troughs or other surface features can jerk the wheel out of your hands if you re not prepared When you drive over bumps rocks or other obstacles your wheels can leave the ground If this happens even with one or two wheels you can t control the vehicle as well or at all Because you will be on an unpaved surface it s especially important to avoid sudden acceleration sudden turns or sudden braking In a way off road driving requires a different kind of alertness from driving on paved roads and highways There are no road signs posted speed limits or signal lights You have to use your own good judgment about what is safe and what isn t Drinking and driving can be very dangerous on any road And this is certainly true for off road driving At the very time you need special alertness and driving skills your reflexes perceptions and judgment can be affected by even a small amount of alcohol You could have a serious or even fatal accident if you drink and drive or ride with a driver who has been drinking See Drunken Driving in the Index 4 19 Driving on Off Road Hills Off road driving often takes you up down or across a hill Driving safely on hills requires good judgment and an understanding of what your vehicle can and can t do There are some hills that simpl
317. stored on your pushbuttons and stop for a few seconds before continuing to scan through all of the pushbuttons Press P SCAN again or one of the pushbuttons to stop scanning to listen to a specific preset station P SCAN will light up on the display while in this mode If one of the stations stored on a pushbutton is too weak for the location you are in the radio display will show the channel number P1 P6 for several seconds before advancing to the next preset station Setting the Tone BASS Press lightly on this knob to release it from its stored position Turn the knob clockwise to increase bass and counterclockwise to decrease bass TREB Press lightly on this knob to release it from its stored position Turn the knob clockwise to increase treble and counterclockwise to decrease treble If a station is weak or noisy you may want to decrease the treble Push these knobs back into their stored positions when you re not using them 3 22 Adjusting the Speakers BAL Press lightly on this knob to release it from its stored position Turn the control clockwise to adjust sound to the right speakers and counterclockwise to adjust sound to the left speakers The middle position balances the sound between the speakers FADE Press lightly on this knob to release it from its stored position Turn the control clockwise to adjust the sound to the front speakers and counterclockwise for the rear speakers The middle position balance
318. such as found in taxi police or delivery service If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions change the fluid and filter every 50 000 miles 83 000 km 7 11 Short Trip City Scheduled Maintenance 18 000 Miles 30 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service See footnote Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote 21 000 Miles 35 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service See footnote Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote 7 12 Lubricate chassis components or every 3 months whichever occurs first Lubricate chassis components or every 3 months whichever occurs first DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY Short Trip City Scheduled Maintenance 24 000 Miles 40 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service See footnote Check rear front axle fluid l
319. sure the level is above the MIN but not over the MAX mark 6 31 What to Add When you do need brake fluid use only DOT 3 brake NOTICE fluid Refer to Recommended Fluids and Lubricants in the Index Use new brake fluid from a sealed Using the wrong fluid can badly damage container only brake system parts For example just a few Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area drops of mineral based oil such as engine around the cap before removing it This will help keep oil in your brake system can damage brake dirt from entering the reservoir system parts so badly that they ll have to be replaced Don t let someone put in the wrong kind of fluid If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle s painted surfaces the paint finish can be damaged Be careful not to spill brake fluid on your vehicle If you do wash it off immediately See Appearance Care in the Index With the wrong kind of fluid in your brake system your brakes may not work well or they may not even work at all This could cause a crash Always use the proper brake fluid 6 32 Brake Wear Your vehicle has four wheel disc brakes Disc brake pads have built in wear indicators that make a high pitched warning sound when the brake pads are worn and new pads are needed The sound may come and go or be heard all the time your vehicle is moving except when you are pushing on the brake pedal firmly The brake wear warning sound me
320. t If you have four wheel drive your vehicle will be free to roll even if your shift lever is in PARK P if your transfer case is in NEUTRAL So be sure the transfer case is in a drive gear not in NEUTRAL See Four Wheel Drive Automatic Transfer Case in the Index And if you leave the vehicle with the engine running it could overheat and even catch fire You or others could be injured Don t leave your vehicle with the engine running unless you have to 2 36 If you have to leave your vehicle with the engine running be sure your vehicle is in PARK P and your parking brake is firmly set before you leave it After you ve moved the shift lever into PARK P hold the regular brake pedal down Then see if you can move the shift lever away from PARK P without first pulling it toward you or pressing the button on a console shift lever If you can it means that the shift lever wasn t fully locked into PARK P Torque Lock Automatic Transmission If you are parking on a hill and you don t shift your transmission into PARK P properly the weight of the vehicle may put too much force on the parking pawl in the transmission You may find it difficult to pull the shift lever out of PARK P This is called torque lock To prevent torque lock set the parking brake and then shift into PARK P properly before you leave the driver s seat To find out how see Shifting Into PARK P in the I
321. t Bulbs Capacities and Specifications Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts Service Your dealer knows your vehicle best and wants you to be happy with it We hope you ll go to your dealer for all your service needs You ll get genuine GM parts and GM trained and supported service people We hope you ll want to keep your GM vehicle all GM Genuine GM parts have one of these marks ACDelco n T NINE adele Doing Your Own Service Work If you want to do some of your own service work you ll want to use the proper service manual It tells you much more about how to service your vehicle than this manual can To order the proper service manual see Service and Owner Publications in the Index Your vehicle has an air bag system Before attempting to do your own service work see Servicing Your Air Bag Equipped Vehicle in the Index You should keep a record with all parts receipts and list the mileage and the date of any service work you perform See Maintenance Record in the Index You can be injured and your vehicle could be damaged if you try to do service work ona vehicle without knowing enough about it Besure you have sufficient knowledge experience the proper replacement parts and tools before you attempt any vehicle maintenance task Be sure to use the proper nuts bolts and other fasteners English and metric fasteners can be easily confused If you use the wrong fast
322. t clicks from the lamp assembly 7 Put the socket into the assembly and turn the socket clockwise until it locks in place 8 Install the lamp assembly Install and tighten the screws 9 Close the endgate liftgate Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement Windshield wiper blades should be inspected at least twice a year for wear or cracking See Wiper Blade Check in Section 7 of this manual under Part B Owner Checks and Services for more information See Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts in the Index for the proper type of replacement blade NOTICE Use care when removing or installing a blade assembly Accidental bumping can cause the arm to fall back and strike the windshield 6 39 1 To remove the old wiper blades lift the wiper arm 2 Press down on the blade assembly pivot locking tab until it locks into a vertical position Pull down on the blade assembly to release it from the wiper arm hook 3 Remove the insert from the blade assembly The insert has two notches at one end that are locked by the bottom claws of the blade assembly At the notched end pull the insert from the blade assembly A Blade Assembly B Arm Assembly C Locking Tab 4 To install the new wiper insert slide the insert D D Blade Pivot notched end last into the end with two blade claws A E Hook Slot Slide the insert all the way through the blade claws at the opposite end B The plastic caps C
323. t is also on you don t have anti lock brakes and there s a problem with your regular brakes See Brake System Warning Light earlier in this section The anti lock brake system warning light should come on briefly when you turn the ignition key to RUN If the light doesn t come on then have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem 2 81 Engine Coolant Temperature Gage Canada United States This gage shows the engine coolant temperature If the gage pointer moves into the red area your engine is too hot It means that your engine coolant has overheated If you have been operating your vehicle under normal driving conditions you should pull off the road stop your vehicle and turn off the engine as soon as possible The Problems on the Road section of this manual show you what to do See Engine Overheating in the Index 2 82 Malfunction Indicator Lamp Service Engine Soon Light SERVICE ENGINE SOON United States Canada Your vehicle is equipped with a computer which monitors operation of the fuel ignition and emission control systems This system is called OBD II On Board Diagnostics Second Generation and is intended to assure that emissions are at acceptable levels for the life of the vehicle helping to produce a cleaner environment The SERVICE ENGINE SOON light comes on to indicate that there is a problem and service is required Malfunctions ofte
324. temperature and oil viscosity but readings above the low pressure zone indicate the normal operating range A reading in the low pressure zone may be caused by a dangerously low oil level or other problems causing low oil pressure 2 86 Security Warning Light This light will come on briefly when you turn the key toward START The light will stay on until the engine starts SECURITY If the light flashes the Passlock system has entered a tamper mode If the vehicle fails to start see Passlock in the Index If the light comes on continuously while driving and stays on there may be a problem with the Passlock system Your vehicle will not be protected by Passlock and you should see your dealer Also see Content Theft Deterrent in the Index for additional information regarding the SECURITY light Service Four Wheel Drive Warning Light If Equipped This light should come on briefly when you turn on the ignition as a check to show you it is working SERVICE 4WD The SERVICE 4WD light comes on to indicate that there may be a problem with the drive system and service is required Malfunctions can be indicated by the system before any problem is apparent which may prevent serious damage to the vehicle This system is also designed to assist your service technician in correctly diagnosing a malfunction Tow Haul Mode Light If Equipped This light should come on when the tow haul mode has bee
325. ter reading and who performed the service in the boxes provided after the maintenance interval Any additional information from Owner Checks and Services or Periodic Maintenance can be added on the following record pages Also you should retain all maintenance receipts Your owner information portfolio is a convenient place to store them Maintenance Record ODOMETER DATE READING SERVICED BY MAINTENANCE PERFORMED 7 52 Maintenance Record ODOMETER DATE READING SERVICED BY MAINTENANCE PERFORMED Maintenance Record ODOMETER DATE READING SERVICED BY MAINTENANCE PERFORMED Maintenance Record ODOMETER DATE READING SERVICED BY MAINTENANCE PERFORMED Maintenance Record ODOMETER DATE READING SERVICED BY MAINTENANCE PERFORMED Section 8 Customer Assistance Information Here you will find out how to contact GMC if you need assistance This section also tells you how to obtain service publications and how to report any safety defects AN 8 8 8 8 nas G0 00 Q0 ona Customer Satisfaction Procedure Customer Assistance for Text Telephone TTY Users Customer Assistance Offices GM Mobility Program for Persons with Disabilities Roadside Assistance Canadian Roadside Assistance Courtesy Transportation Warranty Information Reporting Safety Defects to the United States Government Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian Government Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors Ordering Ow
326. tes when the ignition is off This will keep your battery from running down If the battery run down protection shuts off the interior lamps it may be necessary to do one of the following to return to normal operation Shut off all lamps and close all doors or turn the ignition key to RUN Mirrors Inside Day Night Rearview Mirror Pull the tab under the mirror toward you to reduce glare from headlamps behind you after dark Push the tab away from you for normal daytime operation 2 53 Electrochromic Day Night Inside Rearview Mirror If Equipped This mirror automatically changes to reduce glare from headlamps behind you A photocell on the back of the mirror senses when it is becoming dark outside Another photocell built into the mirror surface senses when headlamps are behind you At night when the glare is too high the mirror will gradually darken to reduce glare this change may take a few seconds The mirror will return to its clear daytime state when the glare is reduced The mirror will also return to its clear daytime state when the vehicle is put into REVERSE R 2 54 Press the AUTO button at the base of the mirror to turn on the automatic feature The button has an indicator light to show it is on Press the OFF button to turn the automatic feature off Time Delay The automatic mirror has a time delay feature which prevents unnecessary switching from the night back to
327. the need to change throttle position when pulling a heavy trailer This feature is turned on or off by pressing a button on the floor console When the feature is on a light on the instrument panel will illuminate to indicate that the Tow Haul Mode has been selected TOW HAUL 4 50 See Tow Haul Mode Light in the Index The Tow Haul Mode is automatically turned off each time the vehicle is started The Tow Haul Mode is most effective when the vehicle and trailer combined weight is at least 75 of the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR and the maximum trailer weight rating for the vehicle See Gross Vehicle Weight Rating and Trailer Weight in the Index The Tow Haul Mode for hauling a heavy trailer is most useful under the following conditions When driving through hilly terrain at speeds below 55 mph 88 km h When driving in low speed or stop and go traffic below 55 mph 88 km h When driving in parking lots Use the Tow Haul Mode instead of the previous recommendation to shift to THIRD 3 gear to improve fuel economy at highway speeds and shift performance at lower speeds Operating in the Tow Haul Mode when not pulling a heavy trailer will not cause damage to the vehicle but you may experience reduced fuel economy and undesirable performance from the engine and transmission The Tow Haul Mode should be used only when pulling a heavy trailer Weight of the Trailer How heavy can a trai
328. the threshold level is about 14 to 18 mph 23 to 29 km h The threshold level can vary however with specific vehicle design so that it can be somewhat above or below this range If your vehicle strikes something that will move or deform such as a parked car the threshold level will be higher The air bag is not designed to inflate in rollovers side impacts or rear impacts because inflation would not help the occupant In any particular crash no one can say whether an air bag should have inflated simply because of the damage to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs were Inflation is determined by the angle of the impact and how quickly the vehicle slows down in frontal or near frontal impacts The air bag system is designed to work properly under a wide range of conditions including off road usage Observe safe driving speeds especially on rough terrain As always wear your safety belt See Off Road Driving in the Index for more tips on off road driving What makes an air bag inflate In an impact of sufficient severity the air bag sensing system detects that the vehicle is in a crash The sensing system triggers a release of gas from the inflator which inflates the air bag The inflator air bag and related hardware are all part of the air bag modules inside the steering wheel and in the instrument panel in front of the right front passenger 1 27 How does an air bag restrain In moderate to severe front
329. tion about availability All Courtesy Transportation arrangements will be administered by appropriate dealer personnel Canadian Vehicles For warranty repairs during the Complete Vehicle Coverage period of the General Motors of Canada New Vehicle Limited Warranty alternative transportation may be available under the Courtesy Transportation Program Please consult your dealer for details General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify change or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at any time and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility pursuant to the terms and conditions described herein at its sole discretion Warranty Information Your vehicle comes with a separate warranty booklet that contains detailed warranty information REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS TO THE UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA in addition to notifying General Motors If NHTSA receives similar complaints it may open an investigation and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it may order a recall and remedy campaign However NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you your dealer or General Motors To contact NHTSA you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll free at 1 800 424 9393 or 366 0123 in the Washington
330. tion to move the vehicle Windows Manual Windows Turn the hand crank on each door to raise or lower your manual side door windows Power Windows If Equipped If you have the optional power windows the controls are located on the armrests on each of the side doors The switches operate the windows when the ignition is on or when Retained Accessory Power RAP is present See Retained Accessory Power in the Index The driver s door has a switch for the passenger windows as well Press the side of the switch with the down arrow to lower the window Press the side of the switch with the up arrow to raise the window Express Down Window The driver s window switch has an express down feature that allows you to lower it without holding the window switch Hold the driver s window switch down for briefly to activate the express down feature Lightly tap the switch to open the window slightly The express down feature can be interrupted at any time by pressing the up arrow end of the switch Lockout Switch Four door vehicles have a lockout feature to prevent passengers from operating the power windows It is located on the driver s door armrest Press LOCK to activate this feature Press NORM and the windows will return to normal operation 2 41 Swing Out Windows 2 Door Only If your vehicle has rear swing out windows unlatch them at their clasps and push out on the glass to open them When you
331. to LOCK only when the shift lever is in PARK P With a manual transmission the key should turn to LOCK only when you press the key release button On all vehicles the key should come out only in LOCK 7 45 Parking Brake and Automatic Transmission PARK P Mechanism Check When you are doing this check your vehicle could begin to move You or others could be injured and property could be damaged Make sure there is room in front of your vehicle in case it begins to roll Be ready to apply the regular brake at once should the vehicle begin to move 7 46 Park on a fairly steep hill with the vehicle facing downhill Keeping your foot on the regular brake set the parking brake To check the parking brake s holding ability With the engine running and transmission in NEUTRAL N slowly remove foot pressure from the regular brake pedal Do this until the vehicle is held by the parking brake only To check the PARK P mechanism s holding ability With the engine running shift to PARK P Then release the parking brake followed by the regular brake Underbody Flushing Service At least every spring use plain water to flush any corrosive materials from the underbody Take care to clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other debris can collect Part C Periodic Maintenance Inspections Listed in this part are inspections and services which should be performed at least twice a year for instance each spr
332. to check the fuse see Fuses and Circuit Breakers in the Index See your dealer for service In an emergency call the GM Roadside Assistance Center See Roadside Assistance in the Index 2 15 New Vehicle Break In NOTICE Your vehicle doesn t need an elaborate break in But it will perform better in the long run if you follow these guidelines Keep your speed at 55 mph 88 km h or less for the first 500 miles 805 km Don t drive at any one speed fast or slow for the first 500 miles 805 km Don t make full throttle starts Avoid making hard stops for the first 200 miles 322 km or so During this time your new brake linings aren t yet broken in Hard stops with new linings can mean premature wear and earlier replacement Follow this breaking in guideline every time you get new brake linings Don t tow a trailer during break in See Towing a Trailer in the Index for more information 2 16 Ignition Positions Use the key to turn the ignition switch to five different positions ACCESSORY A This position lets you use things like the radio and the windshield wipers when the engine is off Push in the key and turn it toward you Your steering wheel will remain locked just as it was before you inserted the key NOTICE Don t operate accessories in the ACCESSORY position for long periods of time Prolonged operation of accessories in the ACCESSORY po
333. to select the band Tune in the desired station Press SET SET will appear on the display AR WN Press one of the four pushbuttons within five seconds Whenever you press that numbered button the station you set will return 6 Repeat the steps for each pushbutton 3 13 In addition to the four stations already set up to three more stations may be preset on each band by pressing two adjoining buttons at the same time Just 1 Tune in the desired station 2 Press SET SET will appear on the display 3 Press two adjoining buttons at the same time within five seconds Whenever you press the same two buttons the station you set will return 4 Repeat the steps for each pair of pushbuttons P SCAN Select either AM FM1 or FM2 mode and press both SEEK buttons to scan through each of your preset stations The system will scan through and play each preset station stored on your pushbuttons for a few seconds Press either SEEK button or RECALL to stop scanning through the preset stations Setting the Tone BASS Slide this lever up or down to increase or decrease bass TREB Slide this lever up or down to increase or decrease treble If a station is weak or noisy you may want to decrease the treble 3 14 Adjusting the Speakers BAL Turn the control behind the upper knob to move the sound to the left or right speakers The middle position balances the sound between the speakers FADE Turn the control behi
334. to slow down on slippery surfaces because stopping distance will be longer and vehicle control more limited While driving on a surface with reduced traction try your best to avoid sudden steering acceleration or braking including engine braking by shifting to a lower gear Any sudden changes could cause the tires to slide You may not realize the surface is slippery until your vehicle is skidding Learn to recognize warning clues such as enough water ice or packed snow on the road to make a mirrored surface and slow down when you have any doubt Remember Any anti lock brake system ABS helps avoid only the braking skid 4 15 Off Road Driving with Your Four Wheel Drive Vehicle This off road guide is for vehicles that have four wheel drive Also see Anti Lock Brakes in the Index If your vehicle doesn t have four wheel drive you shouldn t drive off road unless you re on a level solid surface Off road driving can be great fun But it does have some definite hazards The greatest of these is the terrain itself Off roading means you ve left the great North American road system behind Traffic lanes aren t marked Curves aren t banked There are no road signs Surfaces can be slippery rough uphill or downhill In short you ve gone right back to nature Off road driving involves some new skills And that s why it s very important that you read this guide You Il fin
335. to use a scraper or wire brush later if you need to to get all the rust or dirt off 5 25 Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts If you do the nuts might come loose Your wheel could fall off causing a serious accident 7 Place the spare on the wheel mounting surface 5 26 8 Put the nuts on by hand Make sure the rounded end is toward the wheel Tighten each nut by hand until the wheel is held against the hub If a nut can t be turned by hand use the wheel wrench and see your dealer as soon as possible 9 Lower the vehicle by turning the jack handle counterclockwise Lower the jack completely 10 Use the wrench to tighten the wheel nuts firmly in a crisscross sequence A as shown OQ Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened wheel nuts can cause the wheel to become loose and even come off This could lead to an accident Be sure to use the correct wheel nuts If you have to replace them be sure to get new GM original equipment wheel nuts Stop somewhere as soon as you can and have the nuts tightened with a torque wrench to 100 lb ft 140 N m 5 27 Follow this diagram to store the NOTICE underbody mounted spare Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead to A Retainer brake pulsation and rotor damage To avoid B Valve Stem expensive brake repairs evenly tighten the wheel Pointed Down nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper C Spare or Flat Tire torque specifi
336. uch friction You could have an air out and a serious accident See Loading Your Vehicle in the Index Underinflated tires pose the same danger as overloaded tires The resulting accident NOTICE Don t let anyone tell you that underinflation or overinflation is all right It s not If your tires don t have enough air underinflation you can could cause serious injury Check all tires get the following frequently to maintain the recommended pressure Tire pressure should be checked when your tires are cold Overinflated tires are more likely to be cut punctured or broken by a sudden impact such as when you hit a pothole Keep tires at the recommended pressure Worn old tires can cause accidents If your tread is badly worn or if your tires have been damaged replace them Too much flexing Too much heat Tire overloading Bad wear Bad handling Bad fuel economy NOTICE Continued 6 42 NOTICE Continued If your tires have too much air overinflation you can get the following Unusual wear Bad handling Rough ride Needless damage from road hazards When to Check Check your tires once a month or more Also check the tire pressure of the spare tire How to Check Use a good quality pocket type gage to check tire pressure You can t tell if your tires are properly inflated simply by looking at them Radial tires may look properly inflated even when they re underinflat
337. uids and Lubricants lists some recommended products necessary to help keep your vehicle properly maintained These products or their equivalents should be used whether you do the work yourself or have it done Part E Maintenance Record is a place for you to record and keep track of the maintenance performed on your vehicle Keep your maintenance receipts They may be needed to qualify your vehicle for warranty repairs Part A Scheduled Maintenance Services Using Your Maintenance Schedule We at General Motors want to help you keep your vehicle in good working condition But we don t know exactly how you ll drive it You may drive very short distances only a few times a week Or you may drive long distances all the time in very hot dusty weather You may use your vehicle in making deliveries Or you may drive it to work to do errands or in many other ways Because of all the different ways people use their vehicles maintenance needs vary You may need more frequent checks and replacements So please read the following and note how you drive If you have any questions on how to keep your vehicle in good condition see your dealer This part tells you the maintenance services you should have done and when you should schedule them If you go to your dealer for your service needs you ll know that GM trained and supported service people will perform the work using genuine GM parts The proper fluids and lubricants to u
338. ure you replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical size and rating 6 59 If you ever have a problem on the road and don t have a spare fuse you can borrow one that has the same amperage Just pick some feature of your vehicle that you can get along without like the radio or cigarette lighter and use its fuse if it is the correct amperage Replace it as soon as you can Instrument Panel Fuse Block The instrument panel fuse block is at the driver s end of the instrument panel Remove the cover by turning the fastener counterclockwise Extra fuses and the fuse extractor are provided in the cover To reinstall the fuse panel cover push in and turn the fastener clockwise 6 60 BATT PWR PWR crs CIGAR LKS HVAC Hvac CRUISE L mR a CLSTA PARK LP WPR WPR RDO STR WHL uum ati TE IGN RDO IGN NOILYWHOJNI ADO Td ASNA Fuse Circuit Breaker A B 1 2 Usage Not Used Not Used Not Used Cigarette Lighter Data Link Connector Cruise Control Module and Switch Body Control Module Heated Seats Gages Body Control Module Instrument Panel Cluster Parking Lamps Power Window Switch Body Control Module Ashtray Lamp Steering Wheel Radio Controls Headlamps Switch Body control Module Headlamp Relay Courtesy Lamps Battery Run Down Protection HVAC Control Head Manual Fuse Circuit Breaker 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
339. urface is like before you drive it Stalling on an Incline If your vehicle stalls when you re crossing an incline be sure you and your passengers get out on the uphill side even if the door there is harder to open If you get out on the downhill side and the vehicle starts to roll over yov ll be right in its path If you have to walk down the slope stay out of the path the vehicle will take if it does roll over Getting out on the downhill low side of a vehicle stopped across an incline is dangerous If the vehicle rolls over you could be crushed or killed Always get out on the uphill high side of the vehicle and stay well clear of the rollover path Driving in Mud Sand Snow or Ice When you drive in mud snow or sand your wheels won t get good traction You can t accelerate as quickly turning is more difficult and you II need longer braking distances It s best to use a low gear when you re in mud the deeper the mud the lower the gear In really deep mud the idea is to keep your vehicle moving so you don t get stuck 4 27 When you drive on sand you ll sense a change in wheel traction But it will depend upon how loosely packed the sand is On loosely packed sand as on beaches or sand dunes your tires will tend to sink into the sand This has an effect on steering accelerating and braking You may want to reduce the air pressure in your tires slightly when driving on sand Th
340. vehicle s safety belt will fasten around you you should use it But if a safety belt isn t long enough to fasten your dealer will order you an extender It s free When you go in to order it take the heaviest coat you will wear so the extender will be long enough for you The extender will be just for you and just for the seat in your vehicle that you choose Don t let someone else use it and use it only for the seat it is made to fit To wear it just attach it to the regular safety belt Checking Your Restraint Systems Now and then make sure the safety belt reminder light and all your belts buckles latch plates retractors and anchorages are working properly Look for any other loose or damaged safety belt system parts If you see anything that might keep a safety belt system from doing its job have it repaired Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in a crash They can rip apart under impact forces If a belt is torn or frayed get a new one right away Also look for any opened or broken air bag covers and have them repaired or replaced The air bag system does not need regular maintenance 1 56 Replacing Restraint System Parts After a Crash If you ve had a crash do you need new belts After a very minor collision nothing may be necessary But if the belts were stretched as they would be if worn during a more severe crash then you need new belts If you ever see a label on the driver
341. vehicle or the GAWR for either the front or rear axle If you do have a heavy load you should spread it out Similar appearing vehicles may have different GVWRs and payloads Please note your vehicle s Certification Tire label or consult your dealer for additional details Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR or either the maximum front or rear GAWR If you do parts on your vehicle can break and it can change the way your vehicle handles These could cause you to lose control and crash Also overloading can shorten the life of your vehicle Using heavier suspension components to get added durability might not change your weight ratings Ask your dealer to help you load your vehicle the right way NOTICE Your warranty does not cover parts or components that fail because of overloading If you put things inside your vehicle like suitcases tools packages or anything else they will go as fast as the vehicle goes If you have to stop or turn quickly or if there is a crash they Il keep going Things you put inside your vehicle can strike and injure people in a sudden stop or turn or in a crash Put things in the cargo area of your vehicle Try to spread the weight evenly Never stack heavier things like suitcases inside the vehicle so that some of them are above the tops of the seats Don t leave an unsecured child restraint in your vehicle When you carry something insi
342. vehicle in a crash And they can strike others in the vehicle who are wearing safety belts Rear Seat Outside Passenger Positions 1 32 Lap Shoulder Belt The positions next to the windows have lap shoulder belts Here s how to wear one properly 1 Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you Don t let it get twisted The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt across you very quickly If this happens let the belt go back slightly to unlock it Then pull the belt across you more slowly 2 Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure When the shoulder belt is pulled out all the way it will lock If it does let it go back all the way and start again If the belt is not long enough see Safety Belt Extender at the end of this section Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to 3 To make the lap part tight pull down on the buckle end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder part 1 33 lt 2 2 Ie 4 E E EA X J ow yp K Ke Hie YS P a 1 34 The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on the hips just touching the thighs In a crash this applies force to the strong pelvic bones And you d be less likely to slide under the l
343. ving across an incline puts more weight on the downhill wheels This could cause a downhill slide or a rollover Surface conditions can be a problem when you drive across a hill Loose gravel muddy spots or even wet grass can cause your tires to slip sideways downhill If the vehicle slips sideways it can hit something that will trip it a rock a rut etc and roll over Hidden obstacles can make the steepness of the incline even worse If you drive across a rock with the uphill wheels or if the downhill wheels drop into a rut or depression your vehicle can tilt even more 4 26 For reasons like these you need to decide carefully whether to try to drive across an incline Just because the trail goes across the incline doesn t mean you have to drive it The last vehicle to try it might have rolled over Driving across an incline that s too steep will make your vehicle roll over You could be seriously injured or killed If you have any doubt about the steepness of the incline don t drive across it Find another route instead Q What if Pm driving across an incline that s not too steep but I hit some loose gravel and start to slide downhill What should I do A If you feel your vehicle starting to slide sideways turn downhill This should help straighten out the vehicle and prevent the side slipping However a much better way to prevent this is to get out and walk the course so you know what the s
344. ving electrical equipment on for extended periods will drain your battery 2 67 OnStar System If Equipped OnStar is a vehicle communications service The following services are available through a subscription with OnStar and are available 24 hours a day Emergency Services Automatic Notification of Air Bag Deployment Theft Notification and Stolen Vehicle Tracking Roadside Assistance with Location Remote Diagnostics OnStar MED NET Accident Assist Convenience Services Remote Door Unlock Route Support Concierge Services Ride Assist A complete user s guide is provided with the OnStar System For more information contact OnStar at 1 888 ONSTAR7 2 68 Sunroof If Equipped Your vehicle may be equipped with a power sliding sunroof To open or close your sunroof the ignition or Retained Accessory Power RAP needs to be on See Retained Accessory Power in the Index Press and release the rear side of the button in the mini console to open the sunroof You can press the forward side of the button to close the sunroof Once the sunroof is closed press the forward side of the button to open the sunroof to the vent position The sunroof is also equipped with a sunshade which you can pull forward to block sun rays Mini Console Full Size Console This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 this device may not caus
345. vy duty trailer wiring is fused in the engine compartment fuse block See Fuses and Circuit Breakers in the Index Both harnesses have no connector and should be wired by a qualified electrical technician The technician can use the following color code chart when connecting the wiring harness to your trailer Dark Blue Use for electric trailer brakes or auxiliary wiring eight wire harness only Red Use for battery charging it connects to the starter solenoid eight wire harness only Light Green Back up lamps Brown Taillamps and parking lamps Yellow Left stoplamp and turn signal Dark Green Right stoplamp and turn signal White Ground wire Light Blue Auxiliary stoplamp Securely attach the harness to the trailer then tape or strap it to your vehicle s frame rail Be sure you leave it loose enough so the wiring doesn t bend or break but not so loose that it drags on the ground Store the harness in its original place Wrap the harness together and tie it neatly so it won t be damaged 4 59 Section 5 Problems on the Road Here you ll find what to do about some problems that can occur on the road 5 2 Hazard Warning Flashers 5 11 5 2 Other Warning Devices 5 1 5 3 Jump Starting 5 18 5 7 Towing Your Vehicle 5 19 5 9 Engine Overheating 5 32 Cooling System Engine Fan Noise If a Tire Goes Flat Changing a Flat Tire If Yov re Stuck In Sand Mud Ice or Snow 5 1 Hazard Warning Flas
346. w Replace the battery when there is a clear or light yellow hydrometer and a cranking complaint Trying to start your vehicle by pushing or pulling it won t work and it could damage your vehicle 1 Check the other vehicle It must have a 12 volt battery with a negative ground system NOTICE If the other system isn t a 12 volt system with a negative ground both vehicles can be damaged 2 Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables can reach but be sure the vehicles aren t touching each other If they are it could cause a ground connection you don t want You wouldn t be able to start your vehicle and the bad grounding could damage the electrical systems To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling set the parking brake firmly on each vehicle Put an automatic transmission vehicle in PARK P or a manual transmission vehicle in NEUTRAL If you have a four wheel drive vehicle with the Automatic Transfer Case be sure the transfer case is not in the NEUTRAL position Turn off the ignition on both vehicles Unplug unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette lighter or accessory power outlets if you have this option Turn off all lamps that aren t needed as well as radios This will avoid sparks and help save both batteries In addition it could save your radio NOTICE If you leave your radio on it could be badly damaged The repair wouldn t be covered by your warranty
347. whichever occurs first Lubricate chassis components or every 3 months whichever occurs first DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY 7 15 Short Trip City Scheduled Maintenance 39 000 Miles 65 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service See footnote Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote 42 000 Miles 70 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service See footnote Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote 7 16 Lubricate chassis components or every 3 months whichever occurs first Lubricate chassis components or every 3 months whichever occurs first DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY Short Trip City Scheduled Maintenance 45 000 Miles 75 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service Lubricate chassis components or
348. will be forced off F Arm Hook as the insert is fully inserted 6 40 5 Be sure that the notches are locked by the bottom claws Make sure that all other claws are properly locked on both sides of the insert slots A Claw in Notch B Correct Installation C Incorrect Installation 6 Put the blade assembly pivot in the wiper arm hook Pull up until the pivot locking tab locks in the hook slot 7 Carefully lower the wiper arm and blade assembly onto the windshield Backglass Wiper Blade Replacement See Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement in this section for instructions on how to change the backglass wiper blade The backglass wiper blade will not lock in a vertical position like the windshield wiper blade so care should be used when pulling it away from the vehicle Tires Your new vehicle comes with high quality tires made by a leading tire manufacturer If you ever have questions about your tire warranty and where to obtain service see your GM Warranty booklet for details 6 41 Inflation Tire Pressure The Certification Tire label which is on the driver s door edge above the door latch shows the correct Poorly maintained and improperly used tires inflation pressures for your tires when they re cold are dangerous Cold means your vehicle has been sitting for at least three hours or driven no more than 1 mile 1 6 km Overloading your tires can cause overheating as a result of too m
349. with your dealer first Some electrical equipment can damage your vehicle and the damage wouldn t be covered by your warranty Some add on electrical equipment can keep other components from working as they should Your vehicle has an air bag system Before attempting to add anything electrical to your vehicle see Servicing Your Air Bag Equipped Vehicle in the Index Headlamps The headlamp wiring is protected by an internal circuit breaker An electrical overload will cause the lamps to go on and off or in some cases to remain off If this happens have your headlamp wiring checked right away Windshield Wipers The windshield wiper motor is protected by a circuit breaker and a fuse If the motor overheats due to heavy snow or ice the wiper will stop until the motor cools If the overload is caused by some electrical problem be sure to get it fixed Power Windows and Other Power Options Circuit breakers protect the power windows and other power accessories When the current load is too heavy the circuit breaker opens and closes protecting the circuit until the problem is fixed or goes away Fuses and Circuit Breakers The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected from short circuits by a combination of fuses and circuit breakers This greatly reduces the chance of fires caused by electrical problems Look at the silver colored band inside the fuse If the band is broken or melted replace the fuse Be s
350. y 40 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the keyless entry transmitter if equipped or until the ignition key is turned to RUN or ACCESSORY The lamps will also stay on for approximately 40 seconds after you exit the vehicle unless you lock the doors with the keyless entry transmitter You can also turn the lamps on and off by pressing the switch near each lamp Dome Lamps The dome lamps will come on when you open a door You can also turn the dome lamps on by rotating the thumbwheel located next to the parking headlamps knob all the way up to the top detent position In this position the dome lamps will remain on until they are turned off You can use the DOME OVERRIDE button located below the parking headlamp knob to set the dome lamps to come on automatically when a door is opened or to remain off To turn the lamps off press the button into the in position With the button in this position the dome lamps will remain off when a door is open To return the lamps to automatic operation press the button again and return it to the out position With the button in this position the dome lamps will come on when you open a door This will override the illuminated entry feature unless you use your remote keyless entry transmitter to unlock the vehicle Battery Run Down Protection This feature shuts off the dome courtesy vanity reading glove box and underhood lamps if they are left on for more than 20 minu
351. y can t be driven no matter how well built the vehicle Many hills are simply too steep for any vehicle If you drive up them you will stall If you drive down them you can t control your speed If you drive across them you will roll over You could be seriously injured or killed If you have any doubt about the steepness don t drive the hill Approaching a Hill When you approach a hill you need to decide if it s one of those hills that s just too steep to climb descend or cross Steepness can be hard to judge On a very small hill for example there may be a smooth constant incline with only a small change in elevation where you can easily see all the way to the top 4 20 On a large hill the incline may get steeper as you near the top but you may not see this because the crest of the hill is hidden by bushes grass or shrubs Here are some other things to consider as you approach a hill Is there a constant incline or does the hill get sharply steeper in places Is there good traction on the hillside or will the surface cause tire slipping Is there a straight path up or down the hill so you won t have to make turning maneuvers Are there obstructions on the hill that can block your path boulders trees logs or ruts What s beyond the hill Is there a cliff an embankment a drop off a fence Get out and walk the hill if you don t know It s the smart way to find out
352. y may keep the air bag system from working properly Also the air bag system may not work properly if you relocate any of the air bag sensors If you have any questions about this you should contact Customer Assistance before you modify your vehicle The phone numbers and addresses for Customer Assistance are in Step Two of the Customer Satisfaction Procedure in this manual See Customer Satisfaction Procedure in the Index 1 30 Center Front Passenger Position 4 Door Models Lap Belt If your vehicle has a front bench seat someone can sit in the center position When you sit in the center front seating position you have a lap safety belt which has no retractor To make the belt longer tilt the latch plate and pull it along the belt To make the belt shorter pull its free end as shown until the belt is snug Buckle position and release it the same way as the lap part of a lap shoulder belt If the belt isn t long enough see Safety Belt Extender at the end of this section Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to 1 31 Rear Seat Passengers It s very important for rear seat passengers to buckle up Accident statistics show that unbelted people in the rear seat are hurt more often in crashes than those who are wearing safety belts Rear passengers who aren t safety belted can be thrown out of the
353. you can open the endgate glass 2 11 Emergency Release for Opening Endgate Liftgate 1 Peel back or slit the carpet locally to expose the access hole in the trim panel 2 Use a thin screwdriver to reach through the access holes in both the trim panel and the hardware cover Pry the release lever toward the passenger s side until the glass latch pops open 3 Reattach the carpet securely 2 12 Endgate Mounted Spare If your vehicle has an endgate mounted spare tire carrier you must move the carrier arm out of the way to open the glass Here s how to move the arm 1 Squeeze the release handle to free the carrier arm 2 Swing the carrier arm away from the endgate You may need to give it a slight tug 3 To latch the carrier arm swing it toward the endgate Theft Vehicle theft is big business especially in some cities Although your vehicle has a number of theft deterrent features we know that nothing we put on it can make it impossible to steal However there are ways you can help Key in the Ignition If you leave your vehicle with the keys inside it s an easy target for joy riders or professional thieves so don t do it When you park your vehicle and open the driver s door you ll hear a chime reminding you to remove your key from the ignition and take it with you Always do this Your steering wheel will be locked and so will your ignition If you have an automatic tran
354. you can from a possible collision Then steer around the problem to the left or right depending on the space available 4 12 An emergency like this requires close attention and a quick decision If you are holding the steering wheel at the recommended 9 and 3 o clock positions you can turn it a full 180 degrees very quickly without removing either hand But you have to act fast steer quickly and just as quickly straighten the wheel once you have avoided the object The fact that such emergency situations are always possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving at all times and wear safety belts properly Off Road Recovery You may find that your right wheels have dropped off the edge of a road onto the shoulder while you re driving OFF ROAD RECOVERY LEFT APPROX QUARTER TURN edge of paved surface If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the pavement recovery should be fairly easy Ease off the accelerator and then if there is nothing in the way steer so that your vehicle straddles the edge of the pavement You can turn the steering wheel up to one quarter turn until the right front tire contacts the pavement edge Then turn your steering wheel to go straight down the roadway Passing The driver of a vehicle about to pass another on a two lane highway waits for just the right moment accelerates moves around the vehicle ahead then goes back into the right lane again A simple maneuv
355. you pull the belt across you very quickly If this happens let the belt go back slightly to unlock it Then pull the belt across you more slowly 4 Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks 5 To make the lap part tight pull down on the buckle end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder belt The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on the hips just touching the thighs In a crash this applies force to the strong pelvic bones And you d be less likely to slide under the lap belt If you slid under it the belt would apply force at your abdomen This could cause serious or even fatal injuries The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest These parts of the body are best able to take belt restraining forces Ss 3 The safety belt locks if there s a sudden stop or crash or if you pull the belt very quickly out of the retractor 1 18 Q What s wrong with this You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt is too loose In a crash you would move forward too much which could increase injury The shoulder belt should fit against your body A 4 The shoulder belt is too loose It won t give nearly as much protection this way 1 19 Q What s wrong with this The belt is buckled in the wrong place 1 20 You can be seriously injure
356. you run the engine make it go a little faster than just idle That is push the accelerator slightly This uses less fuel for the heat that you get and it keeps the battery charged You will need a well charged battery to restart the vehicle and possibly for signaling later on with your headlamps Let the heater run for a while Then shut the engine off and close the window almost all the way to preserve the heat Start the engine again and repeat this only when you feel really uncomfortable from the cold But do it as little as possible Preserve the fuel as long as you can To help keep warm you can get out of the vehicle and do some fairly vigorous exercises every half hour or so until help comes 4 43 Recreational Vehicle Towing There may be times when you want to tow your vehicle behind another vehicle for use at your destination Be sure to use the proper towing equipment designed for recreational vehicle towing Follow the instructions for the towing equipment When towing your vehicle turn the ignition to OFF To prevent your battery from draining while towing remove the RDO BATT fuse from the instrument panel fuse block Be sure to replace the fuse when you reach your destination See Fuses and Circuit Breakers in the Index 4 44 Two Wheel Drive Vehicles and Vehicles with the Electronic Shift Transfer Case Two wheel drive vehicles and vehicles with the Electronic Shift Transfer Case should not be towed with a
357. your ashtray If you do cigarettes or other smoking materials could set them on fire causing damage To remove the front ashtray pull the bin upward To use the lighter press it in all the way and let go When it s ready it will pop back by itself NOTICE Don t hold a cigarette lighter in with your hand while it is heating If you do it won t be able to back away from the heating element when it s ready That can make it overload damaging the lighter and the heating element Sun Visors To block out glare you can pull the visor down You can also swing the visor from side to side Visor Vanity Mirror Pull the sun visor down and lift the cover to expose the vanity mirror Illuminated Visor Vanity Mirror If Equipped Pull the sun visor down and lift the mirror cover to turn on the lamps Accessory Power Outlets If Equipped If you have accessory power outlets you can plug in auxiliary electrical equipment The accessory power outlets are located near the center of the vehicle on the lower part of the instrument panel Just remove the plug from the outlet and follow the proper installation instructions that are included with any electrical equipment you install These circuits are protected by a fuse and have maximum current levels OTICE When using the accessory power outlets maximum electrical load must not exceed 20 amps Always turn off any electrical equipment when not in use Lea

2000 GMC Jimmy Owners Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents